Home

IS-IS Configuration

Contents

1. NMS Network Management System NSAP Network Service Access Point NSP Network Service Provider NTP Network Time Protocol NVT Network Virtual Terminal OAM Operation And Management OID Object ID OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSPF Open Shortest Path First PAP Password Authentication Protocol PAT Port Address Translation PCB Process Control Block PCM Pulse Code Modulation PDU Protocol Data Unit POS Packet over SDH PPP Point to Point Protocol PSNP Partial Sequence Num PDU PRT Process Registry Table QOS Quality of Service RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RADI US Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC Request For Comments RIP Routing Information Protocol RLE Route lookup engine RMON Remote Monitoring ROS Router Operation System RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control SMP Security Main Processor SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNP Sequence Num PDU SPF Shortest Path First TCP Transmission Control Protocol TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol TOS Type Of Service TELNET Telecommunication Network Protocol Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 367 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDH TTL Time To Live UDP User Datagram Protocol
2. J cel 2 1 1 GS MES S R1 192 168 1 1 30 R2 R1 configuration ZXR1LO_R1 config interface cel 1 1 1 ZXR10 Rl1 config if f encapsulation frame relay ZXR10_R1 config if frame relay interface mode point to multipoint ZXR10_R1 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R1 config if frame realy map ip 192 168 1 2 100 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 145 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA R2 configuration ZXR1LO_R2 config interface cel 2 1 1 ZXR10_R2 config if encapsulation frame relay ZXR10_R2 config if frame relay interface mode point to multipoint ZXR10 R2 config if ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 R2 config if frame relay intf type dce ZXR10 R2 config if frame realy map ip 192 168 1 1 100 146 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 1 0 Bridge Configuration Introduction Contents Layer 3 Function Link Layer Protocol This chapter introduces the bridging of POS and ATM interfaces and relevant configurations on ZXR10 GER This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 180 ToPics IN CHAPTER 10 Topic Page No POS Interface Bridge 147 ATM Interface Bridge 151 POS Interface Bridge POS Bridge Overview Bridge function of the POS interface covers layer 3 function and transparent transmission of the bridge interface a
3. eceeeeseee eee e estes eee eeeeeeeaes 192 Table 236 Ip Ospf Dead Interval Command 192 Table 237 Neighbor Command seesseeseee 193 Table 238 Area Authentication Command 194 Table 239 Ip Ospf Authentication Command 194 Table 240 Ip Ospf Message Digest Key ssssss 195 Table 241 Area Authentication Command 197 Table 242 Stubby Area Command sse 197 Table 243 Totally Stubby Area eese emn 197 Table 244 Not So Stubby Area ceeeeeen emnes 198 Table 245 Inter Area Route Aggregation Command 201 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 379 380 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Table 246 Summary Address COMMAaNd ccoccccconccconnccnnnncnns 201 Table 247 Default Route Command ssessessssss 202 Table 248 Virtual Link Command sees 203 Table 249 Redistribute Command sseseseeesss 205 Table 250 Administrative Distance Command 206 Table 251 Show Ip Ospf Command eene 206 Table 252 Show Ip Ospf Interface Command 206 Table 253 Show Ip Ospf Neighbor Command 207 Table 254 Show Ip Ospf Database coocccccnccnconccnncnncnnnnnnnos 207 Table 255 Debug Ip Ospf Comman
4. seen 22 Smnp Buttons Functions ccc eee eee eee 22 Line Interface Cards vctieecclec desta cere tenes ee RR n teas 23 RE 01A3 SFP Card Interface Features 24 2 RE 01A3 SFP Card Indicators sss 24 RE 01CP3 SFP Interface Features s 25 RE 01CP3 SFP Card Indicators sss 25 RE 01GP48 SO2KLC Card Indicators 26 RE 01GP48 S15KLC Card Indicators 27 RE 01P48 SO2KLC Card Indicators 28 RE 01P48 S15KLC Card Indicators 29 RE 02CE3 75 Card Indicators sessus 30 RE 02GE E100RJ Card Specifications 31 on the RE 02GE Card Indicators 31 RE 02GE E100RJ Card Specifications 32 RE 02GE E100RJ Card Indicators 32 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 373 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Table 30 RE 02GE Gbic Card Specifications 33 Table 31 RE 02GE Gbic Card Indicators oocococcnncnnconnnnnnno nos 33 Table 32 RE 02P12 SFP Card Interface Features 35 Table 33 RE 02P12 SFP Card Indicators 35 Table 34 RE 04P3 SFP Card Interface Features 36 Table 35 RE 04P3 SFP Card Indicators
5. Voltage waveform distortion lt 5 SPWA panel has three power supply indicators whose functions are listed in Table 47 TABLE 47 SPWA CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description 3 3V indicator green Indicates the working condition of 3 3V output of power supply board It is constantly on in the case of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage 2 5V indicator green Indicates the working condition of 2 5V output of power supply board It is constantly on in the case of normal working condition and it goes off in the case Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 43 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA SPWD Indicators Function Description of over under voltage Indicates the working condition of 48V output of 48V indicator power supply board It is constantly on in the case of green normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage SPWD panel is shown in Figure 33 FIGURE 33 SPWD PANEL SPWD technical parameters are shown below Technical Parameters Rated voltage 48V Allowed voltage range 57V 40V Input current 10A Maximum power consumption W 500W SPWD has four connection terminals They are 48V 48V GND PE protection ground and GND work ground SPWD panel
6. interface number command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 101 TABLE 101 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode eda lobal confi This enters into Packet over g g sonnet configuration mode number gt Result This enables to enter into interface configuration mode Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 97 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA 3 4 To configure an IP address of an interface use the ip address lt ip address gt lt net mask gt lt broadcast address gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 102 TABLE 102 IP ADDRESS COMMAND command command Command Function Format Mode ip address lt ip address gt interface This configures an ip address of lt net mask gt config an interface lt broadcast address gt Result This configures an ip address of an interface To configure clock source for PoS interface use clock source external internal line command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 103 TABLE 103 CLOCK SOURCE COMMAND Command Format command Command Function Mode clock source global This configures clock external internal line config source for POS interface Result This sets clock source of PoS interface END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 63 the pos3 4 4 interface of ZTE ZXR10 GER is connected to
7. Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 8 Smart Group Configuration ZXR10 config if exit ZXR10 config interface fei 2 3 ZXR10 config if smartgroup 1 mode active ZXR10 config if exit ZXR10 config interface smartgroupl ZXR10 config if smartgroup load balance per packet ZXR10 config if exit ZXR10 config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10 config if ip address 1 922 1 95 3 255 2554 255 0 ZXR10 config if exit ZXR10 config ip route 192 18 1 0 255 255 255 0 104 410 1051 SMARTGROUP Maintenance and Diagnosis Refer maintenance and diagnosis on ZTE ZXR10 GER router to below procedure for configuring smartgroup Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To display the configuration information of the smartgroup interface use show running config command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 154 TABLE 154 SHOW RUNNING CONFIG COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode o Interface This displays the configuration config 9 config information of the smartgroup Result This displays the configuration information of the smartgroup Display the relevant information of smartgroup group members use show lacp command in interface CO TA nfiguration mode as shown in Table 155 BLE 155 SHOW LACP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show lacp This displays the
8. Result This configures inter area authentication between different IS IS routers Configure SNP authentication by using command set snp authentication in IS IS config mode as shown in Table 278 TABLE 278 SNP AUTHENTICATION COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode set snp IS IS config This sets the SNP PDU authentication authentication Result This configures SNP authentication END OF STEPS For More information about IS IS configuration please follow the below procedures Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 221 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Reduce Memory Multi Area IS IS If a network is a larger one consider the use of multiple IS IS areas Based on geographic locations and functions close routers can be divided into same area The area division helps to reduce the requirements for memory so that routers in the area only need to maintain a smaller link state database Figure 93 show a multi area IS IS configuration example FIGURE 93 MULTI AREA CONFIGURATION 192 168 10 0 24 192 16812 0 24 192 168 14 1 24 R5 9216815004 R6 Where R1 belongs to area 1 R2 R3 and R4 belong to area O and R5 and R6 belong to area 2 On Ri route aggregation is performed for network sections in area 1 Default routes on R6 are redistributed into IS IS The detailed configuration of each router in the a
9. 244 Synchronization Command ssssssss 245 Neighbor Route Reflector Command 247 Bgp Confederation Identifier Command 249 Bgp Dampening Command sess 251 Show Ip Bgp Protocol Command 254 Show Ip Bgp Neighbor Command 254 Show Ip Bgp Route Command s 254 Show Ip Bgp Summary Command 255 Topics In Chapter 17 sseseeeen nnne 257 Route Map Command eeeeeeeen enne 259 Match Set Command sse nnns 259 Match Ip Address ooococccncconconnncanccnncnnnnnnnrnnnnnnes 260 Ip Next Hop Command ssseeeseeeeese 260 Set Interface Command sseseeessesssss 260 Set Ip Default Next Hop Command 260 Set Default Interface Command 261 Ip Policy Route Map Command 261 Topics In Chapter 18 ssseeseeseeeseeesel 265 Interface Tunnel Command sesssses 268 Tunnel Source Command sssssssssrsssrrnsrrrrrrersene 269 Tunnel Destination Command 269 Tunnel Key COMMaNd ococoncnccnnconnnnnnnancnnncnnnnnns 269 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 381 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 382 Table 318 Tunnel Sequencing Command Table 319 Tun
10. 312 Background Purpose Prerequisite Steps y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA This is a significant improvement over hub and spoke architectures used by Frame Relay and other technologies Hub and spoke architectures require the end user to designate one customer edge node as the hub that is connected to all spoke sites All communication between sites first must go through the spoke site leading to potential bottlenecks and other performance problems With VPLS each customer edge device only requires a single connection to the provider edge and the provider edge provides full multipoint connectivity A VPLS consists of a collection of customer sites connected to provider edge devices that are implementing the emulated LAN service A virtual switching instance VSI is used at each VPLS provider edge router to implement the forwarding decisions of each VPLS The provider edge devices make the forwarding decisions between sites and encapsulate the Ethernet frames across a packet switched network using an Ethernet pseudowire Provider edge routers use a full mesh of pseudo wires to forward the Ethernet frames between provider edge nodes In a VPLS each device can communicate directly with its peers which is efficient for applications that must be propagated quickly throughout the network such as broadcast and distributed ERP Scalability and manageability are limited however th
11. Format Mode config Enters into global configuration k Exec terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode To enter into E1 configuration mode use controller cel_ lt interface name gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 87 TABLE 87 E1 CONFIGURATION COMMAND Command Command E Command Function Format Mode controller cel_ lt interface Global config enters El controller configuration mode name gt Result This enables to enter into E1 configuration mode To configure framing mode of an E1 interface use framing unframe frame command in controller configuration mode as shown in Table 88 TABLE 88 FRAMING COMMAND WINDOW Command Mode Command Function Command Format This configures framing mode of E1 interface When non framing mode controller is configured system automatically create a sub channel with channel ID 1 framing unframe frame Result This sets framing mode of an E1 interface 88 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 6 Interface Configuration 4 To configure E1 channel for channelized E1 use channel group lt channel number gt timeslots lt timeslots gt command in controller configuration mode as shown in Table 89 TABLE 89 CHANNEL GROUP COMMAND Command Mode Command Function Command Format channel group lt channel number gt timeslots lt timeslots gt This configures chan
12. Maximum transmission distance 100 m 100Base TX Note When the10 100Base TX port is interconnected with a hub switch or router a crossover cable should be used when it is interconnected with a host a straight through cable should be used There are two indicators on the higher part of each interface on the E O8FE E100RJ card one is on the left and the other is on the right Table 37 shows their functions TABLE 37 RE 08FE E100RJ CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description Upper left Indicates the connection status of the current indicator on each link When it is on it indicates the connection port yellow has been established Indicates the wire speed of the current link When it is on it indicates the wire speed of 100M when it is off it indicates the wire speed of 10M Upper right indicator on each port green RE 08FE SFP It is an eight port fast Ethernet optical interface card and provides eight 100Base FX optical ports In addition it can select SFX optical modules for its own use Figure 25 shows RE 08FE SFP card FIGURE 25 RE 08FE SFP CARD RE 08FE 115 D25 125 D3 F 135 DARIA E DS ELSE DEM 16 D7 SFP xr e re er y a EME EAN EA gems quus y X Xx RX i 1 RX TX RX TX RX TX RE O8FE SFP card adopts 100Base FX as its interface Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 37 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA
13. Result This enables to route the data packet to the specified next hop To route the data packet to the specified interface use set interface command in route mapping configuration mode as shown in Table 309 TABLE 309 SET INTERFACE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode route This enables to route the set interface mapping data packet to the specified configuration interface Result This enables to route the data packet to the specified interface To define the default route when destination is not obtained use set ip default next hop command in route mapping configuration mode as shown in Table 310 TABLE 310 SET IP DEFAULT NEXT HOP COMMAND command Command Command Function Format Mode route This defines the default set ip default next hop mapping route when destination is configuration not obtained Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 17 Policy Routing Configuration Result This defines the default route when destination is not obtained 7 To route the data packet to the default interface use set default interface command in route mapping configuration mode as shown in Table 311 TABLE 311 SET DEFAULT INTERFACE COMMAND Command Command z Command Function Format Mode route This enables to route the set detault mapping data packet to the default interface configuration interface Result This enables to route the data packet to the
14. TABLE 257 DEBUG IP OSPF LSA GENERATION Command Command Command Function Format Mode This turns on debugging debug ip ospf ENEE information switch for Isa generation returning OSPF LSA generation events Result This turns on debugging information for OSPF LSA 4 To turn on debugging information for important OSPF events use debug ip ospf events command in Exec mode as shown in Table 258 TABLE 258 DEBUG IP OsPF EVENTS Command Command Command Function Format Mode debug ip ospf Exec This turns on debugging 208 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration Command Command Command Function Format Mode events information switch for returning important OSPF events Result This turns on debugging information switch for returning important OSPFevents Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 209 I ntroduction Contents Definition Chapter 1 5 IS IS Configuration Overview IS IS protocol put forward by the International Standardization Organization ISO is a routing protocol used for Connectionless Network Service CLNS The IS IS protocol is a link state routing protocol based on the Dijkstra SPF algorithm The IS IS protocol is similar to the OSPF protocol in many aspects This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 259 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 15 Topic Page No IS IS Overview 211 IS IS Area 212 DIS amp Router Priority 213 B
15. name gt interface configuration mode Result This selects an interface to be configured and to enter into interface configuration mode To configure FR encapsulation for the interface use the following command as shown in TABLE 173 ENCAPSULATION FRAME RELAY COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function This configures an FR encapsulation for the interface encapsulation Interface frame relay configuration Result This configures an FR encapsulation for the interface To configure an IP address of the interface use the following command as shown in Table 174 TABLE 174 IP ADDRESS COMMAND command Command Command Function Format Mode ip address lt ip addr gt lt net mask gt Interface This configures an IP address broadcast configuration of the interface addr gt secondary Result This configures an IP address of the interface 4 To configure the equipment type use the following command as shown in Table 175 TABLE 175 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command gt Command Function Format Mode frame relay intf type Interface This configures the equipment lt equip configuration type type gt Result This configures the equipment type Note Equipment type name can be dce dte by default or nni Communication ends are dte and dce respectively If one end is configured with nni network network interface the other end is also configured with nni Confidential
16. ssessus 36 Table 36 RE 08FE E100RJ Card Interface Features 37 Table 37 RE 08FE E100RJ Card Indicators 37 Table 38 RE 08FE SFP Card Indicators ssesues 38 Table 39 RE 16CE1 120DB44 Card Interface Features 38 Table 40 RE 16CE1 120DB44 Card Indicators 39 Table 41 Interface Features of the RE 16CE1 75DB44 Card 39 Table 42 RE 16CE1 75DB44 Card Indicators 39 Table 43 Interface Features of the RE 16FE RJDB44 Card 40 Table 44 Description of Indicators on the RE 02GE Card Panel40 Table 45 Functions of GPWA Panel Indicators 42 Table 46 GPWD Panel Indicators coccoconccnccnncnnnnannnanannnnnanos 42 Table 47 SPWA Card Indicators oococccconccnccnncnnnnnnnnanannnnnanos 43 Table 48 Functions of SPWD Panel Indicators 44 Table 49 Fan Plug in Box Indicators eene 46 Table 50 Topics In Chapter 4 ooococccccnconconccnncnnnnannnnnnnnnnnanes 47 Table 51 Username Command sese 51 Table 52 Topics In Chapter 5 essere mnn 63 Table 53 Pwd Command sees 64 Table 54 Dir Command WiNndOW oococcnconccnccnncnnnnannnnnnnnnnnanes 64 Table 55 Delete Command Window 0ocococccnccnnconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanos 65 Table 56 Cd Command Window coccoccncnnccnccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanes 65 Table 57 Cd Command Window see 65 Ta
17. 200 hash mask length 30 This System is Candidate RP candidate RP address 55 1 1 45 fei 3 1 priority 100 Group acl 1 candidate RP address 43 43 43 43 static priority 0 5 To show the RP set information advertised by the BSR use show ip pim rp mapping command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 422 TABLE 422 SHOW IP Pim RP MAPPING COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip Priviliged This shows the RP set pim rp information advertised by the mapping BSR Result This shows the RP set information advertised by the BSR Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 355 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZXR10fshow ip pim rp mapping Group RP expires 22 61 30 0 Tuus 00 00 49 226 4 0 0 17 93 8 3 00 00 49 MSDP Maintenance and Purpose This topic describes how to diagnose ZTE uptime 01 24 57 01 24 57 Diagnosis and maintain MSDP procedure gives information about MSDP maintenance amp diagnosis Prerequisite Router CLI Privilged Mode has been accessed Steps 1 To show the detailed information of MSDP neighbors use show ip msdp sa cache lt group address gt lt source address gt command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 423 TABLE 423 SHOW IP MsDP PEER COMMAND Command Format command Mode show ip msdp sa Priviliged cache lt group address gt source address Command Function Th
18. 349 Table 411 Clear Ip Msdp Statistics Command 349 Table 412 Ip Mroute Command eee 350 Table 413 Show Ip Mroute Command sees 350 Table 414 Show Ip Mroute Forwarding Command 350 Table 415 Show Ip Rpf Command sees 351 Table 416 Show Ip Igmp Interface Command 351 Table 417 Show Ip Igmp Groups Command 352 Table 418 Show Ip Mroute Command sees 353 Table 419 Show Ip Pimsm Interface Command 354 Table 420 Show Ip PimSm Neighbor Command 354 Table 421 Show Ip Pim Bsr Command ssss 355 Table 422 Show Ip Pim Rp Mapping Command 355 Table 423 Show Ip Msdp Peer Command 356 Table 424 Show Ip Msdp Sa Cache Command 357 Table 425 Debug Ip Msdp Message Recv Command 357 384 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTE Tables Table 426 Debug Ip Msdp Command ssssss 358 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 385 Index 00DO0 215 216 222 223 224 048Mbps eem 88 OECD rose retina m CER RR UEAS 225 OXEREF acia ds 172 LOOM p d 73 76 128K iiis eviter e debet en 82 155M 5 525 xui eek pre cee 84 100 368Mbps eseeseeeeee 91 A rm 82 53EO0 215 222 223 224 225 622M
19. Address Interface state Nbr Query DR DR Count Intvl Prior 131 1 1 45 pos3 5 1 Up 1 30 13 55 93 1 30 1 1 43 fei 3 1 Up 0 30 30 20 1243 1 22 22 22 45 tunnel22 Up 1 30 22 22 22 45 1 3 To show information about the PIM SM neighbor use show ip pim bsr command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 420 TABLE 420 SHOW IP PiMSM NEIGHBOR COMMAND Command Command Mode Command Format Function show ip pim bsr Priviliged This shows information about the PIM SM neighbor Result This shows information about the PIM SM neighbor Example This shows neighbors of the PIM SM interface 354 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration ZXR10fshow ip pimsm neighbor Neighbor Address Interface DR Prio Uptime Expires L31 14 1 94 pos3 5 1 30000 00 19 34 00 01 29 22 22 22 43 tunnel22 1 03 21 25 00 01 16 4 To show the BSR information use show ip pim bsr command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 421 TABLE 421 SHow IP Pim BSR COMMAND Command Mode Command Command Format f Function show ip pimsm Priviliged neighbor This shows the BSR lt interface information name gt Result This shows the BSR information ZXR10 show ip pim bsr PIMSM Bootstrap information BSR address 131 1 1 45 Uptime 00 01 06 BSR Priority 200 Hash mask length 30 Expires 00 00 55 This system is a candidate BSR candidate BSR address 131 1 1 45 priority
20. Chapter 4 Usage and Operations 7 To configure the Radius Server parameters use radius server 1 authen master 192 168 2 1 1812 ger command as shown below ZXR10 config radius server 1 authen master 192 168 2 1 1812 ger Result This configures the radius server parameters Note Group Number is set to the ispgroup in step 6 the server IP address is set to the IP address of Radius Server the key is set to the NAS key on the Radius Server Note If Local is selected in step 2 this step is unnecessary Configuring SSH Client This topic describes how to configure SSH client Putty SSH Client has already been installed in the computer 1 Enable Putty exe at the SSH client Enter the IP address of the remote router 192 168 3 1 in hostname The interface is shown in Figure 44 FIGURE 44 SSH CLIENT LOGIN CONFIGURATION PR PuTTY Configuration Category Session Basic options for your PuTTY session oT ae m Specify your connection by host name or IP address ario d Host Name or IP address Port Bell 192 168 3 1 22 Features Protocol E Window C Raw C Telnet Rlogn SSH Ay Ppearence i Load save or delete a stored session Behaviour Translation Saved Sessions Selection Colours P Default Settings Load E Connection 1 _ Load Proxy 1only Save Telnet E He Rlogin E Delete SSH verhl Auth Tunnels Close window on exi
21. ENTER system boots with new image from FLASH After normal boot view the image version under running and confirm whether the upgrading is successful END OF STEPS Example Example is given in steps Data Backup and Recovery Purpose This procedure delivers information about how to make backup and recovery of image files present in flash Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed TFTP server is up and running as described in TFTP configuration topic Steps 1 To save running configuration into NVRAM and flash use write write flash command as shown in Table 71 TABLE 71 WRITE COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode write Exec This starts writing function writs EXEC This writes to flash memory flash write Exec This writes running system file to logging M amp S UPC write Exec This writes to NVRAM memory nvram 78 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Chapter 5 System Management Note When a command is used to modify configuration of a router the information is running in the memory in real time If the router reboots all new configurations will lost Result This writes running configuration into memory To backup configuration files on TFTP server or in FTP server use copy copy flash command as shown in Table 72 TABLE 72 CoPY COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode copy Exec This copies image a
22. I ntroduction Contents Purpose Prerequisite Overview This chapter introduces relevant configurations of the V Switch on the ZXR10 GER router This chapter covers following topics TABLE 144 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 7 Topic Page No V Switch Overview 119 Configuring V Switch 119 V Switch Maintenance and Diagnosis 122 V Switch Overview In the router BAS networking the router serves as two roles Forwarding PPPOE to the BAS equipment Implementing data convergence and providing such services as access VPN QoS NAT and multicast for important customers Therefore the ZXR10 GER implements layer 2 transmissions of packets in the static V Switch transparent transmission mode Configuring V Switch Refer to below procedure for configuring V switch on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 119 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Steps 1 To configure the forwarding mode of an interface use ip forwarding mode command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 145 TABLE 145 IP FORWARDING MODE Command Command Command Function Format Mode Swann Interface This configures the forwarding mode g config mode of an interface Result This configures the forwarding mode of an interface 2 To configure the forwarding table of the V_Switch use vlan forwarding ing
23. Local channel manages the information exchange between the control processor module and the network processor module with the transmission throughput of 6 4Gbps Control channel administrates the operation and initialization configuration for all other modules using RISC CPU processor Figure 4 shows ZXR10 GERO2 system architecture FiGURE 4 ZXR10 GERO2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE Control processor module Network Line processor Line interface module interface module module gt CU control lt FOCUS buses uses lt MIPS buses gt 33V amp 2 5V power Figure 5 shows ZXR10 GERO4 system architecture Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Forwarding Channel Local Channel Control Channel Chapter 3 Structure and Principles FIGURE 5 ZxR10 GERO4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE Control processor module Le WE me interface interface A Network tota hus processor Ss module interface interface B a T Tomo qp FOCUS buses uses 4 MIPS buses gt 33V amp 2 5V power ZXR10 GERO08 Working Principles ZXR10 GERO8 modules are connected to one another in three modes Standard buses are used for connection between the line interface module and the network processor module Network processor module and switching module also uses these buses to communicate with each other Packets are transmitted between modul
24. VLSM Variable Length Subnet Mask VPN Virtual Private Network VRF Virtual Routing Forwarding VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol WAN Wide Area Network WWW World Wide Web 368 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Zxr10 Ger02 Back Panel View ssssessesseess 4 Zxr10 Ger04 Back Panel View sessessessee 4 Zxr10 Ger08 Back Panel View sssssesses 5 Zxr10 Ger02 System Architecture 10 Zxr10 Ger04 System Architecture 11 ZXR10 GEROS8 System Architecture 12 Zxr10 Ger02 Hardware Structure 14 Zxr10 Ger04 Hardware Structure 15 Zxr10 Ger08 Hardware Structure 15 Zxr10 Ger02 04 Smnp Panel eene 16 Zxr10 Ger Smp Panel cceceeeeeeeee eee e neta eeee ea ees 20 RE 01A3 SFP Card vaccine seve cri dava ns 24 RE 01CP3 SFP Cardin HR S ns 25 RE 01GP48 SO2KLC Card eese 26 RE 01GP48 S15KLC Card seeeeeeesee 27 RE 01P48 SO2KLC Card sees
25. ZXR10_R4 config router isis ZXR10_R4 config router area 00 ZXR10_R4 config router system id OODO EOE7 53E0 ZXR10_R4 config router is type LEVEL 2 ZXR10_R4 config router exit ZXR10 RA config interface fei 2 4 ZXR10_R4 config if ip address 192 168 12 4 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R4 config if ip router isis ZXR10_R4 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10_R4 config router exit ZXR10_R4 config interface fei_2 6 ZXR10_R4 config if ip address 192 168 11 4 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R4 config if ip router isis ZXR10_R4 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10_R4 config if exit ZXR10_R4 config interface fei_2 7 ZXR10_R4 config if ip address 192 168 16 4 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R4 config if ip router isis ZXR10_R4 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10_R4 config if exit Configuration of R5 ZXR10_R5 config router isis ZXR10_R5 config router area 02 ZXR10_R5 config router system id 00D0 DOCF 53E0 ZXR10_R5 config router is type LEVEL 1 2 ZXR10_R5 config router exit ZXR10_R5 config interface fei_2 4 ZXR10_R5 config if ip address 192 168 16 5 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R5 config if ip router isis ZXR10_R5 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10 R5 config router exit ZXR10 R5 config z interface fei 2 6 224 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 15 IS IS Configuration ZXR10_R5 config if ip address 192 168 13 5 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R5 config if ip router isis ZXR10_R5
26. vcid 100 pwtype peer 1 1 1 3 maxmac 1000 exit Ethernet XUAS config vfi mac timeout 180 ZXUAS config bras tvfi account group 100 configure VFI account PE1 config interface loopback10 PEl config if fip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 PE1 config interface fei 1 1 PE1 config if xconnect vfi vpls a PE1 config if mac limit 100 set the max munber of MAC address PE1l config interface fei 1 2 PEl config if fip address 175 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 PE1 config if fmpls ip PE1 config if client interface Set the interfac worked at client mode in hub spoke network PE1l config mpls ip PE1 config mpls ldp router id loopback10 force PE1l config mpls ldp target session 1 1 1 3 PE1l config router ospf 1 PE1 config router network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 PE1 config router network 1715 L 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 P configuration P config interface loopback10 P config if ip address 1 1 1 2 255 255 255 255 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 315 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEHA P config interface fei 2 1 P config if ip address 17 P config if mpls ip P config interface fei 2 2 P config if P config if P config mpls P con P con P con P con P con ip address 14 mpls ip ip fig mpls ldp router id loopback10 force fig router ospf 1 fi
27. 136 LD279 LDP 273 274 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 289 291 LEVEL 222 223 224 225 Link State PDU 320 321 322 LLC PRENDE 100 133 LOCAL adi 241 LSA 188 189 190 191 192 202 209 E 189 LSAS eeee 188 189 205 LSP 212 219 274 278 288 289 290 USPS ANE 212 274 288 LSR 274 275 277 281 282 LSRS AERA 277 E MMC AME 189 Manet 158 213 MAPI 236 237 238 240 Maximum Transmission Unit267 MD5 136 177 190 195 196 MED 227 229 236 242 243 AA ORC 289 MPBGP ceeeenee 294 302 MPC750 cia oniatrad v adrlad s 82 ZTERH MPLS iii 273 274 275 276 278 280 281 282 283 287 288 289 290 292 295 299 MPLS Configuration 273 278 280 MPLS Configuration Example m 273 280 MPLS Label Header 273 276 MPLS LDP 273 276 283 MPLS Maintainance and Diagnosis sss 273 MPLS Overview 273 MPLS VPN Configuration Example 287 295 MPLS VPN Maintainance amp Diagnosis sues 287 MPLS VPN Overview 287 305 311 MPLS VPN Configuration 287 MPPPuuiadioina s 88 91 139 140 MPU Sosa 74 MsgRcvd eee 296 MEA seines ictus 296 MultiLink essseeeese 84 Multi Protocol Label Switchingiii 267 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 NAK cecus tawewsta ix ara xa aes 134 NAS uns 134 NAT airis 291 NB
28. 1d4h BGP 10 10 3 3 send UPDATE w attr origin i as 1 32 deleted from BGP routable 1 32 deleted from IP routable 1 32 deleted from BGP routable 1 32 deleted from IP routable 302 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration path metric 0 localpref 254 route target 100 1 mp nlri afi l safi 128 next hop 10 10 1 1 nlri 0131 100 1 10 1 1 0 24 1d4h BGP 10 10 3 3 rcv UPDATE w attr origin i as path metric 0 localpref 144 route target 100 1 mp nlri afi l safi 128 next hop 10 10 3 3 nlri 0181 100 1 100 1 1 1 32 nlri 0171 100 1 10 10 1 1 32 ZXR10 config Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 303 Chapter 2 1 VPWS Configuration I ntroduction Contents I ntroduction I P MPLS Cloud Overview This chapter describes the VPWS protocol and its related configuration on the ZXR10 GER This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 346 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 21 Topic Page No VPWS 305 Configuring VPWS 306 VPWS Maintenance and Diagnosis 308 VPWS Virtual Private Wire Services VPWS or Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge to Edge PWE3 provide point to point connectivity between customer sites where the service provider network emulates a set of wires between the customer s sites over the underlying MPLS tunnel This is particularly useful in the case where a customer is currently using a set of ATM or Frame Relay connect
29. 321 TABLE 321 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Enters into global configuration Global terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode To enable LDP to set up an LSP along a common hop by hop routing path use mpls ip command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 322 TABLE 322 MPLS IP COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function This enables LDP to set up an mpls ip global config LSP along a common hop by hop routing path Result This enables LDP to set up an LSP along a common hop by hop routing path To enable LDP label switching on the interface use mpls ip command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 323 TABLE 323 MPLS IP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode mbisi interface This enables LDP label switching PP config on the interface Result This enables LDP label switching on the interface To configure the transport address parameter contained in the Hello message use mpls Idp discovery transport address interface lt ip address gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 324 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 19 MPLS Configuration TABLE 324 MPLS LDP DISCOVERY COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode mpls Idp discovery This configures the transport transport interface address param
30. 4 Control channel lt gt Local channel Data Packet Sending ZTE ZXR10 GER protocol processor module is responsible for the data packet transmission Packet transmission process is as follows Protocol processor module prepares data packets for transmission by means of the data link layer corresponding to the transmission interface type Protocol processor module sends the encapsulated data packets to the corresponding network processor module through local channel This is realized by the standard MIPS bus interface This indicates the transmission interface properties Network processor module forwards the receiving packets to the corresponding interface through fast forwarding channel Interface module outputs the received data link layer packets through the designated interface by means of packet encapsulation on the physical layer Data Packet Receiving ZXR10 GER receives the packet through the line interface sent to the protocol processor module for processing Such packet reaches the protocol processor module through the following processes Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Process Theory Chapter 3 Structure and Principles Interface module de capsulate packets on physical layer and then encapsulates on data link layer Data link layer sends them together with the receiving interface information to the network processor module Network processor module
31. Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Auto detect Auto detect END OF STEPS Configuring Telnet Connection Purpose This topic describes how to configure telnet connection on ZXR10 GER Prerequisite For telnet connection ip address is configured on any interface of router Steps 1 Enter into command prompt and type telnet ipaddress of router interface a Result A CLI window appears as shown in Figure 39 FiGURE 39 CLI WINDOW ex Telnet 192 168 8 207 ix X Welcome to T64E T128 Carrier Class High end Rotter of ZTE Corporation nnd Username 2 Enter username and password of router to access router CLI as shown in Figure 40 50 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 4 Usage and Operations Result a gt sign appears FIGURE 40 EXPRESSION CLI WINDOW Telnet 192 168 8 207 2 Welcome to T64E T128 Carrier Class High end Router of ZTE Corporation QECCC MCCMCMCMCMCOMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCMCOMCC CC CC CC CC MCCC CCCII CCCII Username who Password Ezxri8 207 Write enable command if there is password to access the router privileged mode then write password as shown in Figure 41 Result a sign appears that shows enabled mode or privileged mode FiGURE 41 ENABLED MODE CLI WINDOW Telnet 192 168 8 207 4 To prevent an unauthorized acce
32. Chapter 15 IS IS Configuration L1 L2 router Exists in a non backbone area and exchanges routing information between non backbone area and the backbone area IS IS area division and router types are shown in Figure 91 FIGURE 91 Is Is AREAS DIS amp Router Priority In a broadcast network IS IS protocol similar to OSPF protocol also uses designated router DIS that is Designated Intermediate System The DIS is responsible for advertising network information to all routers on the broadcast network and meanwhile all other routers only advertise one adjacency to the DIS The router priority parameters can be IS IS configured for DIS election and L1 and L2 can be independently IS IS configured with different priorities Upon DIS election a highest priority router plays the role of DIS If priorities are same for a frame relay interface a router with higher system ID will be elected as the DIS while for an Ethernet interface a router with higher interface MAC value will be elected as the DIS Basic IS IS Configuration Refer to below procedure for IS IS configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a IS IS is running in a network Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 213 214 Steps 1 4 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command i
33. Functions Overview This chapter introduces SMARTGROUP and relevant configurations on ZXR10 GER This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 149 ToPics IN CHAPTER 8 Topic Page No SMARTGROUP Overview 125 Configuring SMARTGROUP 126 SMARTGROUP Maintenance and Diagnosis 129 SMARTGROUP Overview ZXR10 GER is a mid high end router to meet market demands for the metropolitan area network finance network government network military information network and enterprise network It provides secure controllable manageable high performance broadband network solutions for users Based on user demands and market location the SMARTGROUP function is available in the ZXR10 GER which can be used to provide more flexible efficient networking schemes for users With the function ZXR10 products improve the flexibility and stability of the network especially the Ethernet networking environment and the network environment for applying Ethernet interfaces during network planning and networking design SMARTGROUP function can expand the bandwidth improve the stability and rationalize the network construction cost Various Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 125 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDR Ethernet interfaces can be bound to a SMARTGROUP logic interface Functions of the SMARTGROUP are as follows It supports the binding of Ethernet interfaces on the same in
34. Horizon Chapter 13 RIP Configuration TABLE 215 AUTHENTICATION MODE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip rip RIP Interface authentication Config This designates authentication type used for made RIP packets text md5 text refers to Clears text authentication Md5 refers to Keyed MD5 authentication RIP Version 1 does not support authentication Result This configures authentication mode for RIP 6 To enable split horizon mechanism use ip split horizon command in RIP interface configuration mode as shown in Table 216 To disable the split horizon mechanism use the no form of this command TABLE 216 SPLIT HORIZON COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode RIP z z ip split horizon Interface scheisse ee Config This command has no arguments or keywords For all interfaces except those for which either Frame Relay or SMDS encapsulation is enabled the default condition for this command is ip split horizon in other words the split horizon feature is active Important For networks that include links over X 25 PSNs the neighbor RIP router configuration command use to defeat the split horizon feature This can act as an alternative explicitly specify the no ip split horizon command in your configuration However if this happens there must similarly disable split horizon for all routers in any relevant multicast groups on that network Important If split horiz
35. OSPF Interface Attributes 1 Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration Command Command Command Function Format Mode router ospf Global This enables OSPF routing lt process id gt process Result This initiates the OSPF process in router OSPF process id is a numeric value local to the router Assigning areas to interfaces using network lt network or IP address gt mask lt areaid gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 231 TABLE 231 OSPF NETWORK COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode network This defines interfaces on which ip OSPF protocol runs and defines address OSPF Route an area ID for these interfaces wildcard if area does not exist the mask area system will automatically an area id area Result This assigns an interface to certain area Mask is used for shortcut it puts list of interfaces in same area with one line configuration command For OSPF cost use ip ospf cost cost command in OSPF interface mode as shown in Table 232 TABLE 232 IP OsPF CosT COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip ospf OSPF This configures interface cost in pe Interface explicit mode cost Result This explicitly specifies the cost of sending a packet on an OSPF interface For OSPF link state advertisements for an interface use ip ospf retransmit interval seconds command in OSPF interface mode as shown in Table 233 TABLE 233 IP OsPF RETRANSM
36. PAP authentication mode pap gt Result This sets PPP PAP authentication mode on an interface 134 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 9 Link Protocol Configuration Note Router uses PPP PAP to verify identity of the other side peer This means other side peer must present its username password to the local device for verification To configure username and password for PPP PAP authentication use ppp pap sent username lt username gt lt password gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 159 TABLE 159 PPP USER PASSWORD COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This configures the PAP ppp pap sent username and password username interface that are sent when the local username router is authenticated by password the peer router in the PAP mode Result This configures the PAP username and password that are sent when the local router is authenticated by the peer router in the PAP mode Note This is username and password used by local router to authenticate PPP peer When peer sends its PAP username and password local router checks whether that username and password are configured locally If there is a successful match the peer is authenticated To setup PPP link with peer router use ppp open command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 160 TABLE 160 PPP OPEN COMMAND Command Command Command Function Forma
37. Table 213 Neighbor Command Window sees 176 Table 214 Ip Rip Authentication Key ooococcoccnccnccnncnnnnnnnnnnos 176 Table 215 Authentication Mode Command 177 Table 216 Split Horizon Command Window 177 Table 217 Ip Poison Reverse Command Window 178 Table 218 Redistribute Command Window 178 Table 219 Default Metric Command Window 178 Table 220 Rip Version Command Window 179 Table 221 Show Ip Rip Command seen 180 Table 222 Show Ip Rip Interface Command 180 Table 223 Show Ip RIp Neighbors Command 180 Table 224 Show IP RIP Database Command Window 181 Table 225 Ip Rip Network Command Window 181 Table 226 Debug IP RIp Command Window 181 Table 227 Debug Ip Rip Database Command Window 181 Table 228 Topics In Chapter 14 eeeeeeeennnne 185 Table 229 Config Terminal Command esses 190 Table 230 Router Ospf Command sese 190 Table 231 Ospf Network Command eene 191 Table 232 Ip Ospf Cost COMMANG ccccseceeeeeeeeseeeeeaeees 191 Table 233 Ip Ospf Retransmit Interval Command 191 Table 234 Ip Ospf Transmit Delay cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenes 192 Table 235 Ip Ospf Priority
38. The show commands can be used to view the current status of a BGP neighbor and the BGP routing information learned by a router Refer to below procedure for BGP maintenance and diagnosis on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed BGP is running on a network Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 253 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Steps 1 To display the configuration information about the BGP module use show ip bgp protocol command in privileged mode as shown in Table 300 TABLE 300 SHow IP BGP PROTOCOL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This displays the privileged configuration information about the BGP module show ip bgp protocol Result This displays the configuration information about the BGP protocol To view BGP adjacency and display the current neighbor status use show ip bgp neighbor lt ip address gt in out ip address command in privileged mode as shown in Table 301 TABLE 301 SHow IP BGP NEIGHBOR COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip bgp neighbor lt ip This displays the BGP address privileged adjacency and display the in out ip current neighbor status address gt Result This displays the BGP adjacency and display the current neighbor status To display entries in the BGP routing table use show ip bgp route network lt ip address gt
39. To define the operation type of router use command is type level 1 level 1 2 level 2 only in IS IS config mode as shown in Table 265 TABLE 265 Is TvPE COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode is type IS IS level 1 level 1 config This defines the permitted 2 level 2 only IS IS level Result This configures permitted IS IS level for router 2 To define PSNP Serial Number PDU for point to point networks use command isis psnp interval num level 1 level 2 in IS IS interface config mode as shown in Table 266 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Chapter 15 IS IS Configuration TABLE 266 Is IS PSNP INTERVAL COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode isis psnpsinserusl 151s This defines PSNP sending num level interface interval 1 level 2 config This parameter is used to configure the sending interval between two PSNPs default value 3 the num range is from 1 65535 Result This configures PSNP sending interval time for IS IS interface To notify insufficient resources of router running an IS IS protocol use command set overload bit in IS IS config mode as shown in Table 267 TABLE 267 SET OVERLOAD BIT Command Format Command Command Function Mode set overload bit IS IS This defines the OL tab bit config of IS IS This tag bit is used to identify to other routers running an IS IS protocol Result This confi
40. ZXR10 R2 config if fexit ZXR10 R2 config fvlan forwarding ingress pos3 1 1 10 egress fei 1 1 100 R3 configuration ZXR10 R3 config finterface fei 1 1 100 ZXR10_R3 config subif fencapsulation dot1Q 100 ZXR10_R3 config subif ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 150 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Bridge Function Layer 3 Function Transport Transmission Common Part Convergence LLC Encapsulation ATM Virtual Circuits Chapter 10 Bridge Configuration ATM Interface Bridge ATM Interface Bridge consists of following topics which are in below table Topic Page No ATM Interface Bridge 151 Configuring ATM Bridge 152 ATM Interface Bridge Bridge function of the ATM interface is same as that of the POS interface covering layer 3 functions and_ transparent transmission function of the bridge interface Layer 3 function of the bridge interface indicates that the ATM link is directly connected with the Ethernet with encapsulation in the RFC2684B message format The ATM layer 3 interface encapsulated in the RFC2684B message format can serve as an Ethernet interface and has attributes of the Ethernet interface such as ARP learning The transparent transmission function of the ATM bridge interface is implemented through V Switch functions With the V Switch forwarding table transparent transmission is available between the ATM interface and the Ethernet and POS interfaces A
41. ZXR10 R3 config zrouter bgp 100 ZXR10 R3 config router neighbor 2 2 2 2 remote as 100 ZXR10 R3 config router neighbor 2 2 2 2 route reflector client ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 1 1 1 1 remote as 100 ZXR10 R3 config router neighbor 1 1 1 1 route reflector client ZXR10 R3 config router neighbor 7 7 7 7 remote as 100 ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 4 4 4 4 remote as 100 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 3 3 3 3 remote as 100 If the RR receives a route it will reflect the route according to different peer types 1 If the route comes from a non client peer the route will be reflected to all client peers 2 If the route comes from a client peer the route will be reflected to all non client and client peers 3 If the route comes from an EBGP peer the route will be reflected to all non client and client peers If an AS has multiple RRs the multiple RRS in the AS can be incorporated into a cluster An AS can have multiple clusters A cluster at least has more than one RR 248 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Introduction Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration BGP Confederation The function of route confederation is the same as that of a router reflector The route confederation is used to reduce the number of BGP neighbor connections in an AS In a route federation an AS is divided into
42. administrative distance values Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 161 Advertisement 162 Redistribute Static Purpose Prerequisite Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Each dynamic routing protocol has a default administrative distance as listed in Table 202 If static route to be overridden by information from a dynamic routing protocol simply ensures that the administrative distance of the static route is higher than that of the dynamic protocol TABLE 202 DEFAULT ADMINISTRATIVE DISTANCE Route Source Default Distance Connected interface 0 Static Route 1 Enhanced IGRP EIGRP summary route 5 Exterior Border Gateway Protocol BGP 20 Internal EIGRP 90 IGRP 100 OSPF 110 IS IS 115 RIP 120 EIGRP external route 170 Interior BGP 200 Unknown 255 Static routes that point to an interface is advertised via RIP IGRP and other dynamic routing protocols regardless of whether redistribute static router configuration commands were specified for those routing protocols These static routes are advertised because static routes that point to an interface are considered in the routing table to be connected and hence lose their static nature In a routing environment where there are multiple routers and multiple paths it is very complicated to configure static routes When an interface goes down all static routes through that interface are removed from IP
43. are stored under this directory The extended name of the image files is zar The image files are dedicated compression files Version upgrading means change of corresponding image files under the directory CFG Configuration files are stored under this directory File name of configuration files is startrun dat When a command is used to modify router configuration information is stored Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 63 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA in memory To prevent loss of configuration information upon UAS power off power on write command must be used to write memory information into startrun dat To clear original configuration in UAS upon data reconfiguration use delete command to delete startrun dat file and reboot UAS DATA This directory is used to store the log dat file that records alarm information File Management Introduction ZXR10 GER provides many commands for file operations Command format is similar to DOS commands as present in Microsoft Windows Operating System Purpose This procedure describes how to do file management on ZTE ZXR10 GER Prerequisite Router command Line Interface has been accessed Steps 1 To display current directory path use pwd command as shown in Table 53 TABLE 53 PwD COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode pwd Exec This display current directory path Result This shows th
44. has been accessed 1 2 3 4 Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in privilged configuration mode as shown in Table 161 TABLE 161 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode To configure PPP CHAP authentication mode CHAP is thrice handshake authentication and the password is the key use ppp authentication chap command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 162 TABLE 162 PPP AUTHENTICATION CHAP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ppp authentication Interface This configures PPP CHAP chap authentication mode Result This sets PPP CHAP authentication mode To configure PPP CHAP hostname use ppp chap hostname lt hostname gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 163 TABLE 163 PPP CHAP HOSTNAME COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This configures user name Ades interface when local router is authenticated by peer router lt hostname gt in CHAP mode Result This sets PPP CHAP hostname To configure PPP CHAP password use ppp chap password lt password gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 164 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 137 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Ro
45. interface configuration mode as shown in Table 370 To record the routes used by tunnel use tunnel mpls traffic eng record route command in tunnel interface configuration mode as shown in Table 370 TABLE 370 TUNNEL CONFIG COMMAND Command Format Command Command Function Mode interface Global confi This configures tunnel tunnel lt 1 64 gt g interface tunnel mode mpls ee This sets the tunnel for traffic MPLS TE config Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 323 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I Command Format Command Mode tunnel Tunnel destination ipv4 f l ipvG ip inter ace address gt config tunnel mpls Tunnel traffic eng f bandwidth iHi bandwidth SOM tunnel mpls traffic eng path option number Tunnel dynamic explicit interface name lt path config name gt identifier lt id gt tunnel mpls Tunnel traffic eng interface record route config ip explicit path name lt name gt identifier Global config lt identifier gt next address lt A B C D gt loose strict ZTEHA Command Function This sets an ip address for the tunnel destination router This sets the parameter for maximum available bandwidth This sets an ERO for MPLS TE This record the routes used by tunnel This configures an IP explicit path Result This configures the tunnel with all the necessary attributes END OF STEP
46. is type LEVEL 2 ZXR10 R2 config router exit ZXR10_R2 config interface fei 2 4 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 192 168 10 2 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R2 config if ip router isis ZXR10_R2 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10 R2 config router exit ZXR10_R2 config interface fei 2 6 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 192 168 12 2 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R2 config if ip router isis ZXR10_R2 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10_R2 config if exit Configuration of R3 ZXR10_R3 config router isis ZXR10_R3 config router area 00 ZXR10_R3 config router system id 00D0 E0C7 53E0 ZXR10_R3 config router is type LEVEL 2 ZXR10 R3 config router exit ZXR10 R3 config interface fei 2 4 ZXR10 R3 config if zip address 192 168 15 3 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R3 config if ip router isis ZXR10 R3 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10 R3 config router exit Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 223 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA ZXR10_R3 config interface fei 2 6 ZXR10 R3 config if ip address 192 168 10 3 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R3 config if ip router isis ZXR10 R3 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10_R3 config if exit ZXR10_R3 config interface fei_2 7 ZXR10_R3 config if ip address 192 168 11 3 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R3 config if ip router isis ZXR10_R3 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10 R3 config if exit Configuration of R4
47. it compares SNP with link state database If router loses an LSP in SNP it originates a multicast SNP and asks for necessary LSPs from other routers on the network LSPs are used in conjunction with SNPs so that IS IS protocol can complete reliable route interaction on a large network Likewise the IS IS protocol also uses the Dijkstra SPF algorithm to calculate routes Based on the link state database the IS IS protocol uses the SPF algorithm to calculate the best route and then adds the route to the IP routing table IS IS Area For convenience of link state database management concept of IS IS area is introduced Routers in an area are only responsible for maintaining the link state database in the local area to reduce the traffic of the routers themselves IS IS areas are classified into backbone areas and non backbone areas Routers in the backbone area have the information about the database of the entire network Routers in a non backbone area only have information about the area Based on the area division IS IS defines three types of routers L1 router Exists in a non backbone area and only exchanges routing information with L1 router and L1 L2 router in the area L2 router Exists in the backbone area and exchanges routing information with other L2 routers and L1 L2 routers Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Designated Router DIS Election Purpose Prerequisite
48. keep alive interval 60 sec Discovery hello holdtime 15 sec interval 5 sec Downstream on Demand max hop count 255 LDP initial maximum backoff 15 120 sec LDP loop detection off ZXR1O To display LDP discovery information use show mpls Idp discovery detail command in privileged mode as shown in Table 331 TABLE 331 SHOW MPLS LDP DISCOVERY COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function show mpls Idp n discovery Privileged This displays LDP discovery detail information Result This displays LDP discovery information Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 283 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA ZXR10 show mols ldp discovery detail Local LDP Identifier 10 10 2 2 0 Discovery Sources Interfaces fei 1 5 ldp xmit recv LDP Id 10 10 1 1 0 Src IP addr 10 10 12 1 Transport IP addr 10 10 12 1 fei 1 6 ldp xmit recv LDP Id 10 10 3 3 0 Src IP addr 10 10 23 3 Transport IP addr 10 10 3 3 ZXR10 4 To display LDP session information use show mpls Idp neighbor lt interface number gt detail command in privileged mode as shown in Table 332 TABLE 332 SHOW MPLS LDP NEIGHBOR COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function show mpls Idp neighbor lt interface Privileged number gt detail This displays LDP session information Result This displays LDP session information ZXR10 show mpls ldp
49. label 16 remote binding lsr 10 10 1 1 0 label imp null 10 10 23 0 255 255 255 0 local binding label imp null remote binding lsr 10 10 3 3 0 label imp null remote binding lsr 10 10 1 1 0 label 16 ZXR10 6 For complicated troubleshooting following debug commands may be used Command Mode Command Function Command Format debug mpls Idp transport Privileged connections events Monitors information discovered by LDP debug mpls Idp Monitors LDP session session io state Privileged activities machine debug mpls Idp Monitors messages messages Privileged from to an LDP neighbor Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 285 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA 286 Command Format Command Mode Command Function received sent debug mpls Idp bindings Monitors the address and Privileged label advertised by an LDP neighbor debug mpls Idp Monitors the address and Privileged label advertised to an advertisement LDP neighbor ZXR10 debug mpls ldp transport events LDP transport events debugging is on ZXR10 ldp Send ldp hello fei 1 1 scr dst 10 10 12 1 0 0 0 0 224 0 0 2 intf id 257 ldp Rcvd ldp hello fei 1 1 from 10 10 12 2 10 10 2 2 0 intf id 257 ZXR10 debug mpls ldp transport connections LDP transport connection debugging is on ZXR1O ldp Hold timer expired for adj 0
50. mask lt net mask gt command in privileged mode as shown in Table 302 TABLE 302 SHOW IP BGP ROUTE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip bgp route network lt ip address gt privileged mask lt net mask gt This displays the entries in the BGP routing table Result This displays the entries in the BGP routing table To display the status of all BGP neighbor connections use show ip bgp summary command in privileged mode as shown in Table 303 254 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 16 BGP Configuration TABLE 303 SHOW IP BGP SUMMARY COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This displays the status of privileged all BGP neighbor connections show ip bgp summary Result This displays the status of all BGP neighbor connections In addition to the show commands the debug commands also can be used to observe the BGP adjacency setup process and route update process Command Command Command Function Format Mode Traces and displays notification packets sent by BGP and lists error ID and sub error ID debug ip bgp in Privileged Traces and displays notification packets sent by BGP and lists error ID and sub error ID debug ip bgp out Privileged Traces and displays the Privileged state machine transition of the BGP connection debug ip bgp events The debug ip bgp events command is used to trace the state transit
51. parameters To display the RIP adjacent neighbors use show ip rip neighbors command in Exec mode as shown in Table 223 TABLE 223 SHow IP RIP NEIGHBORS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip rip Exec This displays the information neighbors about all neighbors configured by the user Result This show all the information about RIP neighbors To display the route item database use show ip rip database command in Exec mode as shown in Table 224 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Chapter 13 RIP Configuration TABLE 224 SHow IP RIP DATABASE COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip rip Exec This displays the information database about all neighbors configured by the user Result This show all the database information about RIP To display all RIP interface information configured by the user use show ip rip networks in Exec mode as shown in Table 225 TABLE 225 IP RIP NETWORK COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip rip Exec This displays the information networks about all neighbors configured by the user Result This shows all RIP interface information configured by the user Debugging ZXR10 GER also provides the debug command to debug RIP and trace related information 1 To trace the basic rip sending and receiving packet use debug ip rip command in Exec mode as shown in Table 226 TAB
52. the router map lt map tag gt becomes an ASBR Result This establish a process of redistribution of other routing protocols into OSPF END OF STEPS For additional information on OSPF additional configurations please refer to below procedures Configuring Administrative Distance The administrative distance stands for the reliability of information source Normally the administrative distance is an integer ranging from O to 255 Higher value indicates lower reliability If the administrative distance is 255 it indicates that the source of the routing information is unreliable so the related route will be neglected ZXR10 GER can define the administrative distances of three types of routes of OSPF Internal route external route type 1 and external route type 2 By default the administrative of all the three types of routes are 110 Refer to below procedure for configuration of redistribution of other routing protocols into OSPF a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed OSPF is running on a network as described in above basic OSPF configuration 1 For modifying the administrative distance of OSPF use distance ospf internal lt distance gt ext1 lt distance gt Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 205 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDR ext2 lt distance gt command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 250 TABLE 250 ADMINISTRA
53. 0 0 El config frouter bgp 100 El config router neighbor 10 10 3 3 remote as 100 El config router neighbor 1010 3 3 update source oopbackl El config router taddress family ipv4 vrf testl El config router af redistribute connected El config router af neighbor 10 1 1 2 remote as 200 El config router af ftexit address family El config router taddress family vpnv4 El config router af neighbor 10 10 3 3 activate El config router af tftexit address family El config tmpls ip El config tmpls ldp router id loopbackl force An EBGP connection is set up between CE1 and PE1 a BGP router identifier 10 1 1 2 BGP table version is 8 Neighbor V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up Down State PfxRcd 10 1 1 1 4 100 156 157 8 0 0 El show ip bgp summary local AS number 200 main routing table version 8 296 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration 01 16 48 3 CE1 The routing table of CE1 is as follows Where two BGP routes are VPN routes learned from CE1 CEl show ip route Gateway of last resort is not set 100 0 0 0 24 is subnetted 1 subnets 8 100 1 1 0 is directly connected Loopback1 200 1 1 0 24 20 0 via 10 1 1 1 00 01 17 10 0 0 0 24 is subnetted 2 subnets w B 10 10 10 0 20 0 via 10 1 1 1 00 02 02 C 10 1 1 0 is directly connected FastEthernet0 0 CE1 Configurat
54. 0 0 0 0 255 ZXR10_R4 config route map torouteri deny 10 ZXR10_R4 config route map match ip address 1 ZXR10_R4 config route map torouter1 permit 20 Configuration of R1 ZXR10 Ri config zrouter bgp 1 ZXR10_R1 config router no synchronization ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 172 16 1 2 remote as 1 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 172 16 1 2 next hop self ZXR10 Ri1 config router neighbor 172 16 20 1 remote as 2 Configuration of R2 ZXR10 R2 config Zip route 183 16 0 0 255 255 0 0 fei 1 4 ZXR10 R2 config z router bgp 1 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 172 16 1 1 remote as 1 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 172 16 1 1 next hop self ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 183 16 20 2 remote as 3 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 183 16 20 2 ebgp multihop 2 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 183 16 20 2 route map torouter5 in ZXR10_R2 config access list 1 permit 155 16 10 0 0 0 0 255 ZXR10_R2 config route map torouter5 deny 10 ZXR10_R2 config route map match ip address 1 ZXR10_R2 config route map torouter5 permit 20 Configuration of R5 ZXR10 R5 config fip route 173 16 0 0 255 255 0 0 gei 1 1 ZXR10_R5 config frouter bgp 3 ZXR10_R5 config router neighbor 173 16 20 2 remote as 1 ZXR10_R5 config router neighbor 173 16 20 2 ebgp multihop 2 BGP Maintenance amp Diagnosis If a BGP route problem occurs related debugging commands can be used to help fault location and troubleshooting The show commands are used more frequently
55. 0 0 0 255 Route Filtering by Means of AS_PATH If all routers in one or multiple ASs need filtering normally route filtering based on AS path information is used This filtering method can avoid the complexity caused by prefix based filtering Refer to below procedure for route filtering by means of AS PATH configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a BGP is running on a network 1 To configure route filtering by means of AS_PATH use ip as path access list lt access list number gt permit deny lt as regular expression gt command in global config mode as shown in Table 292 TABLE 292 IP AS PATH ACCESS LIST COMMAND Command Command Command Format i Mode Function ip as path access list access list number Global This defines BGP permit deny lt as access list regular expression gt Result This configures an ip as path access list END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 98 router filtering based on AS path also can be used so that R1 will not advertise the network 192 18 10 0 24 from AS300 to AS200 The configuration is as follows Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 239 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Introduction Purpose Prerequisite Steps ZXR10_Ri config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router no synchronization ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 182 17 1 2 remote as 100 ZXR
56. 2 RP 50 4 4 4 00 09 04 00 04 57 To show all the information received by MSDP use debug ip msdp message recv command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 425 TABLE 425 DEBUG IP MSDP MESSAGE RECV COMMAND Command Format Command Mode Command Function show ip msdp peer Priviliged This shows all the peer address information received by MSDP Result This shows all the information received by MSDP Example This shows all the information received by the MSDP Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 357 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA ZXR10 debug ip msdp message recv MSDP 105 2 2 2 Received 56 byt msg 2372 from peer MSDP 105 2 2 2t SA TLV len 56 ec 4 EP 103 4 4 4 MSDP 105 2 2 2 Peer RPF check failed for 103 4 4 4 we are RP 4 To show all the information about the MSDP use debug ip msdp command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 426 TABLE 426 DEBUG IP MsDP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode debug ip Priviliged This shows all the information msdp about the MSDP Result This shows all the information about the MSDP Example This shows all the information about the MSDP ZXR10 debug ip msdp SDP Session to peer 102 2 2 2 going down SDP 102 2 2 2 Peer reset own IP address is changed SDP Session to peer 142 3 3 3 going down SDP 142 3 3 3 Peer reset other side down SDP 105 2 2 2 Receive
57. 252 ID 82 84 88 90 92 93 103 104 187 191 213 214 249 255 276 277 279 281 282 289 290 i MAH MART 84 103 IEEE eeeens 103 IEEE802 cce 275 IETF SPP 288 cp MEET 231 adi 162 IMG 63 66 67 75 77 MO ea Ear o N 296 Interface Naming Rules 83 84 119 125 131 Interfaces Types 83 119 125 131 Interior Gateway Protocol 320 321 322 323 Internet Control Message Protocol seiten 268 Internet Engineering Task Force cs 265 266 320 Internet Group Management Protocol 329 330 331 334 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA 335 336 337 338 339 342 351 352 Internet Protocol 265 266 267 268 319 323 324 330 331 341 342 346 353 358 Internet Service Provider 265 266 267 319 IP 73 74 77 86 88 89 91 92 94 95 98 100 101 104 106 108 132 139 140 155 156 157 158 162 163 164 166 170 171 172 173 176 181 188 191 208 212 228 235 252 274 275 276 277 279 281 283 284 287 288 289 290 291 293 300 302 IPv4 167 287 289 290 301 l qur 132 IS ii 162 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 231 291 AAA 132 211 212 ISP aa 290 PTU anaiari ti 96 KA Ea 284 Label Distribution Protoco LDP o T 273 LAN TEE 176 LAN Sica ar 275 288 LC276 LCP EA 132 133
58. 370 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Figures Figure 66 Vlan Sub Interface Example ccecececcceeeeeeeeeeenees 104 Figure 67 Smart Group Example seeeenennn nn 107 Figure 68 Multilink Configuration Example 109 Figure 69 Example of Channelized CPOS Configuration 116 Figure 70 Example of Non channelized CPOS Configuration 117 Figure 71 V Switch Configuration Example 121 Figure 72 SMARTGROUP Configuration Example 128 Figure 73 Six Fields Make Up PPP Frame eeeenne 133 Figure 74 Ppp Configuration Example s esses 136 Figure 75 PPP Chap Configuration Example 138 Figure 76 Mppp Configuration Example 141 Figure 77 FR Configuration Example eene 145 Figure 78 POS Bridge Configuration Example 150 Figure 79 ATM Interface Bridge Configuration Example 154 Figure 80 Static Route Configuration coomccncnccnnnnrnnnnnnananos 163 Figure 81 Static Route Summary 0 ccc cece eee ee e 164 Figure 82 Default Route Command eene 166 Figure 83 Ip Rip Packet eseseseeeene nemen 171 Figure 84 Ip Ripv2 Packet eeseeeene mmm 172 Figure 85 Basic Rip Configuration ccceeceeeeeeee teen nena 174 Figure 86 Ospf Router Type sssssssseemm 188 Figure 87 Ospf Co
59. 76 Data Backup and Recovery 78 Configuring System Parameters 80 Viewing System Information 81 Version Upgrade in case of System Abnormality This procedure describes how to do version upgrading in ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed TFTP server is up and running 1 Connect serial port of ZXR10 GER COM port on BIC to serial port of TFTP Server Computer System with the console cable Result TFTP server computer system and Router are ready to transfer files 2 Connect management Ethernet port of router 10 100M Ethernet port on BIC to network port of TFTP Server Computer System with Ethernet cable and make sure connections are correct Result Media Ethernet cable is ready to transfer files 3 Configure both TFTP Server Computer System Ethernet port and router management Ethernet port of router in same network section Result Different IP addresses belonging to same network are configured 4 Restart ZXR10 GER and press any key to enter into Boot status according to prompt on HyperTerminal as shown in Table 61 TABLE 61 BOOT WINDOW ZXR10 System Boot Version 1 0 Creation date Dec 31 2002 14 01 52 Press any key to stop for change parameters 2 ZXR10 Boot Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 73 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Input c in the Boot status and press ENTER to enter into parameter modi
60. Attrib te 2 eiecti enn 244 BGP SynchronizatiOn dcr a dee x perra eaa eR XR ERE 245 BGP Route Reflector ie eee c he c xU ew E CE D a 247 BGP ConfederatioN scu ria td 249 BGP Route Dambpenlhg s s sce dence penes an 251 BGP Configuration Example 2535 re e indem ede 252 BGP Maintenance amp Diagnosis sssseee teen eee eens 253 Chapter 7 i irte lic O Policy Routing Configuration 257 OVERVIEW Yi iiis eed rex cedex e A dr dee e e d e d 257 Configuring Policy Routing eren tha nenne 259 Chapter 1B oie eoo nuno unn op qe duc ua Sus npa ea KE EUROS un rainard EE de OD GRE Co nfigurabOnh i cone cose ta e epu eo dean ceno RE Esa En nara Eda 205 OVEM Wi id iaa 265 INthOGUCHON isc vscies covinerertancee soaeancety catea E 265 GRE OVeIVIOGW iiii cect ede entree ica 267 configuring GRE a3 sche cio 268 GRE Maintenance and Diagnosis isisisi dieniniai sans 270 GRE Configuration Example erit i 270 CAPES gu Nn iaa MPLS Configuration o onico ecce son enn asa pa ra ausa n aoo E REEEEruS 27 3 OVGIVIGW cerei m A EN EG QURE ERE EE RES 243 MPLS OVERVICW ies sting ext ontenctttctuen ve EE E ate T 273 Label Distribution Protocol LDP cececeeeeeee teens iai ta 274 Operational Principles Of MPLS 2 leisten 275 MPLS Label Header cti t deerit tens 276 MPLS EDP 5 uie tir A Ce x REOR Un EE End Cre 276 MPLS Configuration 2 eret enero ut
61. Attribute MED Attribute Community String Attribute BGP Synchronization BGP Route Reflector BGP Confederation BGP Route Dampening BGP Configuration Example BGP Maintenance amp Diagnosis Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 227 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Definition Version Autonomous System EBGP amp IBGP Transmission Protocol Path Attribute BGP Overview Border Gateway Protocol BGP is an inter domain routing protocol used among ASs to exchange network reachability information among ASs running the BGP The information is a list of ASs where a route passes which is sufficient to set up a diagram indicating the connection status of the ASs Thus routing policy based on ASs is possible and also the route loopback problem is solved BGP of version 4 BGP4 is the latest BGP version which is defined in RFC1771 BGP4 supports the implementation of CIDR supernet and subnet and the functions such as route aggregation and route filtering At present BGP4 has found wide application on the Internet An administrative area with independent routing policy is called an Autonomous System AS An important feature of an AS is that there is a unified internal route for another AS and has consistent topology for a reachable destination The indicator for an AS is a 16 bit value ranging from 1 to 65535 Where 1 through 32767 are assignable 3276
62. COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function show mpls I2transport Privilged vc This enables to check VC binding information Result This enables to check VC binding information To monitor VPWS message sending and receiving use debug mpis idp i2vpn event command in privilged mode as shown in Table 351 TABLE 351 DEBUG MPLS LDP L2VPN EVENT COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode debug mpls Idp Privilged This enables to monitor VPWS I2vpn 9 message sending and receiving event Result This enables to monitor VPWS message sending and receiving To monitor the state machine of the VPWS use debug mpls idp l2vpn fsm command in privilged mode as shown in Table 352 TABLE 352 DEBUG L2VPN FSM COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode debug A This enables to monitor the state mpls Idp Privilged machine of the VPWS I2vpn fsm Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 309 310 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Result This enables to monitor the state machine of the VPWS To view the debug information use debug mpls Idp I2vpn command in privilged mode as shown in Table 353 TABLE 353 DEBUG MPLS L2VPN COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode debug This enables to view the debu mpls Idp Privilged information g I2vpn Result This enables to view the debug information END OF STE
63. CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration ZXR10_R3 config ip msdp peer 10 10 30 1 connect source fei 1 1 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 363 Glossary Acronyms and Abbreviations Abbreviation Full Name ABR Area Border Router ACL Access Control List AD Administrative Distance API Application Programming Interface ARP Address ResolutionProtocol AS Autonomous System ASBR Autonomous System Border Router ASN Abstract Syntax Notation ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode BGP Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP BOOTstrap Protocol BDR Backup Designate Router CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing CLNP ConnectionLess Network Protocol CLNS ConnectionLess Network Sevice COS Class of Service CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check CRLDP Constraint based Routing Label Distribution Protocol CSN Cryptographic Sequence Number CSU Channel Service Unit DDN Digit Data Network DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DIS Designate IS DNS Domain Name System DR Designate Router DSU Data Service Unit Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 365 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTE EBGP External Border Gateway Protocol EGP External Gateway Protocol ES End System FDDI
64. CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 6 Interface Configuration suitable for SONET SDH links which are provisioned as point to point circuits even in ring topologies PoS specifies STS 3c STM 1 155 Mbps as basic data rate and this has a usable data bandwidth of 149 760 Mbps PoS frames are mapped into SONET SDH frames and they sit in payload envelop as octet streams aligned on octet boundaries Figure 62 shows framing process RFC 2615 recommends payload scrambling and a safeguard against bit sequences which may disrupt timing PoS payload scrambling is further discussed in the section Synchronization FIGURE 62 Pos FRAMING SEQUENCE CRC 16 CRC 32 TE 7D Byte sz ping Sonet SDH Generation suting sz Framing Point to Point 5 1 X 43 self Bellcore GR 253 Protocol IETF RFC Synchronous ITU T G 957 1661 p in HDLC Like EA Scrambler IETF RFC ITU T G 958 IETF RFC 1662 2615 This procedure describes how to do PoS configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enter into configuration mode use config terminal command in privilged mode as shown in Table 100 TABLE 100 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config E Enters into global configuration E xec terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To enter into packet over sonnet configuration mode use interface
65. Clock Source Command esee 110 Table 126 Threshold Command sees 111 Table 127 Frame Type cccceceeeeee testes eee eeee mme 111 Table 128 T1 Channle Frame ssseeseeeee 111 Table 129 T1 Encapsulations Cpos Interface 112 Table 130 T1 Clock Source Command eee 112 Table 131 Tug 3 Config Mode seeseeseeee 113 Table 132 El Framing Format seeseeseeeee 113 Table 133 El Cpos Interface 0occcccncnconccnncnnnnannan emm 113 Table 134 El Clock SOUFC oooccoccnccnccnncnnnnnnncnncnnncnnnnnnnnanes 113 Table 135 Sonet FLAMING cnica meteor hex aes 114 Table 136 Sts 1 Command sseeseeseeeeee 114 Table 137 Mode Command sssssesseee 114 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Tables Table 138 Vt 2 1 Command cceceee eee eee eee eee teenies 115 Table 139 E1 Channle Frame Format eese 115 Table 140 Vtg Channel Group sess 115 Table 141 E1 Channle Clock Source sssessss 116 Table 142 Ip Address Command eene 116 Table 143 Ip Address Command esee 116 Table 144 Topics In Chapter 7 eee 119 Table 145 Ip Forwarding Mode seeseeeee 120 Table 146 Vlan Forwarding Ingress eseeeeesess 120 Table 147 Show Running Config e
66. Contents I ntdroduction Label switching Chapter 1 9 MPLS Configuration Overview This chapter describes the basic concepts of Multi Protocol Label Switching MPLS technology and MPLS troubleshooting on ZTE ZXR10 GER router This chapter covers the following contents TABLE 320 Topics IN CHAPTER 19 Topic MPLS Overview Label Distribution Protocol LDP Operational Principles of MPLS MPLS Label Header MPLS LDP MPLS Configuration MPLS Configuration Example MPLS Maintenance and Diagnosis MPLS Overview configuration and Page No Multi Protocol Label Switching MPLS is a multi layer switching technology which combines L2 switching technologies with L3 routing technologies and uses labels to aggregate forwarding information MPLS runs under the routing hierarchy supports multiple upper level protocols and can be implemented on multiple physical platforms Label switching can be visually imagined as postal codes for mails With the application of postal codes the destination addresses and some special requirements such as QoS CoS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 273 274 Hop by hop routing LDP function Forwarding Equivalence Class Hop By Hop ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA and management information of the mails are coded in a certain method to facilitate rapid and efficient mail processing and speed up the routin
67. Direct connections over dark fiber or via dense wave division multiplexing DWDM systems are becoming increasingly popular Basic transmission rate of SONET 51 840 Mbps referred to as Synchronous Transport Signal level 1 STS 1 is obtained by sampling 810 byte frames at 8000 frames per second SONET features an octet synchronous multiplexing scheme with transmission rates in multiples of 51 840 Mbps There are different POS interfaces in ZXR10 GER depending upon transmission rates which are described in Figure 60 also shown are corresponding transmission rates and terminology for SDH SDH is SONET equivalent specification proposed by International Telecommunications Union ITU SDH supports only a subset of SONET data rates starting from 155 520 Mbps FIGURE 60 SoNET SDH RATES Data Rates 51 840 Mbps 155 520 Mbps 622 080 Mbps STM 16 2 488 320 Mbps PoS use PPP in High Level Data Link Control HDLC like framing as specified in RFC 1662 for data encapsulation at Layer 2 data link of Open System Interconnection OSI stack This method provides efficient packet delineation and error control The frame format for PPP in HDLC like framing is shown in Figure 61 FiGURE 61 PPP FRAME FORMAT Flag Flag Address Control PPP Packet FCS 8 8 8 16 32 8 RFC 2615 specifies use of PPP encapsulation over SONET SDH links PPP was designed for use on point to point links and is Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE
68. Division of subnets greatly improves utilization of IP addresses which relieves the problem of insufficient IP addresses to some extent 0 0 0 0 is used when a host without an IP address is started RARP BOOTP and DHCP are used to obtain IP Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 11 Network Protocol Configuration address The address serves as default route in routing table m 255 255 255 255 is a destination address used for broadcast and cannot serve as a source address 127 X X X is called loopback address Even if actual IP address of host is unknown address still can be used to stand for the local host Only IP addresses with host bits being all O indicate network itself An IP address with host bits being all 1 serves as broadcast address of the network Fora legal host IP address the network part or the host part must not be all 0 or all 1 Refer to below procedure for IP address on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 196 TABLE 196 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To enter into interface configurati
69. Documentation in onore ce ure xi Me n studie six au E iii oue iv How to Get in TOUCl eise trt da V Declaration of ROHS Compliance Vil Chapter Lian de Safety Instructions acid Safety Instructions ce a ve v Cere CHR 1 Chapter Lindas iaa System OVerVIBW asia eui 3 Product OVervieW icc E RR Ex RE RXR OR RR ERR ad 3 ZXR10 GERO2 GERD A circa 4 ZXRLO GER m T A e a aa dal 5 Physical Interfaces eere e io iaa 5 Router Operating SyStelTi sisse chau eee eese id edere xl ex Ri Rie dd 6 Technical Features and Parameters sess 6 Chapter Bi a Structure and Principles omcooccnnonnconnnannonnennnoanonaronaraannaas Y OV SEVIS W e ao o aia 9 Working Principles ecce hn ct a 9 ZXR10 GER 02 04 Working Principles sees 10 ZXR10 GERO8 Working Principles oooococcccocnncnnncnnnenancnnnnrnnnnos 11 Data Packet SENdING ier dais io alo 12 Data Packet Receiving 2 dc eire Ra E daa Rari da 12 Data Packet Forwarding sesionar tierra kh ttn 13 Packet Discarding ii A rex e o dnd 13 Hardware StrF ctlre ick ec extr R tI cian 14 ZXR10 GERO2 04 Hardware Structure cccoccccncccnncnnonnnancnonnnnnno 14 ZXR10 GERO8 Hardware Structure ocoocccoconconnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnns 15 ZXR10 GER System Architecture 0ooccccocccnnnonnnannnnnncnnnannnns 15 ZXR10 GERO2 04 SMNP asii 16 ZXR10 GERO2 04 SMNP Pan
70. Equipment DTE and Data Circuit Equipment DCE Normally routers serve as DTE FR technology provides communications of connection oriented data link layer A defined communication link is available between each pair of equipment and also the link has a Data Link Connection Identity DLCI Such a service is implemented via FR virtual circuits Each FR virtual circuit identifies itself with DLCI Normally DLCI is designated by the FR service provider FR supports PVC as well as SVC Local Management Interface LMI of the FR is an extension of the basic FR standards As the signaling standard between the router and FR switch the FR LMI provides the FR management mechanism The FR LMI provides many features to manage a complicated internetwork including such functions as global addressing virtual circuit status message and multi destination sending Configuring FR This procedure describes how to do FR configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To select an interface to be configured and to enter into interface configuration mode use the following command as shown in Table 172 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH 3 Chapter 9 Link Protocol Configuration TABLE 172 INTERFACE CONFIG COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode Interface Global This selects an interface to be interface configured and to enter into configuration
71. Fiber Distributed Data Interface GER General Excellent Router FEC Forwarding Equivalence Class FIFO First In and First Out FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array FSM Finite State Machine File Transfer Protocol GBI C Gigabit Interface Converter GRE General Routing Encapsulation ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol IETF Internet Engineering Task Force IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol IGP Interior Gateway Protocol IP Internet Protocol ISO International Organization for Standardization ISP Internet Service Provider Local Area Network LAPB Link Access Procedure Balanced LCP Link Control Protocol LDP Label Distribution Protocol LLC Logical Link Control LSA Link State Advertisement LSP Link State PDU LSR Label Switch Router Media Access Control MD5 Message Digest 5 MED MULTI EXIT DISC MIB Management Information Base MPLS Multi Protocol Label Switching Maximum Transmission Unit Network Address Translation NBMA Non Broadcast Multiple Access NCP Network Control Protocol NIC Network Information Center NLRI Network Layer Reachable Information 366 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Glossary
72. Hop or VCD State Mode 233 1 1 3 00 00 41 00 02 49 RP 43 43 43 43 0 0 flags S Incoming interface tunnel22 RPF nbr 22 22 22 43 Outgoing interface list pos3 5 1 Forward Sparse 00 00 41 00 02 49 233 1 1 4 00 13 52 00 03 30 RP 43 43 43 43 1 1 flags SC Incoming interface tunnel22 RPF nbr 22 22 22 43 Outgoing interface list fei 3 1 Forward Sparse 00 13 52 00 03 30 C 233 1 1 5b 00 00 28 00 03 02 RP 43 43 43 43 0 0 flags SC Incoming interface tunnel22 RPF nbr 22 22 22 43 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 353 ZTEPA ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I Outgoing interface list fei 3 1 Forward Sparse 00 00 28 00 03 02 G 233 1 1 6 00 00 28 00 03 02 RP 43 43 43 43 0 0 flags SC Incoming interface tunnel22 22 22 22 43 Outgoing interface list fei 3 1 RPF nbr Forward Sparse 00 00 28 00 03 02 C 2 To show information about the PIM SM interface use show ip pimsm interface lt interface name gt command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 419 TABLE 419 SHOW IP PIMSM INTERFACE COMMAND Command Command Function Mode Command Format show ip pimsm interface interface name Priviliged This shows information about the PIM SM interface Result This shows information about the PIM SM interface Example show the configured PIM SM interfaces ZXR10fshow ip pimsm interface
73. I ZTERA 376 Table 102 Ip Address Command eene 98 Table 103 Clock Source Command eene 98 Table 104 Config Terminal Command eese 101 Table 105 Interface Config Command suse 101 Table 106 Pvc Command sss 101 Table 107 Ip Address Command esee 101 Table 108 Oam PVC Pvc Management sssseessss 102 Table 109 Oam c Retry ceesseeeseeene nennen nennen 102 Table 110 Config Terminal Command eese 103 Table 111 Interface Config Command sues 103 Table 112 Encapsulate Dot1Q Command 104 Table 113 Ip Address Command eese 104 Table 114 Config Terminal Command eese 105 Table 115 Smart Group Interface Command 106 Table 116 Ip Address Command eese 106 Table 117 Smart Group Ethernet Command 106 Table 118 Config Terminal Command eese 107 Table 119 Multilink Interface Command 108 Table 120 Ip Address Command eese 108 Table 121 Multi Link Group Command sees 108 Table 122 PPP Multilink End Point Command 108 Table 123 Controller Command sees 110 Table 124 Description Command eene 110 Table 125
74. ID LDP hello messages Procedure Chapter 19 MPLS Configuration Last two bytes indicate the internal label space ID of the LSR For the label space per platform the last two bytes are always 0 Rules for selecting the router ID of an LDP on ZXR10 GER Routers are as follows If mpis Idp router id command is used to designate the address of an interface as the router ID and also the interface has an IP address and is in UP status the interface will serve as the router ID If there are loopback interfaces configured with an IP address maximum IP address among the IP addresses of all the loopback interfaces will serve as the router ID Maximum one among the IP addresses of interfaces configured with IP addresses in UP status is selected as the router ID An LSR sends LDP hello messages periodically indicating that it hopes to advertise label binding to find LDP peers A Hello message contains the LDP ID of the label space that the LSR wants to advertise The LDP uses UDP as a transmission protocol to send the Hello message with the port ID of 646 When an LSR receives a Hello message from another LSR it will think that it has found an LSR and its special label space If two LSRs find each other they will start to set up an LDP session LDP defines two types of discovery mechanisms At present ZXR10 GER router supports basic discovery mechanism used to discover directly connected peers Hello message in b
75. Layer 3 VPNs Configuring VPWS Background VPWS Virtual Private Wire Service technology was the first to be introduced to deal with transport of Layer 2 Ethernet traffic over an IP MPLS backbone Purpose This below procedure describes how to do VPWS configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Steps Forthe configuration of VPWS perform the following steps 1 To configure LDP neighbor use the following command as shown in Table 347 TABLE 347 MPLS LDP COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function mpls Idp target session Global This configures LDP neighbor neighbor id Result This configures LDP neighbor 2 To enable the VPWS in interface use the following command as shown in Table 348 306 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 21 VPWS Configuration TABLE 348 MPLS XCONNECT COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode mpls xconnect neighbor interface This enables the VPWS id vcid Result This enables the VPWS END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 108 configuration of interface address and loopback interface is in PE1 P PE2 Run IGP protocol such as OSPF protocol between PE1 P and PE2 Configuration of MPLS is in PE1 P PE2 and configuration of router id is configured for mpls Idp Configuration is done for target session in PE1 PE2 make PE1 and PE2 to became the n
76. Layer 3 function of the bridge interface indicates that the PPP link is directly connected with the Ethernet with BCP encapsulation The POS layer 3 interface using BCP encapsulation can serve as an Ethernet interface and has attributes of the Ethernet interface such as ARP learning Transparent transmission function of the POS bridge interface is implemented through V Switch functions With the V Switch forwarding table transparent transmission is available between the POS interface and the Ethernet and ATM interfaces As a link layer protocol the PPP is responsible for establishing deleting and maintaining layer 2 links PPP negotiation process is as follows LCP negotiation Establish establish links CHAP or PAP authentication Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 147 148 BCP BCP Negotiation Purpose Prerequisite Steps ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA BCP is one NCP the same as the IPCP described in the above procedure BCP is mainly used to negotiate and bear bridge parameters If IPCP negotiation is performed during NCP negotiation the BCP is an ordinary PPP interface If IPCP negotiation is performed during NCP negotiation the BCP is an ordinary PPP interface if BCP negotiation is performed during NCP negotiation the BCP is a bridge interface Although an interface becomes a PPP bridge interface through negotiation it still adopts PPP en
77. MPLS uses a simplified technology to complete conversion between L2 and L3 MPLS can provide a label for each IP packet that can be encapsulated into a new MPLS packet in conjunction with the IP packet to determine the transmission path and priority sequence of the IP packet Before forwarding the IP packet according to the corresponding path an MPLS router will read the header label of the MPLS packet but will not read the information such as the IP address in each IP packet Therefore the switching and routing speed of packets is greatly improved MPLS can use different types of L2 protocols Up to now the MPLS Task Force has standardized labels used in frame relay ATM PPP links and IEEE802 3 LANs The advantage of the running of MPLS in frame relay and ATM is that it brings the random connectivity of the IP to these connection oriented technologies At present the major development trend of MPLS is ATM because ATM supports powerful traffic management and provides QoS In addition ATM with the combination of the MPLS technology can put its functions in traffic management and QoS into full play Labels are used to forward headers of packets and format of packet headers depends upon network features In a router network a label is an independent 32 bit header In ATM a label is placed in the cell header of a Virtual Circuit Identifier Virtual Channel Identifier VCI VPI For the scalability of MPLS a very key point is that a
78. Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 3 Structure and Principles PanelPanel Figure 19 shows the RE 02GE card FIGURE 19 RE 02GE CARD RE 02GE ACT m d a Duna ER L 40 004000M1 Interfaces Table 26 shows the RE 02GE card specifications TABLE 26 RE 02GE E100RJ CARD SPECIFICATIONS Port Type Description In compliance with IEEE 802 3 lle RJ45 connector erne electrical vere Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP are interface cx RJ45 Maximum transmission distance 10BASE T 185m 100BASE T 100m 1000BASE T 100m In compliance with IEEE 802 3 GE Ethernet SFP optical module optical interface LC connector SFP transmission distance 500m 80km support multi mode fiber and single mode fiber Indicators RE 02GE card has one LED indicator Table 27 describes their functions TABLE 27 ON THE RE 02GE CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description This is constantly on when the fan is working ACT each port normally This flashes if the fan fails This is constantly on in the case of data sending LINK each port and receiving and this becomes off in the case of data failure Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 31 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA RE 02GE E100RJ Definition This is a two port GE electrical interface board providing two 100Base T GE el
79. Table 127 TABLE 127 FRAME TYPE Command Command Command Function Format Mode Interface This sets the frame type of sdh config cpos3 into sdh Interface This sets the frame type of sonet d A config cpos3 into sonet END OF STEPS Refer to below procedure for configuring aug Aug 3 Mapping Refer to below procedure for configuring CPOS on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To set the framing format of T1 channel use tug 2 lt Vtg number t1 lt T1 number gt framing command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 128 TABLE 128 T1 CHANNLE FRAME Command Command Command Function Format Mode tug 2 Vtg number Interface This sets the framing format of t1 lt T1 config T1 channel number framing Result This sets the framing format of T1 channel Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 111 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA 2 To create a CPOS interface in T1 encapsulation use format tug 2 Vtg number tl lt Tl number gt channel group 1 timeslots 1 242 Command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 129 TABLE 129 T1 ENCAPSULATIONS CPOS INTERFACE Command Command Command Function Format Mode format tug 2 Vtg number tl T1 number channel group 1 timeslots 1 24 Interface This creates a cpos interface in config the T1 encapsulation Result Thi
80. ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA ZXR10 GERO2 04 SMNP ZXR10 GERO2 04 core part is SMNP This consist of central processor module include protocol processor module and control processor module and network processor module This enhances level of integration and saves users money Central processor module implements functions of protocol processing and control processing This is implemented by the high speed MIPS processor This consists of symmetric processing system Host Bridge CACHE system memory system and BOOTROM Central processor module provides standard MIPS buses interface and control buses interface for the outside MIPS buses uses corresponding network processor module through the local channel The protocol processor module sends and receives data through local channel Control buses connect the control channels of other modules Network processor module consists of network processor RD memory and SRAM memory Each network processor module supports four interface cards and one MIPS buses interface to connect with the central processor module With MIPS bus central processor module initializes the network processor configuration manages tables in the network processor memory and sends receives packets ZXR10 GERO2 04 SMNP Panel SMNP panel identifies as REW SMP Figure 10 shows the SMNP panel FIGURE 10 ZxR10 GERO2 04 SMNP PANEL ZXR10 GERO2 04 manages t
81. a default metric provides a reasonable substitute and enables the redistribution to proceed Important When enabled the default metric command applies a metric value of O to redistributed connected routes The default metric command does not override metric values that are applied with the redistribute command Result This helps to configure metric values for other routing protocols END OF STEPS ZXR10 GER supports RIPv1 and RIPv2 RIPv2 is used by default 1 To specify a RIP version used globally by the router use version command in RIP router configuration mode as shown in Table 220 Use the no form of this command to restore the default value TABLE 220 RIP VERSION COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode version 1 2 RIP Config This designates the RIP version used in a router globally ip rip receive RIP Config This designates the RIP version 1 2 version received on an 1 2 interface ip rip send RIP Config version 1 2 This designates the RIP broadcast version sent on an interface multicast gt 1 2 specifies RIP version 1 and RIP version 2 To specify RIP versions used on an interface basis use the ip rip receive version and ip rip send version commands ip rip receive version command is used to override the default behavior of RIP as specified by the version command This command applies only to the interface configuration There can be configuration for accepting b
82. address command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 107 TABLE 107 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip address Interface ip address This configures an ip address of net mask an interface lt broadcast address gt Result This configures an ip address of an interface To enable oam F5 management of PVCs use oam pvc manage lt frequency gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 108 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 101 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA TABLE 108 OAM PVC Pvc MANAGEMENT Command Command Command Function Format Mode on pus This enables oamF5 manage Interface management of PVCs lt frequency gt Result This creates oamF5 PVCs management 6 To configure OamF5 management parameters use oam pvc manage lt frequency gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 109 TABLE 109 OAM RETRY Command Command Command Function Format Mode oam iii This enables oamF5 manage Interface frequency management of PVCs Result This enables oamF5 PVC management Example As shown in Figure 65 atm155 1 1 1 interface of ZTE ZXR10 GER is connected to at 5 1 interface of ZXR10 routing switch FiGURE 65 ATM CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 10 1 0 1 30 C f AtM155 enm EU AImi55 1 1 1 Su ZXR10 A 10 1 0 2 30 ZXR10 routing swi
83. address IS IS ip address net config mask value level 1 level 1 2 level 2 This defines an address summary of IS IS This command generates a summary that advertise without the need of detailed routing entries Metric value ranges from lt 0 4261412864 gt The least metric value among the aggregated routing entries regard as the metric value of the summary route END OF STEPS For More information about IS IS configuration please follow the below procedures IS IS Interface Parameters This below procedure delivers the information about IS IS interface configuration parameters 1 Router Command Line Interface has been accessed IS IS is running in a network Use command isis circuit type level 1 level 1 2 level 2 only in IS IS interface config mode for defining operation type of an IS IS interface as shown in Table 270 TABLE 270 INTERFACE LEVEL COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode isis circuit type IS IS This defines the type of level 1 level 1 interface adjacency on an the 2 level 2 only config interface Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 15 IS IS Configuration Result This configures type of adjacency that can be set up on an interface For configuring isis hello multiplier in order to save time for sending hello packets use command isis hello multiplier num level 1 level 2 in IS IS interface config mode as shown
84. and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 143 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA 5 To configure the LMI signaling format use the following command as shown in Table 176 TABLE 176 FRAME RELAY LMI TYPE Command Command Command Function Format Mode frame relay Interface This configures the LMI Imi type configuration signaling format lt Imi type gt 9 9 9 Result This configures the LMI signaling format 6 Set the FR mode point to point and point to multipoint Following command is used frame relay interface mode lt mode gt 7 Configure address mapping i The following command is used in the point to point mode and used to define DLCI mapping between the local end and the peer end Following command is used frame relay interface dlci lt dlci gt ii The following command is used in the point to multipoint mode and used to define mapping between the destination protocol address and the DLCI connecting the destination address Following command is used frame relay map ip lt ip addr gt lt dlci gt lt encap gt Note Here the IP address should be configured as the peer IP address At present the following two encapsulation modes are supported ietf and cisco default ietf END OF STEPS FR Maintenance and Diagnosis Purpose Refer to below procedure for configuring FR on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been acce
85. br200 3 untagged ZXR10 3904 bridge set vlan add br200 10 tagged ZXR10 3904 bridge set vlan pvid 2 100 ZXR10 3904 bridge set vlan pvid 3 200 ZXR10 3904 config z interface br100 ZXR10 3904 config if no shutdown ZXR10 3904 config z interface br200 ZXR10 3904 config if no shutdown Configuring Smart Group Smart Group refers to aggregation of multiple physical interfaces into one logical interface to provide higher aggregated bandwidth load balancing and link redundancy One SmartGroup interface can contain up to eight Ethernet interfaces in the same board slot One Ethernet interface board can support up to 31 SmartGroup interfaces This procedure describes how to do smart group configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Routers Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enter into configuration mode use config terminal command in privilged mode as shown in Table 114 TABLE 114 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 105 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA 2 To create a smartgroup interface and to enter into it use interface interface number command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 115 TABLE 115 SMART GROUP INTERFACE COMMAND Command Comm
86. bytes free ZXR10 rmdir ABC Delete the subdirectory ABC ZXR10 dir View the current directory information and find that the directory ABC has been deleted successfully Directory of flash attribute size date time name 1 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 22 10 IMG 2 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 38 22 CFG 3 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 38 22 DATA 65007616 bytes total 48863232 bytes free ZXR10 Note System Management is described in detail in the following content TFTP Configuration By use of FTP or TFTP image files and configuration files of router can be backed up and recovered ZXR10 GER supports FIP and TFTP modes ZXR10 GER can serve as FTP TFTP client TFTP Trivial file transfer protocol sets as an example for description This procedure describes how to do TFTP configuration in ZTE ZXR1OGER There must be TFTP software installed in computer system so it behaves as a TFTP server for transferring files between router and System Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 67 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I Steps ZTE a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed In these steps Solarwinds TFTP is used for TFTP software part a free TFTP server software program which is installed on Microsoft Windows XP SP2 Note In these steps CLI configuration of router occurs through Hyper Terminal emulation software present in Windows Operating System SolarWi
87. candidate RP is 0 The candidate RP with greater priority value has greater priority END OF STEPS Setting PIM SM Global Parameters When PIM SM is running different parameters have different default value These parameters can be set to optimize networks This topic describes how to set PIM SM global parameters Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To configure the thresold for RPT switch to SPT use spt threshold infinity group list lt access list number gt command in pimsm configuration mode as shown in Table 391 TABLE 391 SPT THRESHOLD INFINITY COMMAND Command Command Format Command Mode z Function sptethiresneld This configures the infinity group list Pimsm thresold for RPT lt access list configuration switch to SPT number gt Result This configures the thresold for RPT switch to SPT Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 341 342 DR Selection M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Only the last hop DP and the RP can actively switch over to the source shortest path tree By default when the RP receives the first registration information it will start the switchover For the last hop DR configure the switchover threshold strategy of the source shortest path tree with the unicast group as control granularity If the switchover threshold is set to infinity switchover does not occur By default switchover must ta
88. ce3 interface name command in controller configuration mode as shown in Table 92 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 91 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA TABLE 92 E1 CONFIGURATION COMMAND Command Command i Command Function Format Mode controller controller enters E1 controller ce3 interface configuration mode name gt i Result This enables to enter into E3 configuration mode 3 To configure channelized mode of E3 interface use Channelized e3 interface name command in controller configuration mode as shown in Table 93 TABLE 93 CHANNELIZED COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode Channelized e3 interface name gt This configures channelized ntroller controlle mode Result This sets E3 interface into channelized mode 4 To configure frame mode of an E3 interface use framing unframe frame command in controller configuration mode as shown in Table 94 TABLE 94 FRAMING COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Function Command Format Mode This configures framing mode of E3 interface When non framing mode global config is configured system automatically create a sub channel with channel ID 1 framing unframe frame Result This sets framing mode of an E1 interface 5 To configure an ip address for E3 interface use ip address lt ip address gt lt net mask gt lt broadcast address gt comman
89. configure routers that interconnect to non broadcast networks use neighbor lt ip address gt priority number command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 237 TABLE 237 NEIGHBOR COMMAND Command Command Mode Command Function Format a seated SIP This configures neighbor uc OSPF route router on a non broadcast priority network number Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 193 194 Related I nformation Purpose Prerequisites Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Result This configures a router interconnecting to non broadcast networks END OF STEPS For additional information on OSPF additional configurations please refer to below procedures Configuring OSPF Authentication This below procedure describes how to enable OSPF authentication a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a OSPF is running on a network as described in above basic OSPF configuration 1 To enable authentication in OSPF routing process use area lt area id gt authentication message digest command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 238 TABLE 238 AREA AUTHENTICATION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode area lt area id gt authentication OSPF Route message digest This enables authentication in an OSPF area Result This enables authentication in the OSPF area 2 For assigning password on OSPF interfac
90. configure the network address of the CPOS interface use ip address command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 142 TABLE 142 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode Interface This configures the network ip address configuration address of the CPOS interface Result This configures the network address of the CPOS interface 6 To configure crc mode use ip address command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 143 TABLE 143 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip address Inte gace This configures the crc mode config Result This configures the crc mode END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 69 CP3 of a ZXR10 GER router is interconnected with that of a remote ZXR10 GER router It adopts channelized configuration 1 24 timeslots layer 2 WAN encapsulation protocol PPP crci6 frame format and internal clock mode FIGURE 69 EXAMPLE OF CHANNELIZED CPOS CONFIGURATION cpos3_1 1 1 1 1 1 1221681230 SS 00 _ 7XR19 pos3 1 1 1 1 1 1 ZXR10 192 168 1 1 30 116 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Chapter 6 Interface Configuration ZXR10 configuration ZXR10 config f controller cpos3 1 1 ZXR10 config control clock source internal ZXR10 config control framing sdh ZXR10 config control aug mapping au 3 ZXR10 config control au 3 1 ZXR10 config ctrlr au3 tug 2 1 ti 1 fr fr ZXR10 conf
91. control framing unframe ZXR10 2 config control exit ZXR10 2 config interface e1_1 1 1 ZXR10 2 config if ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 Configuring CE3 Interface Similar to North American T 3 CE3 is the European format for digital transmission CE3 Wide area digital transmission scheme used predominantly in Europe that carries data at a rate of 34 368 Mbps E3 lines can be leased for private use from common carriers There are two types of CE3 working modes a Channelized Mode Non Channelized Mode This is the demultiplex 16 E1 signals Each E1 can be configured freely to channelized or non channelized E1 When an E3 interface works in the non channelized mode this is equivalent to an interface with a data bandwidth of 34 368Mbps Its logical features are similar to those of a synchronous serial port E3 interface support data link layer protocols such as PPP MPPP and network protocols such as IP This procedure describes how to do E3 Configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a E3 Cable is connected and running 1 Enter into configuration mode by writing following command as shown in Table 91 TABLE 91 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config E Enters into global configuration xec terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To enter into E3 configuration mode use controller
92. default interface 8 To configure rapid forwarding based on the policy routing for the incoming messages of the port use ip policy route map command in route mapping configuration mode as shown in Table 312 TABLE 312 IP POLICY ROUTE MAP COMMAND command command Command Function Format Mode This configures the rapid A route forwarding based on the Ip policy route mapping policy routing for the map y configuration incoming messages of the port Result This configures the rapid forwarding based on the policy routing for the incoming messages of the port END OF STEPS Example When there are many Internet Service Provider ISP egresses on the network select different ISP egresses for users from different groups through policy routing or select different ISP egresses based on service types As shown in Figure 105 the router accesses the users of two subnets through different interfaces Two ISP egresses are available and users with different IP addresses need to select different egresses The users in the subnet with the IP address 10 10 0 0 24 select ISP1 egress and those in the subnet with the IP address 11 11 0 0 24 select ISP2 egress Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 261 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA FIGURE 105 POLICY ROUTING CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 10 10 0 0 24 ISP1 100 1 1 1 200 1 1 1 ZXR10 config
93. finds the corresponding route in the forwarding table it forwards the message according to the route Otherwise it forwards the message according to the valid set ip default next hop direct next hop specified in policy routing When multiple set ip default next hop items exist the router selects the first default valid next hop according to the sequence If set ip default next hop is not set or no valid set ip default next hop exists the router forwards the message according to the valid set default interface specified in policy routing When multiple set default interface items Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 17 Policy Routing Configuration exist the router selects the first valid default egress according to the sequence If set default interface is not set or no valid set default interface exists the router forwards the message according to the default route If no default route is specified in the system the router discards the message NOTE In the ZXR10 GER the path selection modes for message forwarding are prioritized as policy routing normal routing default routing Configuring Policy Routing Purpose Refer to below procedure for PBR configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER routers Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Steps 1 To create a route map policy use route map command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 305 TABLE 30
94. given tunnel at any point in time is determined based on the tunnel resource requirements and network resources such as bandwidth Available resources are flooded via extensions to a link state based Interior Protocol Gateway IPG Tunnel paths are calculated at the tunnel head based on a fit between required and available resources constraint based routing The IGP automatically routes the traffic into these tunnels Typically a packet crossing the MPLS traffic engineering backbone travels on a single tunnel that connects the ingress point to the egress point MPLS traffic engineering is built on the following IOS mechanisms Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Tunnels Mesh Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 23 Traffic Engineering Configuration a Label switched path LSP tunnels which are signaled through RSVP with traffic engineering extensions LSP tunnels are represented as IOS tunnel interfaces have a configured destination and are unidirectional A link state IGP such as IS IS with extensions for the global flooding of resource information and extensions for the automatic routing of traffic onto LSP tunnels as appropriate An MPLS traffic engineering path calculation module that determines paths to use for LSP tunnels An MPLS traffic engineering link management module that does link admission and bookkeeping of the resource information to be flooded L
95. has three power supply indicators whose functions are shown in Table 48 TABLE 48 FUNCTIONS OF SPWD PANEL INDICATORS Indicators Function Description Indicates the working condition of 3 3V output of 3 3V indicator the power supply board It is constantly on in the green case of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage Indicates the working condition of 2 5V output of 2 5V indicator the power supply board It is constantly on in the green case of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage Indicates the working condition of 5V output of the 5V indicator power supply board It is constantly on in the case green of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage 44 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Dissipation Mode Modular Structure Chapter 3 Structure and Principles Fan Plug in Box ZXR10 GER heat dissipation mode is left dissipation mode Two parallel fans from the left side of the chassis view from the front are there to blow air into the chassis These fans make an air exhaust vent at the right side to form a left to right air duct Cool air flow generated by the fan exchanges with the hot air flow generated by the board assembly and power supply board Main chips generated heat are cooled by means of an aluminum radiator Both the air filter of th
96. how to configure static multicast route Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed 1 To do static multicast configuration use show ip mroute group lt group address gt source lt source address gt Summary command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 412 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 349 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA TABLE 412 IP MROUTE COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode show ip mroute Global group group configuration This do static multicast address source i configuration lt source address gt summary Result This do static multicast configuration END OF STEPS Multicast Maintenance and Diagnosis Purpose Below procedure gives information about multicast maintenance amp diagnosis Prerequisite Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed Steps 1 To view multicast routing tables use show ip igmp interface lt interface name gt command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 413 TABLE 413 SHOW IP MROUTE COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode show ip igmp Priviliged This shows multicast interface routing tables lt interface name gt Result This shows multicast routing tables 2 To view multicast forwarding routing tables use show ip forwarding mroute group address group address source address lt source address gt command in Pri
97. in Table 271 TABLE 271 IS IS HELLO MULTIPLIER Command Command Format Mode isis hello IS IS multiplier num interface level 1 level 2 config Command Function This defines the save time and Hello interval multiplier of an interface The hello multiplier values ranges from lt 3 1000 gt Result This configures save time and hello interval multiplier of an interface For defining time to transmit LSP packets use command isis Isp interval num level 1 level 2 in IS IS interface config mode as shown in Table 272 TABLE 272 Is Is LSP INTERVAL Command Command Function Command Format Mode isis Isp Interval Ss This define an LSP Packet Im evel nterface transmission interval 1 level 2 config The value of Isp interval ranges from lt 1 65535 gt Result This configures an LSP packet transmission interval for maintaining Routing database For designating DIS election priority interface use command isis priority num level 1 level 2 in IS IS interface config mode as shown in Table 273 TABLE 273 Is Is PRIORITY Command Format Command Command Function Mode isis priori IS IS l EU ick interface This defines DIS election 1 level 2 config priority of an interface The value of num ranges from 0 127 Result This configures DIS Designated Intermediate system priority of an interface IS IS configure metric of an interface to participate in calculation for number of shortest IS IS pat
98. into BGP Result This configures a prefix parameter for denying certain network prefix END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 98 R1 and R2 are mutually IBGP peers R1 and R3 are mutually EBGP peers and R4 and R2 are mutually EBGP peers FIGURE 98 ROUTE FILTERING BY MEANS OF NLRI 182 17 20 1 30 To prevent AS100 from playing the role of a transitional AS the network 192 18 10 0 24 from AS300 can be advertised to AS200 R1 is configured with filtering function as follows ZXR10 Ri config zrouter bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router no synchronization ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 182 17 1 2 remote as 100 ZXR10_Ri config router neighbor 182 17 20 1 remote as 200 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 182 17 20 1 route map MAP1 out ZXR10_R1 config route map MAP1 permit 10 ZXR10 Ri1 config route map zt match ip address 1 ZXR10_Ri config access list 1 deny 192 18 10 0 0 0 0 255 ZXR10_Ri config access list 1 permit 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 238 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Introduction Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration In this example the route map command and the access list command access list are used to prevent R1 from advertising prefix 192 18 10 0 24 to AS200 This command can also be used to filter certain network prefix to be advertised ZXR10 config router bgp filter out deny peer ip 182 17 20 1 network 192 18 10 0
99. is complete a username and password pair is repeatedly sent by the remote node across the link in clear text until authentication is acknowledged or until the connection is terminated Unidirectional PAP supports bi directional two ways and unidirectional one and way authentication With unidirectional authentication only the Bidirectional side receiving the call NAS authenticates the remote side Authentication client The remote client does not authenticate the server With bi directional authentication each side independently sends an Authenticate Request AUTH REQ and receives either an Authenticate Acknowledge AUTH ACK or Authenticate Not Acknowledged AUTH NAK Purpose This procedure describes how to do password authentication protocol PAP on ZTE ZXR10 GER Prerequisite Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed Steps 1 To enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in privilged mode as shown in Table 157 TABLE 157 CoNFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To configure PPP PAP on interface use ppp authentication pap command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 158 TABLE 158 PPP AUTHENTICATION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ppp i authentication Interface This configures PPP
100. is manually configured The routers running PIM SM find each other and maintain the adjacency relation by exchanging Hello messages In the multi across network Hello messages also contain the priority information of routers According to the parameter select the designate router DR The multicast source or the first hop router DR directly connected with the source encapsulates packets in a registration message and sends it to the RP through a unicast router When receiving the registration message the RP de encapsulates and takes out the packets and sends them to the receiver of the group along the shared multicast tree Each host acting as a receiver joins the multicast group through the member report message of the IGMP The last hop router or the DP in the multi access network sends the received joining message to the RP for registration level by level After receiving the joining message the intermediary router checks whether it has already had the router of the group If yes the intermediary router adds the downstream request router to the shared multicast tree as a branch If not it continues to send the joining message to the RP When the RP or the multicast router is directly connected with the receiver it can switch to the source based shortest path tree from the shared multicast tree When the RP receives the registration message sent from a new multicast source the RP returns a joining message to the DR directly conn
101. meca 84 100 64KbpS iiir e eerte 87 ollm 82 ARI recede de 100 ABR 100 188 189 190 199 201 203 ABR Suar 203 Access Control List 344 348 ACK M 134 ADM 5i acc 289 290 ADMS etait tees 96 Advantages of MPLS in IP based Network 287 288 305 311 AFI E 171 172 173 AN airada 289 290 AnyToAny uo cc ees eee eee e eee e eee 288 ARP i iie 155 158 159 160 AS wads 188 189 190 200 205 227 228 230 236 238 239 240 242 246 247 248 249 290 296 AS100 238 240 245 247 250 AS200 238 239 240 249 250 AS O ias itd ri a ado aA 240 AS300 cores remi 238 239 AS65010 cree 249 AS65020 esee 249 ASBR 166 188 189 190 200 201 202 203 206 ASsii 201 227 228 230 239 242 246 249 294 Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM 83 84 85 99 100 101 274 275 276 288 290 ATMVCC capaci 288 AUTH arcos 134 BDR oes 187 188 BGPii 162 200 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 235 236 237 238 239 240 242 244 245 246 247 249 251 252 253 254 255 259 288 289 290 291 293 294 295 296 297 302 303 BOPA sacado 228 288 BIC MOMENTE 73 76 BOOTP visccnarsieiedattacsdusnacas 156 A 291 CBR S EDEN 100 CE289 290 291 293 294 CE1 295 296 297 299 301 CE2 295 297 298 299 A 63 66 67 CHAP 131 133 134 136 137 138 CIDR iieri tnnt 186 228 CISCO tias 229 Ellas 185 190 CUNS eiie
102. mpls ip in global configuration mode This is shown in Table 356 TABLE 356 MPLS ID COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function mpls ip global config This enables MPLS Result This enables MPLS To create VCID use command vcid lt vcid number gt in VFI configuration mode This is shown in Table 357 TABLE 357 VCID COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode vcid vcid VFI This creates VCID number Result This creates VCID To configure PWTYPE use command pwtype ethernet ethernet vlan in VFI configuration mode This is shown in Table 358 TABLE 358 PWTYPE COMMAND Command Format command Command Function Mode pwtype lt ethernet ethernet VFI This configures PWTYPE vlan gt Result This configures PWTYPE To create peer use command peer lt peer router id gt lt 1024 gt spoke lt 1 1024 gt in VFI configuration mode This is shown in Table 359 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 313 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA TABLE 359 PEER COMMAND Command Format Command Mode command Function peer lt peer router id lt 1024 gt spoke VFI This creates peer lt 1 1024 gt Result This creates Peer 6 To set the max number of MAC address use command maxmac in VFI configuration mode This is shown in Table 360 TABLE 360 MAXMAX COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Functi
103. nop Ne Contents Index Headings Numbering Glossary Good Fair Average Poor I ntelligibility Language Vocabulary Readability amp Clarity Technical Accuracy Content Good Fair Average Poor Bad N A Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation Improve the overview introduction Make it more concise brief Improve the Contents Add more step by step procedures tutorials Improve the organization Add more troubleshooting information Include more figures Make it less technical Your Add more examples Add more better quick reference aids suggestions for Add more detail Improve the index improvement of i this Other suggestions documentation Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments please complete the following Name Company Postcode Address Telephone This page is intentionally blank Contents About This Manual 1 nana nsa nas anna suia nara nan raa Rara sa aa Rs aRaraa I PUTPOS Sara A NE i Intended Audiente icit teo cxx a i Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge oococcoccconcononcnnnnoncnnnncnnnnancnnanes i What Is in This Manual nori rni ected ta oiu as i Related
104. notifies R4 of its route to 170 10 0 0 the route will also be dropped in R5 For packets to destination 170 10 0 0 to arrive at R3 through R5 smoothly R5 should have a route to 170 10 0 0 Therefore route redistribution should be used to make R5 learn the route by means of IGP Before R2 advertises a BGP route to EBGP neighbors it should wait for R2 to learn the route by means of IGP via R5 This process is called route synchronization By default the synchronization function of ZXR10 GER is in enabled status A transitional AS should advertise routes learned from other ASs to a third AS If a non BGP route exists inside the AS route synchronization is needed Here R2 uses route synchronization If it is not necessary to advertise a BGP route to a third AS or all the routers in an AS run the BGP route synchronization is not needed The following configuration disables route synchronization on R2 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R2 config router network 150 10 0 0 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 1 1 1 2 remote as 400 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 3 3 3 1 remote as 100 ZXR10_R2 config router no synchronization 246 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Introduction Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration BGP Route Reflector For BGP routes in the same AS an adjacency should be set up between any two routers Thus with the incre
105. number gt el lt El number gt framing command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 139 TABLE 139 E1 CHANNLE FRAME FORMAT Command Command Command Function Format Mode vtg Vtg n mber gt Interface This sets the framing format of el lt El config E1 channel in VTG number framing Result This sets the framing format of E1 channel in VTG To create a CPOS interface in the E1 encapsulation format use vtg Vtg number el lt El number gt channel group 1 timeslots 1 31 command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 140 TABLE 140 VTG CHANNEL GROUP Command Command Command Function Format Mode vtg lt Vtg number gt el lt El number gt Interface This creates a CPOS interface in channel config the El encapsulation format group 1 timeslots lt 1 31 gt Result This creates a CPOS interface in the El encapsulation format To set the clock source of E1 channel use vtg Vtg number el lt El number gt clock source command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 141 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 115 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA TABLE 141 E1 CHANNLE CLOCK SOURCE Command Command Command Function Format Mode vtg lt Vtg number gt This sets the clock source of E1 el lt El Interface channel number config clock source Result This sets the clock source of E1 channel 5 To
106. of networks 3 Polling interval Polling interval is only used in NBMA networks OSPF neighbors are a group of routers on same network These routers have agreed with some configuration parameters To form adjacency routers must be neighbors To form adjacency routers must analyze Hello packets of each other to confirm whether they have agreed on necessary parameters The parameters are as follows area ID area tag authentication information call interval and dead interval of router When two routers form an adjacent relation they can exchange routing information Whether two routers can form an adjacent relation depends upon network type connected to routers Point to point networks and virtual links only have two routers so routers form adjacency automatically A point to multipoint network can be regarded as a set of point to point networks so adjacency is formed between each pair of routers Ina broadcast or an NBMA network adjacency may not be formed between two neighbors If adjacency has been set up among all routers the number of routers is n for example on a network each router will have n 1 adjacent connections and the network will have n n 1 2 adjacent connections In a large multi access network if each router traces so many neighbor routers the router will have too heavy traffic and furthermore the routing information between each neighboring routers will waste many network bandwidth There
107. packet count use packet count beginjend command in pimsm configuration mode as shown in Table 394 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH 5 6 Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration TABLE 394 PACKET COUNT COMMAND command command Command Function Format Mode packet This enables disables Pimsm count configuration reporting of the multicast begin end g packet count Result This enables disables reporting of the multicast packet count To set the interval of sending the Hello message use ip pim query interval lt seconds gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 395 TABLE 395 IP PiM QUERY INTERVAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip pim query interface This sets the interval of sending interval configuration the Hello message seconds Result This sets the interval of sending the Hello message According to the actual network conditions appropriately adjust the time interval of the Hello message sent by the PIM SM neighbors The default value is 30 seconds To limit PIM SM neighbors use accept register access list number gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 396 TABLE 396 IP PiM NEIGHBOR FILTER COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode accept register interface access fi This limits PIM SM neighbors list configuration number gt Result This limit
108. page is intentionally blank 318 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION I ntroduction Contents Definition Traffic Engineering MPLS Traffic Engineering Chapter 23 Traffic Engineering Configuration Overview This chapter gives the basic concepts of layer 3 MPLS TE and the relevant configuration on the ZXR10 GER router This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 365 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 23 Topic Page No Overview 319 MPLS Engineering Working 320 MPLS Basic Configuration 321 MPLS TE Maintenance amp Diagnosis 324 MPLS TE Example 325 Overview Multiprotocol Label Switching MPLS traffic engineering software enables an MPLS backbone to replicate and expand upon the traffic engineering capabilities of Layer 2 ATM and Frame Relay networks Traffic engineering is essential for service provider and Internet service provider ISP backbones Such backbones must support a high use of transmission capacity and the networks must be very resilient so that they can withstand link or node failures MPLS traffic engineering provides an integrated approach to traffic engineering With MPLS traffic engineering capabilities are integrated into Layer 3 which optimizes the routing of IP Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 319 320 One Tier Network RSVP Tunnel Paths M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA traffic given the
109. relevant information of smartgroup group members Interface config Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 129 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Result This displays the relevant information of smartgroup group members END OF STEPS 130 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 9 Link Protocol Configuration I ntroduction Contents Background Overview This chapter introduces the link protocol PPP and related configurations on the ZXR10 GER This chapter covers the the following topics TABLE 156 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 9 Topic Page No PPP Protocol 83 FR Protocol 84 PPP Protocol Overview This chapter describes how to configure Link protocols Point to Point Protocol PPP and Multilink PPP that can be configured on serial interfaces of ZTE ZXR10 GER Topic Page No Point to Point Protocol 132 PPP Authentication Protocols 133 Password Authentication Protocols PAP 134 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 136 CHAP Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 131 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Background Components PPP Link Layer Topic Page No Multilink Point to Point Protocol MPPP 139 Point to Point Protocol Point to Point Protocol PPP originally emerged as an encapsulation protocol for transporting IP traffic over point t
110. request or a response The request asks that a router send all or a part of its routing table The response can be an unsolicited regular routing update or a reply to a request Responses contain routing table entries Multiple RIP packets are used to convey information from large routing tables Version Specifies RIP version used In a RIP packet implementing any of the RIP 2 fields or using authentication this value is set to 2 Unused has a value set to zero Address family identifier AFI Specifies the address family used RIPv2 s AFI field functions identically to RFC 1058 RIP s AFI field with one exception If the AFI for the first entry in the message is OxFFFF the remainder of the entry contains authentication information Currently the only authentication type is simple password Route tag provides a method for distinguishing between internal routes learned by RIP and external routes learned from other protocols P address specifies the IP address for the entry Subnet mask contains the subnet mask for the entry If this field is zero no subnet mask has been specified for the entry Next hop indicates the IP address of the next hop to which packets for the entry should be forwarded 172 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 13 RIP Configuration Metric Indicates how many internetwork hops routers have be
111. route 10 1 0 0 255 255 0 0 192 168 4 2 ZXR10_Ri config ip route 10 2 0 0 255 255 0 0 192 168 4 2 Suppose that R3 has been configured normally and the above configuration can be used to complete IP connection However static route summary can be used to optimize the routing table Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Introduction Implementation Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 12 Static Route Configuration of R1 The following command can be used to replace the above two commands ZXR10_Ri config ip route 10 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 192 168 4 2 The above command shows that all packets to destination network 10 0 0 0 8 pass 192 168 4 2 that is to say packets to subnets subnet 10 1 0 0 16 and subnet 10 2 0 0 16 of destination network 10 0 0 0 8 are sent to 192 168 4 2 In this way static routes are used to summarize all subnets of main network 10 0 0 0 8 Default Route A router might not be able to determine routes to all other networks To provide complete routing capability the common practice is to use some routers as smart routers and give the remaining routers default routes to the smart router Smart routers have routing table information for the entire internetwork These default routes can be passed along dynamically or can be configured into individual routers Most dynamic interior routing protocols include a mechanism for causing a smart router to generate dynamic default in
112. router mpls traffic eng router id loopbackl R1 config router network 100 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 area 0 R1 config router network 10 10 12 1 0 0 0 255 area 0 Rl config router exit R1 config R2 configuration R2 config in R2 config if R2 config if R2 config if R2 config if R2 config R2 config if R2 config if R2 config if R2 config if R2 config ip address 10 10 terface fei_1 5 mpls traffic eng tunnels ip rsvp bandwidth 30000 10000 exit R2 config interface fei 1 6 ip address 10 10 23 2 255 255 255 0 mpls traffic eng tunnels ip rsvp bandwidth 30000 10000 exit R2 config interface loopbackl 4 12 2 255 255 255 0 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 23 Traffic Engineering Configuration R2 config R2 config if ip 255 255 255 255 address R2 config if exit R2 config mpls traffic eng tunnels R2 config frouter ospf 2 19 04 1 14 2 R3 config if R3 config if R3 config if R3 config if R3 config if R3 config R3 config tin R3 config if R3 config if R3 config rou loopbackl R3 config rou R3 config rou 0 R3 config rou area O0 R3 config rou R3 config R2 config router mpls traffic eng router id loopbackl R2 config router mpls traffic eng area 0 R2 config router network 10 10 12 0 00 0 2 55 area O0 R2 config router n
113. routing table Also when router operating system ROS can no longer find a valid next hop for the address specified as the address of the forwarding router in a static route the static route is removed from the IP routing table This procedure describes how to do static route configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 203 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Chapter 12 Static Route Configuration TABLE 203 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To configure static route use ip route lt prefix gt lt net mask lt interface number gt lt forwarding address gt lt distance metric gt globle tag lt tag gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 204 TABLE 204 STATIC ROUTE COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode ip route lt prefix gt global lt net mask gt config lt interface number gt lt forwarding address gt lt distance metric gt globle tag lt tag gt This configures static route Result This sets static route Tag is a route label Two static routes with different next hop IP addresses to
114. sends data to another piece of network equipment physical address MAC address of destination equipment must also be known in addition to IP address ARP Address Resolution Protocol is used to map IP addresses into physical addresses to guarantee smooth communications Firstly source equipment advertises an ARP request containing an IP address of destination equipment and all types of equipment on network receives ARP request If a piece of equipment finds that IP address in request matches with its own IP address this sends a reply containing its MAC address to source equipment Source equipment obtains MAC address of the destination equipment according to reply To reduce ARP packets on a network and send data faster mapping relation between IP addresses and MAC addresses is buffered in a local ARP table When a piece of equipment wants to send data this first search an ARP table according to IP address If MAC address of destination equipment is found in ARP table the equipment no longer sends any ARP request Dynamic entries in ARP table deletes automatically after a period of time This period of time is called ARP aging time 158 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 11 Network Protocol Configuration Refer to below procedure for configuring basic ARP address on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To configur
115. slave master slave SMNP switchover RST will occur If there is no slave SMNP then equipment will be reset If SMNP slave has RST button SMNP slave will be reset Using EXCH button SMNP board master slave switches EXCH over master slave function There is no response if this button presses on SMNP slave Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH ZXR10 GER LICs Chapter 3 Structure and Principles Line Interface Cards LIC ZXR10 GER has external interfaces which are called Line Interface Cards LIC ZXR10 GER contains high speed network interfaces that have different interface services with different rates ZXR10 GER LICs are shown in Table 16 Card ID RE 01A3 SFP RE 01CP3 SFP RE 01GP48 SO2KLC RE 01GP48 S15KLC RE 01P48 SO2KLC RE 01P48 S15KLC RE 02CE3 75 RE 02GE RE 02GE E100RJ RE 02GE GBIC RE 02P12 SFP RE 04P3 SFP RE 08FE E100RJ RE O8FE SFP RE 16FE RJDB44 RE 16CE1 75DB44 RE 16FE RJDB44 TABLE 16 LINE INTERFACE CARDS Description 1 port ATM3 interface SFP optical module 1 port channelized POS3 SFP optical module 1 port POS48 single channel single mode two kilometers 1 port POS48 single channel single mode 15 kilometers 1 port POS48 multi channel single mode two kilometers 1 port POS48 multi channel single mode 15 kilometers 2 port channelized non channelized E3 interface CC 4 interface 2 port GE electrical optic
116. to be set up on a directly connected interface of two routers To set up an EBGP neighbor on a non directly connected interface multihop technique needs to be used to complete EBGP multi hop configuration 234 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration Appropriate IGP or static route is also required to configure in order to reach non directly connected interfaces Refer to below procedure for multi hop configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed BGP is running on a network 1 To set up an EBGP neighbor on a non directly connected interface the multihop command needs to be used to complete EBGP multi hop configuration in BGP route mode This is shown in Table 287 TABLE 287 MULTIHOP COMMAND Command Format Command Command Mode Function neighbor lt ip address gt ebgp BGP Route eS EBGP multihop ttl lt value gt Result This sets EBGP multi hop for non directly connected interface END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 97 router R1 needs to set up adjacency on a non directly connected interface with the IP address of 180 225 11 1 of R2 In this case the multihop command needs to be used FIGURE 97 BGP MULTIHOP CONFIGURATION Configuration of R1 ZXR10 Ri config zrouter bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 180 225 11 1 remote as 300 ZXR10 Ri config
117. uU m E2 config router i d config tinterface fei 3 2 10 ip vrf forwarding testl encapsulation dotlq 10 ip address 10 10 10 1 255 255 255 0 ip ldp discovery transport address ospf 1 network 10 0 0 0 0 2595 255 255 area ospf 2 vrf testl network 10 10 10 1 0 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 redistribute bgp int bgp 100 neighbor 10 10 1 1 remote as 100 10 10 1 1 neighbor update source address family ipv4 vrf testl n ra 2 config rout F FU f fredistribute ospf_int metric 10 redistribute connected E r a config rou U f E r a config rou E config router E f texit address family address family vpnv4 Ler a config rou f tneighbor 10 10 1 1 activate E Ler a config rout E config mpls ip 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 m config if mpls f texit address family ldp router id loopback1 force Configuration of CE2 E2 config interfa E2 config 1f tip a E2 config 1f tip o E2 config tinterfa E2 config 1f tenca E2 config 1f tip a E2 config router ce Loopbackl1 ddress 200 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 spf network point to point ce FastEthernet0 0 10 psulation dot1Q 10 ddress 10 10 10 2 255 255 255 0 ospf 1 E2 config router E2 config router H cm 1 0004 001 8 E2 config router log adjacency changes network 10 10 10 2 0 0 0 0 area O0 network 200 1
118. will close adj ldp Closing ldp conn 10 10 12 1 1025 lt gt 10 10 2 2 646 ldp Opening ldp conn 10 10 12 1 lt gt 10 10 2 2 ldp Opening ldp conn 10 10 12 1 lt gt 10 10 2 2 ldp ldp conn closed 10 10 12 1 1026 lt gt 10 10 2 2 646 ldp ldp conn closed 10 10 12 1 1027 lt gt 10 10 2 2 646 ldp Opening ldp conn 10 10 12 1 lt gt 10 10 2 2 ldp ldp conn is up 10 10 12 1 1028 lt gt 10 10 2 2 646 ZXR10 END OF STEPS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION I ntroduction Contents I ntroduction Common Backbone Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration Overview This chapter describes the basic concepts of L3 MPLS VPN and the configuration and troubleshooting of MPLS VPN on ZTE ZXR10 GER router This chapter covers the following contents TABLE 334 ToPics IN CHAPTER 20 Topic Page No MPLS VPN Overview 287 Advantages of MPLS in IP based Network 288 Related Terms 289 VPN IPv4 Address and Route Distinguisher RD 289 Operational Principles of MPLS VPN 290 MPLS VPN Configuration 292 MPLS VPN Configuration Example 295 MPLS VPN Maintenance and Diagnosis 299 MPLS VPN Overview MPLS VPN is an MPLS based IP VPN which is a routing method of applying the MPLS technology to networking routing and switching equipment to simplify core routers MPLS VPN uses the label switching combined with traditional routing technologies to implement IP based VPN MPLS VPN can be used to const
119. zxr10 zar flash img zxr10 zar Starting copying file file copying successful ZXR10 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 75 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Result This copies new image file in flash 11 Check whether the new image file exists in FLASH using command show version in Exec mode If file does not exist this indicates a copy failure I mportant If file does not exist this indicates a copy failure TABLE 66 SHOW VERSION COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode show Exec This indicates software version of version flash and new image file present in directory Result This indicates new image file present in directory 12 Reboot ZXR10 GER based on method mentioned in Step 8 change boot mode to Boot from the flash In this case Boot path will change to flash img zxr10 zar automatically Note Boot mode can also be changed to Boot from the FLASH by using the command nvram imgfile location local in the global configuration mode 13 Under ZXR10 Boot enter O and press ENTER system boots with new image from FLASH 14 After normal boot view the image version under running and confirm whether the upgrading is successful Version Upgrade in Case of Normal System Purpose Refer to below procedure for version upgrading in case of normal system Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been
120. 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Configuration of R2 ZX ZX ZX ZX ZX ZX ZX R10_ R10_ R10_ R10_ R10_ R10_ R10_ R2 config mpls ip R2 config interface Loopbackl R2 config if ip address 10 10 2 2 255 255 255 255 R2 config interface fei 1 5 R2 config if fip address 10 10 12 2 255 255 255 0 R2 config if mpls ip R2 config interface fei 1 6 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 281 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Purpose Prerequisite Steps ZXR10 R2 config if fip address 10 10 23 2 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R2 config if mpls ip ZXR10_R2 config mpls ldp router id loopbackl ZXR10_R2 config router ospf 1 ZXR10_R2 config router network 10 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Configuration of R3 ZXR10_R3 config mpls ip ZXR10_R3 config interface Loopbackl ZXR10 R3 config if fip address 10 10 3 3 255 255 255 255 ZXR10_R3 config interface fei 3 1 ZXR10 R3 config if fip address 10 10 23 3 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R3 config 1if impls ip ZXR10_R3 config mpls ldp router id loopbackl ZXR10_R3 config router ospf 1 ZXR10_R3 config router network 10 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 In the above configuration the OSPF dynamic routing protocol is run to advertise the Route id of each LSR that is the route of the loopback interface address Note Use of loopback interface address as router ID facilitates the stability of LDP i
121. 0 0 0 255 255 Route Filtering by Means of NLRI To restrict a router from obtaining or advertising routing information route updates from or to a special neighbor device can be filtered A filter contains an update list from or to a neighbor router Refer to below procedure for route filtering by means of NLRI configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER 1 2 Router Command Line Interface has been accessed BGP is running on a network To designate neighbor for an input or output route map use neighbor lt ip address gt route map lt string gt in out command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 290 TABLE 290 NEIGHBOR ROUTE MAP COMMAND Command Format command Command Function Mode neighbor lt ip address gt route map lt string gt in out This configures the filtering BGP Route of routes advertised from or to the neighbor Result This sets route filtration coming from or to the neighbor To prevent specific network advertising into BGP for certain Autonomous system use access list command in global config mode as shown in Table 291 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 237 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I TABLE 291 ACCESS LIST COMMAND Command Format Command Mode access list lt number gt deny permit N TUM Global ip address ip address network mask ZTE Command Function This prevents certain network prefix for advertising
122. 0 2 config control framing unframe ZXR10 2 config interface cel 7 1 1 ZXR10 2 config if zz multilink group multi 7 1 ZXR10 2 config controller ce1 7 2 ZXR10 2 config control framing unframe ZXR10 2 config interface cel 7 2 1 ZXR10 2 config if zz multilink group multi 7 1 ZXR10 2 config controller ce1 7 8 ZXR10 2 config control framing unframe ZXR10 2 config interface cel 7 8 1 ZXR10 2 config if zz multilink group multi 7 1 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 109 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Background Purpose Prerequisite Steps Note When one device is interconnected with multiple routers through multilink El interfaces corresponding to multilink interfaces of routers must have different identifiers Configuring CPOS Interface CPOS stands for channelized POS interface By fully utilizing SDH features it can divide bandwidth in a refined way lower the quantity requirement for low speed physical ports of routers in networking and improve the convergence ability of low speed ports and private line access ability of routers Refer to below procedure for configuring CPOS on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enter into the CPOS channel configuration mode use controller command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 123 TABLE 123 CONTROLLER COMMAND Command Comman
123. 0 5 Maximum power consumption W 300W Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 41 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Technical Parameters Voltage waveform distortion lt 5 GPWA panel has three power supply indicators whose functions are given in Table 45 TABLE 45 FUNCTIONS OF GPWA PANEL INDICATORS Indicators Function Description Indicates the working condition of 3 3V output of 3 3V indicator power supply board It is constantly on in the case green of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage Indicates the working condition of 2 5V output of 2 5V indicator power supply board It is constantly on in the case green of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage Indicates the working condition of 48V output of 48V indicator power supply board It is constantly on in the case green of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage GPWD GPWD panel is shown in Figure 31 FiGURE 31 GPWD PANEL PWR DC 48VGND 48V PE 2 5V q y CAUTION AM SS C THE POWER CABLE E 33V E 48V MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE TAKING OUT THIS POWER UNIT GPWD technical parameters are given below Technical Parameters Rated voltage 48V Allowed voltage range 57V 40V Input curren
124. 1 AddressAge min Hardware Addr Interface 10 1 1 1 000a 010c e2c6 fei 1 1 10 1 100 100 18 00b0 d08f 820a fei_1 1 ZXR10 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 1 2 Static Route Configuration I ntroduction Contents User Defined Routes Implementation Overview The chapter covers static route and its configuration covering special summary static route and default route This chapter covers following topics TABLE 201 ToPics IN CHAPTER 12 Topic Page No Background 161 Static Route Summary 164 Default Route 165 Background Static routes are user defined routes that cause packets moving between a source and a destination to take a specified path They are useful for specifying a gateway of last resort to which all unroutable packets will be sent Static route unlike a dynamic route does not set up the routing table based on routing algorithm When configuring a dynamic route routing information of entire Internet must be sent to a router such that the router is hard to hold the load In this case static routes can be used to solve the problem However in a routing environment where there are multiple routers and multiple paths this is very complicated to configure static routes Router operating system ROS remembers static routes until to remove them explicitly However this can override static routes with dynamic routing information through prudent assignment of
125. 1 ZXR10 192 168 1 1 30 ZXR10 routingswitch Configuration of ZXR10 GER ZXR10 config interface smartgroup1 ZXR10 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 config interface fei_8 1 ZXR10 config if smartgroup 1 mode on ZXR10 config interface fei 8 2 ZXR10 config if smartgroup 1 mode on Configuration of ZXR10 routing switch T64C config smarttrunk create st 1 protocol no protocol T64C config smarttrunk add ports et 3 1 2 to st 1 T64C config Z interface create ip to zxr10 address netmask 192 168 1 2 30 port st 1 Configuring Multilink To increase bandwidth multiple E1 physical links can be bound into a logical link and logical interface generated in this way is called multilink interface In ZXR10 GER a multilink interface can be bound with a maximum of sixteen E1 interfaces in same slot This procedure describes how to do multilink on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enter into configuration mode use config terminal command in privilged mode as shown in Table 118 TABLE 118 CoNFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To create multilink interface and to enter into it use interface interface number command in global configuration as shown in Table 119 Confidential and Proprietary Informa
126. 1 ip address ip pim sm terface fei 1 2 ip address ip pim sm ip pim bsr border terface fei 1 3 ip address ip pim sm I0 Rl config fsrouter ospf 1 ter network 0 0 multicast routing LO_R1 config router pimsm LO_R1 config router rp candidate ZXR10_R1 config router bsr candidate 10 10 ZXR1O_R1 config ip source fei_1 2 ZXR1LO_R1 config ip source fei_1 3 msdp peer 10 10 20 msdp peer 10 10 30 L0 1 14 1 10 10 10 1 10 10 20 1 10 10 30 1 10 0 0 0 loopbackl loopbackl 2 connect 2 connect R2 configuration ZXR10_R2 config in ZXR10 R2 config if 255 255 255 255 ZXR10_R2 config in ZXR10 R2 config if 255 2555u29595 0 ZXR10 R2 config if ZXR10_R2 config in ZXR10 R2 config if 2554 2554 255 0 ZXR10 R2 config if terface loopbackl ip address terface fei 1 1 ip address ip pim sm terface fei 1 2 ip address ip pim sm L0 L 1 2 10 10 20 2 10 10 40 1 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 361 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTE ZX ZX 25 ZX ZX ZX 0 ZX ZX ZX pr ZX 10 ZX ZX ZX ZX source fei 1 1 source fei 1 2 R10_R2 config in R10 R2 config if 94255125540 R10 R2 config if R1 R10 R2 config rou 0 0 255 area 0 0 R10_R2 config ip R 1 R 1 iority 20 20 R10 R2 config R
127. 1 1 0 0 0 0 area O Routing table of CE2 learned from CE2 298 Where two OSPF routes are VPN routes Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps CI Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration E24sh ip route Gateway of last resort is not set 100 0 0 0 24 is subnetted 1 subnets E2 100 1 1 0 110 1 via 10 10 10 1 00 07 21 FastEthernet0 0 10 200 1 1 0 24 is directly connected Loopbackl 10 0 0 0 24 is subnetted 2 subnets E2 10 1 1 0 110 1 via 10 10 10 1 00 07 21 FastEthernet0 0 10 C 10 10 10 0 is directly connected FastEthernet0 0 10 e E2 MPLS VPN Maintenance and Diagnosis Refer to below procedure for MPLS VPN maintenance and diagnosis on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To check network connectivity use ping vrf lt vrf name gt lt ip address gt command in privileged mode as shown in Table 341 TABLE 341 PING VRF COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ping vrf This checks the VPN network lt vrf name gt Privileged ye connectivity lt ip address gt Result This checks the VPN network connectivity In the following example to ping the address of CE1 VRF must be designated PEl ping vrf testl 10 1 1 2 sending 5 100 byte ICMP echos to 10 1 1 2 timeout is 2 seconds Success rate is 100 percent 5 5 round trip min avg
128. 1 2 ZXR10_R3 config if ip address 10 0 2 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R3 config if exit ZXR10 R3 config zrouter ospf 1 ZXR10_R3 config router network 10 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 area 0 0 0 1 ZXR10_R3 config router network 10 0 2 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 2 ZXR10_R3 config router area 1 authentication message digest For additional information on OSPF additional configurations please refer to below procedures Configuring OSPF Area Parameters and NSSA This below procedure describes how to configure OSPF area parameters and NSSA a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed OSPF is running on a network as described in above basic OSPF configuration Note There are three types of areas configurations gt Stub area 196 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration gt Totally stubby area gt Not so stubby area To enable authentication in OSPF routing process use area lt area id gt authentication message digest command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 241 TABLE 241 AREA AUTHENTICATION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode area lt area id gt authentication OSPF Route message digest This enables authentication in an OSPF area Result This enables authentication in the OSPF area For configuring OSPF stubby area use area lt area id gt stub default cost lt cost gt command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 242 TABLE 2
129. 10 1 ZXR10 1 config controller ce1 1 2 ZXR10 1 config control channel group 1 timeslots 1 10 ZXR10 1 config control exit ZXR10 1 config interface e1_1 2 1 ZXR10 1 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 Configuration of ZXR10 2 ZXR10 2 config controller ce1_1 2 ZXR10 2 config control channel group 1 timeslots 1 10 ZXR10 2 config control exit ZXR10 2 config interface e1_1 2 1 ZXR10 2 config if ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 Example Non Channelized Configuration As shown in Figure 58 E1 interface of ZTE ZXR10 GER 1 is interconnected with E1 interface of another ZTE ZXR10 GER 2 Non channelized configuration is used FIGURE 58 NON CHANNELIZED CONFIGURATION 192 168 1 2 30 HO ELM E rii a ZXR10 1 192 168 1 1 30 ZXR10 2 Configuration of ZTE ZXR10 GER 1 ZXR10 1 config controller ce1_1 1 ZXR10 1 config control framing unframe ZXR10 1 config control exit ZXR10 1 config interface e1_1 1 1 ZXR10 1 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 Note When an E1 interface is set to non channelized mode its interface name is e1_slot ID port ID 1 such as e1_1 1 1 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Background Channelized Mode Non Channelized Mode Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 6 Interface Configuration Configuration of ZTE ZXR10 GER 2 ZXR10 2 config controller e1 e1_1 1 ZXR10 2 config
130. 10 R2 config R10 R2 config R10 R2 config terface fei 1 3 ip address LO_R2 config router ospf 1 ter network 0 0 multicast routing lLO_R2 config frouter pimsm lO_R2 config router rp candidate R10_R2 config router bsr candidate access list 10 permit any ip msdp peer 10 10 20 1 connect ip msdp peer 10 10 40 2 connect ip msdp default peer 10 10 20 1 ip igmp access group 10 104 104 5041 1 0 0 01 0 loopbackl loopbackl R3 configuration ZX ZX 25 ZX ZX 25 ZX ZX ZX 25 ZX ZX ZX ZX 0 ZX ZX ZX pr ZX 10 ZX R10_R3 config in R10 R3 config if S 24554255 255 R10_R3 config in R10 R3 config if 9425542955 R10 R3 config if R10_R3 config in R10 R3 config if DEBO za 5 0 R10 R3 config if R10 R3 config if R 1 R10 R3 config rou 0 R10_R3 config ip R 1 R 1 iority 30 30 source fei 1 2 terface loopbackl ip address terface fei 1 1 ip address ip pim sm terface fei 1 2 address ip ip pim sm ip pim bsr border LO_R3 config router ospf 1 ter network 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 multicast routing LO_R3 config router pimsm L0 R3 config router s rp candidate R10 R3 config router dbsr candidate R10 R3 config fip msdp peer 10 10 40 1 connect U9 12 1 3 131053 a 10 10 40 2 10 0 0 Q0 loopbackl loopbackl 362 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE
131. 10_R1 config router neighbor 182 17 20 1 remote as 200 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 182 17 20 1 route map MAP1 out ZXR10_R1 config route map MAP1 permit 10 ZXR10_Ri config route map match as path 1 ZXR10_Ri config ip as path access list 1 permit In the above configuration the operation is based on the AS path access list so that R1 only advertises network originated on AS100 to AS200 Thus the network 192 18 10 0 24 is filtered Local Preference Attribute The attribute value of local preference is used to determine routes among IBGP peers inside an AS When two IBGP routers in an AS simultaneously learn routes to the same destination externally the routers will compare the attribute values of the local preference A route with a higher value takes the precedence By default the attribute value of the local preference is 100 Refer to below procedure for local preference attribute configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a BGP is running on a network 1 To configure local preference attribute use bgp default local preference lt value gt command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 293 TABLE 293 BGP DEFAULT LOCAL PREFERENCE Command Format Command Command Function Mode bgp default local This allows to compare preference Route the route MEDs of the lt value gt neighbors in different AS Result This allows to compare the route MEDs of the neighbors in differen
132. 10_Ri config route map match ip address 1 ZXR10_Ri config route map set community no export ZXR10_Ri config route map setcommunity permit 20 ZXR10_Ri config access list 1 permit 192 166 1 0 0 0 0 255 BGP Synchronization Refer to below procedure for BGP synchronization configuration O a 1 n ZTE ZXR10 GER Refer Router Command Line Interface has been accessed BGP is running on a network For BGP synchronization use synchronization command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 296 TABLE 296 SYNCHRONIZATION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This enables synchronization Route synchronization between BGP and IGP Result This enables synchronization between BGP and IGP As shown in Figure 101 in AS100 R1 and R2 run IBGP and R5 is not a BGP router Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 245 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDR Route Redistribution Transitional AS FIGURE 101 BGP SYNCHORONIZATION ASI00 1 1 1 1 30 170 10 0 0 24 170 10 0 0 24 AS300 AS400 Y 2 2 2 1 30 1 1 1 2 30 j 2e ae 170 10 0 0 24R3 j 1 R4 R2 learns routes to destination 170 10 0 0 by means of IBGP and the next hop is 2 2 2 1 It can be seen from the above figure that for R2 to reach 170 10 0 0 the actual next hop is R5 However R5 does not have a route to 170 10 0 0 so it will drop the packet In this case if R2
133. 13 RIP Configuration RIP Timers RIP uses numerous timers to regulate its performance These include a routing update timer a route timeout timer and a route flush timer The routing update timer clocks the interval between periodic routing updates This is done to help prevent congestion which could result from all routers simultaneously attempting to update their neighbors Each routing table entry has a route timeout timer associated with it When the route timeout timer expires the route is marked invalid but is retained in table until the route flush timer expires RIP Packet Format Figure 83 illustrates the IP RIP packet format FIGURE 83 IP RIP PACKET 1 octet 4 octet command AF IP address field field Following descriptions summarize the IP RIP packet format fields illustrated in Figure 83 Command indicates whether the packet is a request or a response The request asks that a router send all or part of its routing table The response can be an unsolicited regular routing update or a reply to a request Responses contain routing table entries Multiple RIP packets are used to convey information from large routing tables Version number specifies the RIP version used This field can signal different potentially incompatible versions Zero this field is not actually used by RFC 1058 RIP it was added solely to provide backward compatibility with pre standard varieties of RIP Its name
134. 2 3 RJ45 connector 100Base T Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 17 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Port Type 100 1000Bas e T Specifications Category 3 4 and 5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP Maximum transmission distance 185m In compliance with IEEE 802 3 RJ45 connector Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP Maximum transmission distance 100 m Note When the interface is connected with a host straight through network cable is used when it is connected with a hub switch or router a crossover cable is used USB Interface ZXR10 GERO2 04 has a USB interface port for flash transferring ZXR10 GERO8 has no USB interface Indicators SMP panel has multiple indicators whose functions are listed in Table 9 TABLE 9 SMP PANEL INDICATORS Indicators PWR indicator green RUN indicator green ALM indicator red NP FAN HOT MST Dual 8 digitron Function Description Power indicator When it is on it indicates that the equipment has been powered on and the power supply normally Running indicator When it is on it indicates that the system runs normally Alarm indicator Indicates a system fault when it is on This indicates working status of the network processor This is constantly on when the processor is working normally This flashes if the processor fails This is off if the processor initia
135. 2 config if ip address 10 0 0 2 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 R2 config if exit ZXR10_R2 config router ospf 1 ZXR10 R2 config router network 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 ZXR10 R2 config router network 10 0 2 0 0 0 0 3 area 0 0 0 2 ZXR10_R2 config router area 0 0 0 2 stub R3 is a router working in backbone area O and is externally connected to another AS network through BGP As an egress router of the entire AS R3 advertises a default route to the entire OSPF by means of manual configuration Configuration of R3 ZXR10_R3 config interface fei_1 1 ZXR10_R3 config if ip address 10 0 0 3 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 R3 config if exit ZXR10_R3 config interface fei 1 2 ZXR10 R3 config if zip address 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 R3 config if exit ZXR10_R3 config router ospf 1 ZXR10 R3 config router network 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 ZXR10 R3 config router notify default route always R4 is an ASBR in NSSA area 0 0 0 1 R4 also runs the RIP at the same time when it runs the OSPF protocol The RIP protocol can be injected into the OSPF protocol by means of route redistribution Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 199 i ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Related Information Introduction Stub Area Configuration Purpose Prerequisites Configuration of R4 ZXR10_R4 config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10_R4 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 2
136. 217 oi MAMANS 177 BUE ansiosa 101 102 PVCS anaiona 100 101 102 QoS 273 274 275 276 288 RARP AMEN 156 RD 287 289 290 292 300 Related Terms 287 289 305 311 RELEASE cene bes kc e 82 REO vns data 134 Resource Reservation Protocol a 320 321 322 RFC96 97 133 169 171 172 RECT31 iii 186 RECITAL sicario 228 RFC2328 coercere 186 RFC2547bis 289 290 RIP 162 166 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 185 186 188 200 207 231 291 294 RIP Sais 172 RIPV Loria 170 179 RIPv2 169 170 172 179 RIPV2 S i csessssss osa vlde kann 172 ROM sans drea 82 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 389 390 ROS iveco 82 161 162 FE MM RR RE 247 248 RR Sci es 248 RSVP I 274 289 RT100 292 Riiie tad e 302 SAD rima jalon 100 SDH 5 tnde exin 95 96 99 SmartGroup 84 105 SMDS ssia iussi s aaa ins 177 SNAP eoe ira co ena aa veu 100 SNPs onsin 212 220 221 SNPS sess E aa 212 SOFTWARE retos cias 82 Software Version Upgrading 72 SONET a cis caninas 95 96 99 SPF e 186 211 212 STM iaa diria 97 STS iia dada laa 96 97 TO AC sent aaa 107 TblVets ira 296 TOPs 100 228 277 284 Uuno 95 Technical Features and Parameters 131 142 161 169 185 211 227 TEXT A ada 80 TFTP 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 Time To Live esee 268 TOS ae aaa o 276 Tr
137. 255 255 0 ZXR10_R2 config interface serial_5 2 3 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 10 1 3 2 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R2 config interface serial_5 2 17 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 10 1 17 2 255 255 255 0 Configuring Packet over Sonet Synchronous Optical Network Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SONET SDH has emerged as significant technologies for building large scale high speed Internet Protocol IP based networks Even though SONET SDH is frequently labeled as Old World because this is a time division multiplexing TDM technology optimized for voice traffic its capability to provide high bandwidth capacity for transporting data is the primary reason for ubiquitous use in the Internet and large enterprise data networks Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 95 96 Network Backbone I nfrastructure Sonet SDH Rates ZTE POS Pos Framing RFC2615 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Packet over SONET PoS technology which allows efficient transport of data over SONET SDH has certainly been a major player in accommodating explosive growth on Internet PoS provides a flexible solution to well known applications that includes network backbone infrastructures and data aggregation or distribution on network edge and in metropolitan area Router PoS interfaces are frequently connected to Add Drop Multiplexers ADMs terminating point to point SONET SDH links
138. 321 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA 2 To set interface for support RSVP signaling use mpls traffic eng tunnels in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 367 TABLE 367 MPLS TRAFFIC INTERFACE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode mpls traffic interface onti This enables MPLS TE on an eng 9 interface tunnels Result This configures MPLS TE signaling on an interface Note RSVP is supported on GER Ethernet and Pos interfaces 3 To configure the maximum available bandwidth of traffic engineering and LSP of an interface use ip rsvp bandwidth max bandwidth lt flow bandwidth gt in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 368 TABLE 368 IP RSVP COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function ip rsvp bandwidth max bandwidth flow bandwidth This sets the parameter for Interface config maximum available bandwidth Result This configures the available bandwidth for traffic engineering of an interface 4 To configure the IGP to support TE following commands are used i To define the Router of the TE use mpls traffic eng router id lt interface name gt command in OSPF configuration as shown in Table 369 ii To configure TE enabled areas use mpls traffic eng area lt area id gt command in OSPF config mode as shown in Table 369 iii To enable opaque feature of the OSPF use command capability opaq
139. 4 ZXR10 config vlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 15 egress fei 1 3 25 ZXR10 config vlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 16 egress fei 1 3 26 ZXR10 config vlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 17 egress fei 1 3 27 ZXR10 config vlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 18 egress fei 1 3 28 ZXR10 config tvlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 19 egress fei 1 3 29 ZXR10 config interface fei 1 4 ZXR10 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 config finterface fei 1 2 30 ZXR10 con ZXR10 con fig subif fig subif LIDAD DL ZXR10 con ZXR10 con fig tinter fig subif encapsulation dotiq 30 L9 1 1 1 ip address face fei 1 2 31 encapsulation dotiq 31 ZXR10 config subif ip address 10 1 1 65 290942929 29590 192 Note Interface forwarding attributes cover normal mix and vlan switch Normal In this mode packets are forwarded in the mode of searching routes based on the normal IP address mix In this mode search the vlan switch forwarding table first If there is a matched vlan switch table packets are forwarded in the vlan switch transparent transmission mode Otherwise packets are forwarded by searching routes based on the normal IP address vlan switch In this mode search the vlan switch forwarding table first If there is a matched vlan switch table packets are forwarded in the vlan switch transparent transmission mode Otherwise packets are discarded V Switch Maintenance and Diagnosis Refer
140. 40 Table 171 Show PPP Command ceececeeeeee eects eeeeeeeaes 141 Table 172 Interface Config Command sseusssssl 143 Table 173 Encapsulation Frame Relay Command 143 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 377 378 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Table 174 Ip Address Command esee 143 Table 175 Ip Address Command seen 143 Table 176 Frame Relay Lmi Type eese 144 Table 177 Frame Relay Lmi Type Command 144 Table 178 Show Frame Relay Command 145 Table 179 Show Frame Relay Pvc Command 145 Table 180 Topics In Chapter 10 eee 147 Table 181 Interface Configuration Command 148 Table 182 Encapsulation Dot1q Command 148 Table 183 Ip Address Command eeeeeeeenee 149 Table 184 Vlan Forwarding Ingress Command 149 Table 185 Ip Forwarding Mode 0ooccoccccconcnnnnnnnccnnnnncnnnnnanes 149 Table 186 Ppp Bcp Enable Command essse 149 Table 187 Interface Command esee 152 Table 188 Bridge Enable Command eee 152 Table 189 Ip Forwarding Mode Command 152 Table 190 Atm Pvc Command seeseeseeeeee 152 Table 191 Encapsulatopn
141. 42 Radius Server Account Configurations 53 Figure 43 Radius Server System Configuration 53 Figure 44 SSH Client Login Configuration sssss 55 Figure 45 SSH Client Login Configuration 2 56 Figure 46 SSH Login Interface 1 sees mee 56 Figure 47 SSH Login Interface 2 ssseseee nme 57 Figure 48 Tftp Server Selection Window eeene 68 Figure 49 Windows Firewall Alert ceseeennm e 69 Figure 50 Main Tftp Window cssesssnm HH 69 Figure 51 Tftp Root Directory csse 70 Figure 52 Tftp Security Window ceeeeen mmn 70 Figure 53 Advanced Security Window seseeesesesee 71 Figure 54 Auto Close Window ssesesmmHII 71 Figure 55 Log Window sssssss HH 72 Figure 56 Ethernet Interface Configuration esee 87 Figure 57 Channelized El Configuration coomoccocccnnnnnnncnnnnn ns 90 Figure 58 Non Channelized Configuration esee 90 Figure 59 ES Exambple rere err ex en c x va EE a xa 94 Figure 60 Sonet Sdh Rates rissin inrano enn 96 Figure 61 Ppp Frame Format sess 96 Figure 62 Pos Framing Sequence sesseeeeennn 97 Figure 63 Packet Over Sonet Example eee 98 Figure 64 Atm Fixed Length Cells eeeeennnm 99 Figure 65 Atm Configuration Example sess 102
142. 42 STUBBY AREA COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode area lt area id gt stub default OSPF Route cost lt cost gt This defines an area as a stub area Result This defines an area as a stub area For configuring OSPF totally stubby area use area lt area id gt stub no summary default cost lt cost gt command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 243 TABLE 243 TOTALLY STUBBY AREA Command Format Command Command Function Mode area lt area id gt stub no summary This defines an area as a default cost OSPF Route totally stubby area lt cost gt Result This defines an area as a totally stubby area To specify area parameters as needed to configure OSPF NSSA Use area lt area id gt nssa no redistribution default information originate metric metric metric type type no summary command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 244 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 197 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA TABLE 244 NOoT SO STUBBY AREA Command Format Command Mode Command Function area lt area id gt nssa no redistribution default information This defines an originate metric OSPF Route area as a not so lt metric gt metric stubby area type lt type gt no summary Result This defines an area as a NSSA area END OF STEPS Example When a single area network increase to a certain sc
143. 5 ROUTE MAP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This creates a route map route map privileged policy Result This creates a route map policy 2 To implement the route map policy use match set command in the route mapping configuration mode as shown in Table 306 TABLE 306 MATCH SET COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode route isi patch due mapping This implements the route configuration map peliey Result This implements the route map policy 3 To perform policy routing on the data packet that matches the access table use match ip address command in route mapping configuration mode as shown in Table 307 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 259 260 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA TABLE 307 MATCH IP ADDRESS Command Command Command Function Format Mode This performs policy routing on the data packet that matches the access table route mapping configuration match ip address Result This performs policy routing on the data packet that matches the access table 4 To route the data packet to the specified next hop use set ip next hop command in route mapping configuration mode as shown in Table 308 TABLE 308 IP NEXT HOP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode route This enables to route the ip next hop mapping data packet to the specified configuration next hop
144. 55 255 255 0 ZXR10_R4 config if exit ZXR10_R4 config interface fei 1 2 ZXR10_R4 config if ip address 10 0 1 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R4 config if exit ZXR10_R4 config router ospf 1 ZXR10_R4 config router network 10 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 area 0 0 0 1 ZXR10_R4 config router area 0 0 0 1 nssa ZXR10_R4 config router redistribute rip metric 10 R5 is a router working in stub area 0 0 0 2 Configuration of R5 ZXR10_R5 config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10_R5 config if ip address 10 0 2 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R5 config if exit ZXR10_R5 config router ospf 1 ZXR10_R5 config router network 10 0 2 0 0 0 0 3 area 0 0 0 2 ZXR10_R5 config router area 0 0 0 2 stub For additional information on OSPF additional configurations please refer to below procedures Configuring Inter Area Route Aggregation One of the features that have made OSPF so popular is route aggregation Route aggregation can happen among areas or ASs The inter area route aggregation takes place in an ABR while route aggregation among ASs takes place in an ASBR The configuration of a stub area can save the resources of routers in the stub area but it does not provide any help to the backbone network If the allocation of network addresses in an area is consecutive an ABR can be configured to advertise an aggregated route to replace these consecutive independent routes Route aggregation can save the resources in the backbone area implemented by advertising a group of
145. 7 External LSA of NSSA A The operation of OSPF depends upon all routers sharing same common link state database in one area Therefore all LSAs are flooded via this area and processing must be reliable Each router receiving LSAs in a special area will flood LSAs to other interfaces in area LSAs do not have their own packets and they are included in Link state Update LSU packets Several LSAs can be included in same LSU When a router receives an LSU this does not send out the packets simply but separates the packets from LSA and inputs them to its database In addition the router will construct its own LSU and send the updated LSU to the neighbor router s OSPF uses Link State Acknowledgement LSAck to confirm whether each LSA is successfully received by its neighbor An LSAck has header of an acknowledged LSA which provides sufficient information for uniquely identifying an LSA When a router sends an LSA to an interface the LSA will be recorded in the retransmission queue of interface The router will wait for maximum time interval to receive the LSAck of LSA If the router does not receive the LSAck in specified time the router will retransmit the LSA The router can send the original LSU in unicast or multicast mode but the retransmitted LSU is in unicast mode If a non backbone area does not have an ASBR a router only has one path to an AS external network that is through an ABR Thus routers in these areas send LSAs
146. 8 through 64511 are reserved and 64512 through 65534 are used for private ASs similar to private network addresses among IP addresses A session set up between BGP routers in different ASs is called an EBGP session while a session established between BGP routers in the same AS is called an IBGP session BGP runs on a reliable transmission protocol TCP is used as its bottom layer protocol and the TCP port is port 179 Two routers running BGP first set up a TCP connection and then pass packet authentication and exchange all the routing table information After that when the route changes the routers will send a routing update message to all BGP neighbors and then the BGP neighbors will flood the routing information until the entire network receives the routing information When a router sends BGP update messages about the destination network to its peer router the messages contain information about BGP metric called path attribute The path attribute is divided into four independent types Accepted and compulsory attributes The attributes need to appear in route description gt AS path gt Next hop gt Origin Accepted and self determined attributes The attributes do not have to appear in route description gt Local preference gt Atomic aggregate 228 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration Optional an
147. 9 1979 to allow its use in asynchronous environments PPP control procedures use definitions and control field encodings standardized in ISO 4335 1979 and ISO 4335 1979 Addendum 1 1979 PPP frame format appears in Figure 73 132 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Background Chapter 9 Link Protocol Configuration FIGURE 73 Six FIELDS MAKE UP PPP FRAME Field length in bytes 1 1 1 2 Variable 2or4 Flag Address Control Protocol Data FCS Following descriptions summarize PPP frame fields illustrated in Figure 73 a Flag A single byte that indicates the beginning or end of a frame The flag field consists of binary sequence 01111110 Address a single byte that contains binary sequence 1111111 the standard broadcast address PPP does not assign individual station addresses a Control a single byte that contains binary sequence 00000011 which calls for transmission of user data in an unsequenced frame A connectionless link service similar to that of Logical Link Control LLC Type 1 is provided Protocol two bytes that identify protocol encapsulated in information field of frame The most up to date values of protocol field are specified in most recent Assigned Numbers Request for Comments RFC a Data Zero or more bytes that contain datagram for the protocol specified in the protocol field The end of the information field is found by loca
148. 922273 Start ZXR10 TSR MPU Version V1 2 m n Built at Mar 22 2004 11 03 18 Syhchronizing 5 nut rar tr rund OK 74 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 5 System Management FKK KK KK CK SK OK 2K K SK K FK SK CK FK K FK K K K CK FK K K SE K K SE SK K K K K K K K OK OK OK Welcome to ZXR10 T64E KK K 2K 2K 2K 2K K K K K K K 2K K K K K K 2K 2K K 2K K 2K K 2K K K 2K OK K K K K K ZXR10 gt 10 Result System boots with TFTP image For normal boot use show version command as shown in Table 63 TABLE 63 SHOW VERSION COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode show Exec This indicates software version of version flash and new image file present in directory Result This indicates new image file present in directory Use delete command in Exec mode to delete old image file zxr10 zar under the IMG directory in the flash only if space is not sufficient otherwise just change its name The command is shown in Table 64 TABLE 64 DELETE COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode delete Exec This deletes file present in flash Result This deletes old image file Copy new image file in background TFTP Server into IMG directory in FLASH The name of the image file is zxr10 zar Operation of copying the image file to the flash in TFTP mode is shown in Table 65 TABLE 65 CoPY COMMAND WINDOW ZXR10 copy tftp 168 4 168 89
149. ARX Qn IURI Er ex A EN EIQUE EE EN 319 MPLS Engineering Working rere tree a 320 MPLS Basic Configuratloh eire SE rupi en E PR net 321 MPLS TE Maintenance amp Diagnosis eseeen 324 MPLS TE Example rasei outer Rh D ree YER Ue 325 Chapter 24 icti ii a 929 Multicast Routing Configuration 329 OVINA ade ne edle e 329 OVverVIQW ci stesse et eere ieu rtr ue e UR YE FERE NR Y EET EAE 330 Multicast Tree a 331 Multicast Routing Protocol tien xx tte 332 Multicast Common Configurations essen 334 Configuring IGMP Sauna 335 Configuring IGMP Timer eei iion tenent she iaa ce 337 Gonfiguring PIMsSM 5 ae Erreger Ene dr EpE EPI HERE Yn dyes 339 Setting PIM SM Global Parameters sssseeenenee 341 PIM SM Policy Control issi 221 rd ety serre si eter da i end 344 Configuring MSDP avecinan nnne dada 345 MSDP Extended Configuration iicet nbn 346 MSDP Policy Configuration 347 Clearing the MSDP Status casi 348 Static Multicast Configuration ocococcccoconcnnnncnnnnnncnnnernnnrnnnnnns 349 Multicast Maintenance and Diagnosis ococcococoncnnnccnnnnnncnnnennno 350 IGMP Maintenance and Diagnosis sess 351 PIM SM Maintenance and Diagnosis ococccccconnncnnnnnnnonanancnnnnos 352 MSDP Maintenance and Diagnosis sese 356 Static Multicast Maintenance and Diagnosis ssssse 358 Multicast Configuration ExaM
150. CHAPTER 4 Topic Page No Basic Configuration Modes 47 Command Mode 57 Online Help 60 Command History 62 Basic Configuration Modes In order to make it flexible to operate as much as possible multiple configuration modes are available for the ZXR10 GER A user can select a suitable one according to the connected network Figure 35 shows ZXR10 GER configuration Detailed configuration is provided in the following content Topic Page No Configuring COM Port 48 Configuring Telnet Connection 50 Configuring SSH 52 Configuring SSH in Router 54 Configuring SSH Client 55 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 47 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Purpose Prerequisite Steps FIGURE 35 ZXR10 GER CONFIGURATION MODE TFTP FTP Radius server Telnet SSH host SNMP NMS COM interface 6 Hyper terminal ZXR10 Configuring COM Port This topic describes how to configure ZXR10 GER using COM port Command Line Interface CLI is accessed Note CLI is a text based interface that can be accessed through a direct serial connection to device and through telnet connections For serial connection there must be a DB 9 serial cable connected between Computer System and Router Proceed with the following steps 1 Click on Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt HyperTe
151. Chapter 5 System Management TABLE 76 ENABLE SECRET COMMAND WINDOW Command Format Command Command Mode Function PE 0 Global This sets password P Config for privileged mode password password Result This configures privileged password in order to confirm read write action Note In the privileged mode a user can configure operation parameters and also can enter the configuration mode 4 To set Telnet username and password use username username password password command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 77 TABLE 77 TELNET USERNAME COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode username username Global Config This sets Telnet user and password password password Result This configures username and password for telnet session 5 To set system time use clock set current time month day year command in privilged mode as shown in Table 78 TABLE 78 CLOCK SET COMMAND WINDOW Sud us Command Command Function Format Mode clock set lt current time gt month Exec This sets System time day year Result This configures system time END OF STEPS For more information about system management please refer to below procedure Viewing System Information Refer to below procedure for viewing system information of ZTE GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CO
152. Command Command Command Function Format Mode network ip RIP config address This designates a network wildcard table for RIP routing mask Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 173 174 Purpose Prerequisite Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA lt ip address gt refers to format 0 0 0 0 lt wildcard mask gt A wildcard mask is a 32 bit quantity used in conjunction with an Internet address to determine which bits in an Internet address should be ignored when comparing that address with another Internet address This refers to filter out a subnet Result This configures RIP interfaces between certain numbers of a specified network address END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 85 RIP runs on router R1 and router R2 FIGURE 85 BASIC RIP CONFIGURATION Configuration of R1 ZXR10 Ri1 config router rip ZXR10_R1 config router network 10 1 0 0 0 0 255 255 ZXR10 Ri1 config router network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config router rip ZXR10_R2 config router network 10 2 0 0 0 0 255 255 ZXR10_R2 config router network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 RIP Enhanced Configuration This below procedure delivers information about enhanced RIP configuration Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 RIP is running on a network as described in above basic IP configuration To adjust t
153. Dotiq Command 153 Table 192 Ip Address Command seen 153 Table 193 Vlan Forwaring Ingress Command 153 Table 194 Topics In Chapter 7 esee 155 Table 195 Ip Addresses Range seceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 156 Table 196 Config Terminal Command eese 157 Table 197 Interface Config Command sues 157 Table 198 Ip Address Command esee 158 Table 199 Arp Timeout Command eene 159 Table 200 Clear Arp Cache Command esses 159 Table 201 Topics In Chapter 12 seeeeenn 161 Table 202 Default Administrative Distance 162 Table 203 Config Terminal Command eese 163 Table 204 Static Route Command cceeeeee eee teens eee 163 Table 205 Config Terminal Command eese 165 Table 206 Default Route Command sees 166 Table 207 Topics In Chapter 13 een 169 Table 208 Config Terminal Command eese 173 Table 209 Router Rip Command c occoccncconcnnnncanccnncnncnnnnnnnos 173 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Tables Table 210 Network Command Window esses 173 Table 211 Timers Command Window sssessss 175 Table 212 Output Command Window eene 175
154. E OR EREA 158 Chapter 12 ici LOL Static Route Configuration LOL OVERVIEW ain eiue nut O A Rda 161 Background etre tete o 161 Static Route Summary euet rn RE xx RR Re R P EIE ayr Rein 164 Default ROUTES sanina ie eterne ns exp PEOR Ma a DER 165 Chapter Diccionari LOD RIP Configuration ius 109 eiiam I 169 Background ii endet bra ob exte ERU vea D Rae ei idc 169 Routing Updates iier de et exe d ond de onde ed de 170 RIP Routirig Metri 2 2 iie etre Pea phe tex E Rae EA RR A RR 170 RIP Stability Features iii 170 RIP TIITIGES n iere her nr RR CH e Rt XE IRURE 171 RIP Packet Formlat ice ee e inr rir Re Rel ute iae 171 RIPV2 Packet Format aa bara 172 RIP Enhanced Configuration eene nr at nina 174 RIP Maintenance amp Diagnosis cessseeee eee eee eens 180 Chapter dd naaa LBD OSPF Configuration nere iaa LBD OVervieW a iecaekak enn aha nh ax C wi RO D n a 185 Configuring OSPF for Non Broadcast Network 193 Configuring OSPF Authentication srianan ii rans 194 Configuring OSPF Area Parameters and NSSA ss 196 Configuring Inter Area Route Aggregation ssssssse 200 Configuring Route Aggregation upon Route Redistribution 201 Generating Default Route a 202 Configuring Virtual Links cire reiner eire 202 Redistributing Other Routing ProtocolsS cococcoccccncononcnnnnnnnnnos 204 C
155. FTP Root Directory Security Advanced Security Auto Close Log The TFTP Server can be configured to allow receiving of files only transmitting of files only or allow both transmitting and R receiving C Receive only C Transmit only OK Cancel 70 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 5 System Management Result Transmit and Receive files option is selected for both transmitting and receiving files between TFIP server computer system and UAS 6 Click gt Advanced Security tab if further security is required specify the range of permitted ip addresses as shown in Figure 53 By default all ip addresses are permitted FIGURE 53 ADVANCED SECURITY WINDOW gt TFTP Server Configuration TFTP Root Directory Security i Auto Close Log The TFTP Server can be configured to only allow certain IP Address ranges to send receive files Permitted IP Addresses lt all IP addresses gt Delete Selected Range Add new Address Range From 0 0 0 0 To 0 0 0 0 Add Range OK Cancel Help Result All IP addresses range is selected 7 Select Auto Close Tab if TFTP server require to automatically shutdown after a period of inactivity as shown in Figure 54 By default this time sets to Never FIGURE 54 AUTO CLOSE WINDOW a S TFTP Server Configuration TFTP Root Directory Security Advanced Security Auto Close Log The TFTP Server
156. Figure 107 Mpls Vpn Example ccceceeeee testes eee eeeeeeeaes 295 Figure 108 VOWS ServICe iisesc iiec ecex vu ame ruere xy arr xa ook 307 Figure 109 Vpls Service icr tre ei een na 315 Figure 110 Mpls Te Example eese 325 Figure 111 Multicast Configuration Example 359 372 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Chapter Summary sessseeseeeeeenen nennen nennen i Typographical Conventions ssssssssssssrssrrssrrssrssrssrns iv Mouse Operation Conventions seeeeeeneene iv Technical Features And Parameters ssss 6 Topics In Chapter 3 viii RR RR EXER DRE ERR eves 9 Cable Sequence seesssesseee nennen nnn 17 Aux Port ConfiguratiONS coococccnnconconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanos 17 Ethernet Port Specifications 0cocccccconononnnonnronnnonannns 17 Smp Panel Indicators esee 18 Smnp Buttons Functions 0c cece eee eee eee eens 19 Cable SeqUuerce c echa rn Rete Ron x REL 20 Aux Port Configurations ococcocccccnncnnnnncnnnnnnncanenones 21 Ethernet Port Specifications eese 21 Smp Panel Indicators
157. GROUP Maintenance and Diagnosis ssesssse 129 Chapter O Ui LOL Link Protocol Configuration 131 OVERVIEW EET 131 PPP Protocol s ocior esiti Extr ER ant TERR RR er ened 131 imn EP 131 Point to Point Protocol c dtr eder terere eus Hed 132 PPP Authentication Protocols oooocococcncnccnnnnnccnnnncnnnnrnnnnnnannns 133 Password Authentication Protocols PAP sssseessss 134 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP 136 Multilink Point to Point Protocol MPPP sssseseennnnn 139 FR Protocol er LP 141 FR OVErVIEW 5 22 cane duse a REM NE ERE ER MRNA NUS RE 142 Configuring FR Ie aurei ER e exa a ERR ER ERI 142 FR Maintenance and Diagnosis sess 144 Chapter 10 inunda LAT Bridge ConfiguratiON coomcooroonrenncnanonnnnancnnnoannonnenncnannnas 147 POS Interface Bridge rusticas iria 147 POS Bridge OVGerVIeW i rx bred per erp k regret na E 147 configuring POS Bridge 5 recede ea rn rere ER EH 148 Configuring POS BCP Bridge 1 erret tein 149 ATM Interface Bridges e eire Hee PL vr Re Rv 151 ATM Interface Bridge career 151 configuring ATM Bridge iiir e e io 152 Chapter Llica ao D Network Protocol Configuration 155 le Js MEL rm 155 IP AddEess aces T O caes D e ERES oce A rU E RE aO EAE 155 Configuring ARP cisne c oda vk di awe rio Rn a ERRAR
158. IS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Example Chapter 15 IS IS Configuration 5 To designate the interface on which IS IS runs use command ip router isis in interface config mode as shown in Table 264 TABLE 264 IP ROUTER IS IS COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Function Command Format Mode ip router isis interface This enables IS IS protocol config on an interface Result This configures running of IS IS protocol on an interface END OF STEPS Before IS IS configuration analyze the entire network Please determine network topology whether network needs to be divided into multiple areas and whether multiple routing protocols run on the network according to network scale A single area network is used to describe basic IS IS configuration in following as shown in Figure 92 FIGURE 92 IS IS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 192 168 2 1 24 192 168 2 2 24 B fei 2 4 fei 1 4 fei 1 3 R2 192 168 1 1 24 Area 1 192 168 6 1 24 In the above figure routers R1 and R2 make up area 1 running the IS IS protocol The detailed IS IS configuration is displayed as follows Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config router isis ZXR10_Ri config router area 01 ZXR10_Ri config router system id 00D0 D0C7 53E0 ZXR10 Ri1 config router exit ZXR10 Ri config interface fei 2 4 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 192 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_Ri config if ip router isis ZXR10_Ri config inte
159. IT INTERVAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip ospf This designates the interval recransmit OSPF Interface for an interface to retransmit interval LSA lt seconds gt Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 191 192 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Result This specifies the number of seconds between link state advertisement LSA retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF interface For sending LSA update packet to on an OSPF interface use ip ospf transmit delay lt seconds gt command in OSPF interface mode as shown in Table 234 TABLE 234 IP OSPF TRANSMIT DELAY Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip ospf OSPF This designates delay for transmit delay laterfacs an interface to transmit a seconds link state update packet Result This sets estimated number of seconds required to send a link state update packet on an OSPF interface For OSPF designated router in a network use ip ospf priority seconds command in OSPF interface mode as shown in Table 235 TABLE 235 IP OsPr PRIORITY Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip ospf priority OSPF Interface This configures interface number priority Result This sets priority to help determine the OSPF designated router for a network For OSPF device that must wait for hello packet of other router use ip ospf dead interval seconds command in
160. Indicators Definition Functions Panel Interfaces Indicators On the E 08FE SFP card panel each port corresponds to one L indicator and one D indicator Their functions are given in Table 38 TABLE 38 RE 08FE SFP CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description Interface data indicator It is constantly on in the D per port case of data sending and receiving and it is off in the case of no data sending or receiving Link indicator It is constantly on in the case of L per port successful PHY link setup and it is off in the case of PHY link setup failure RE 16CE1 120DB44 It is a 16 port channelized El interface board that provides 16 El interfaces in compliance with ITU T G 703 and G 704 standards Each port supports the sending and receiving functions The receiving end implements the function of data receiving framing and HDLC link control The sending end is to organize the data into HDB3 codes and send them to lines Figure 26 shows RE 16CE1 120DB44 card FIGURE 26 RE 16CE1 120DB44 CARD Table 39 shows the interface features of RE 16CE1 120DB44 card TABLE 39 RE 16CE1 120DB44 CARD INTERFACE FEATURES Port Type Description In compliance with ITU G 703 and G 704 Supporting G 704 framing Adopting 1209 balanceable twisted pair cable Adopting line code of HDB3 A channelized Eicontroller has 31 valid timeslots Channelized E1 On RE 16CE1 120DB44 card each interface has one c
161. LE 226 DEBUG IP RIP COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode debug ip rip Exec This traces the basic packet sending receiving process of RIP Result This traces RIP sending receiving packet To Traces the change process of the RIP routing table use debug ip rip database command in Exec mode as shown in Table 227 TABLE 227 DEBUG IP RIP DATABASE COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode debug ip rip Exec Traces the change process database of the RIP routing table Result This traces the change process of the RIP routing table Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 181 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA ZXR10 debug ip rip RIP protocol debugging is on ZXR1O 11 01 28 RIP building update entries 130 1 0 0 16 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag O 130 177 0 0 0 9 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag O 1 1 0 24 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 0 193 1 168 0 24 via 0 1 2 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 197 1 0 0 16 via 0 0 199 2 0 0 16 via 0 0 202 119 8 0 24 via 0 0 metric 1 tag O 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag O 0 0 0 metric 1 tag O 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 periodic update to 224 0 0 9 via pos3_3 1 193 1 1 111 130 1 0 0 16 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 130 1 1 0 24 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 177 0 0 0 9 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag O 193 1 1 0 24 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 periodic update t
162. LINK END POINT COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ppp multilink This configures end point string endpoint Interface oF multilink string string Result This sets end point string of multilink END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 76 routers R1 and R2 are bound and interconnected in channelized E1 mode MPPP is configured 140 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Chapter 9 Link Protocol Configuration FIGURE 76 MPPP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 192 168 1 2 30 ELD Multi_7 1 4 7 ery RI 192 168 1 1 30 R2 Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config interface multilink 7 1 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_Ri config controller e1 7 1 ZXR10_Ri config control framing frame ZXR10_R1 config control channel group 1 timeslots 1 31 ZXR10_Ri config interface e1_7 1 1 ZXR10_Ri config if multilink group multi 7 1 Configuration of R2 ZXR10 R2 config interface multi 7 1 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 R2 config z controller e1 7 1 ZXR10_R2 config control framing frame ZXR10_R2 config control channel group 1 timeslots 1 31 ZXR10_R2 config interface e1_7 1 1 ZXR10_R2 config if multilink group multi_7 1 Note When one device is interconnected with multiple routers through multilink El interfaces corresponding to multilink interfaces of routers must have different identifiers Follow
163. MA cceccceeeeeeeeeeees 186 187 INCPS ex we ve n ata 132 Network Service Provider 265 NextHop uo ceee cece seen eee eee eee 302 ME 227 237 NP anar Ub E EN CUENTAS 212 NRT iiie sain d n a nr a t we 100 NSSA 185 189 190 197 198 199 200 NVRAM iius dida 78 OQaimF5 nica caracas 102 ORK de Cr 74 ej t 217 Open Shortest Path First 320 322 323 Open Systems Interconnection i OpenConfirm 255 OpenSent rre om er 255 Operational Principles of MPLS nm 273 275 287 290 Operational Principles of MPLS VPN 287 290 elc 96 OSPF 162 166 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 195 196 197 198 Index 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 216 218 221 231 282 291 293 295 298 A 296 PAP 131 133 134 135 138 PATH eoa ttes 227 239 toldo slo elas 104 PDADA siae ceste rent nine 132 PDU ceeeene 212 216 221 e een ai R E TI 212 PE289 290 291 292 293 294 295 300 PE1 295 296 299 300 301 PE ains 295 297 298 301 PEs 290 291 294 301 PfXRC associated 296 Physical Interfaces 83 85 119 125 Point to Point Protocol 266 POS 83 84 96 97 98 281 PPP 88 89 91 96 108 109 131 132 133 134 135 137 138 139 140 141 275 276 PREF uta 241 Product Overview131 147 151 155 161 169 185 227 PSNP nacen 216 217 PSNPS unicos ice ErR pai
164. MP Connected Group Membership Group addr Interface Present Expire Last Reporter 233 1 1 4 fei_3 1 01 07 49 never 30 1 1 43 233 1 1 147 fei 3 1 01 07 49 00 03 05 30 1 1 42 233 1 4 21 fei 3 1 01 07 49 0 0 0 3 075 3041 1 42 END OF STEPS PIM SM Maintenance and Diagnosis This topic describes how to diagnose and maintain PIM SM Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed 352 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Steps Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration ZXR10 1800 2800 3800 Router provides some commands to view the PIM SM state The following are some common commands 1 To show multicast routing use show ip mroute group lt group address gt source lt source address gt summary command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 418 TABLE 418 SHOW IP MROUTE COMMAND Command Format Command Command Function Mode show ip mroute Priviliged group lt group address gt source lt source address gt summary This shows multicast routing Result This shows multicast routing Example This shows the contents of the current IP multicast routing table ZXR10 show ip mrout IP Multicast Routing Table Flags D Dense S Sparse C Connected L Local P Pruned R RP bit set F Register flag T SPT bit set J Join SPT U Up Send N No Used X Proxy Join Timer Running Assert flag Timers Uptime Expires Interface state Interface Next
165. ND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip route vrf Privileged This displays VRF routing table lt vrf name gt Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH 5 Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration Result This displays VRF routing table Check the VRF routing table on PE1 PEl show ip route vrf testl IPv4 Routing Table Dest Mask Gw Interface Owner pri metric LOG Eu 255 255425540 10 to Tol fei_1 2 direct 0 0 Ot bl 255 255 255 255 T0 TT fei 1 2 address 0 0 1001 11 259720572557255 TO T Lot fei 1 2 bgp 20 0 10 10 10 0 Z855 255 25540 10 10 3 3 fei 1 1 bgp 200 4294967295 200 1 1 1 255 299 259 259 10 10 3 8 fei 1 1 bgp 200 4294967295 PE1 The VRF routing table contains directly connected network sections routes advertised by CE1 and routes advertised by PE2 Whether the peer can enter VRF depends upon whether the import export target route attribute route target import export of both parties match each other To check whether the internal layer labels of VPN on PEs are correct and consistent use show ip protocol routing vrf lt vrf name gt command in privileged mode as shown in Table 345 TABLE 345 SHOW IP PROTOCOL ROUTING VRF COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip protocol fo This checks internal layer labels routing vrf FRIES of VPN vrf name Result This checks internal layer labels of VPN Check the internal lay
166. O UE AS Tras Wat vran vran gaan vans CFFEITTEITUEIPIM ITUEITUEITCECIYY 5 m FAN TES sis C Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 2 System Overview ZXR10 GER 08 Figure 3 shows ZXR10 GER back panel view FIGURE 3 ZxR10 GERO8 BACK PANEL VIEW Physical Interfaces ZXR10 GER is designed to meet the enterprise access layer requirements and able to deliver services for carrier network Due to modular design architecture different modules perform different functions System adopts the 1 1 redundancy design improving the safety and reliability of the system ZXR10 GER shelf supports abundant interface types It supports the following interface boards Physical I nterfaces 1 port POS 2 5G interface board 2 port POS 622M interface board 8 port POS 155M interface board 4 port POS 155M interface board 1 port ATM 155M interface board 2 port gigabit Ethernet optical interface board 2 port gigabit Ethernet optical electrical self adaptive interface board 2 port GBIC gigabit Ethernet interface board 8 port 10 100Base TX interface board 16 port 10 100Base TX interface board 16 port channelized El interface board 1 port channelized CP3 interface board 2 port channelized CE3 interface board Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 5 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Ro
167. PPTP and L2TP L2TP stands for L2 Tunneling Protocol formed with the integration of IETF PPTP and L2F which is the current IETF standard This is a VPN technology implemented in a special link layer which encapsulates packets of the L2 protocol PPP into IP packets for transmission With this technology employees of an enterprise on business can directly access the Intranet by means of a dial up network For a terminal user to use the technology the support of the related ISP is needed The L3 tunneling protocols directly encapsulates network protocols into the tunneling protocols and the formed packets are transmitted by means of the L3 protocols The L3 tunneling protocols includes VTP and IPSec IPSec IP Security defines a system which is used to provide security protocol selection security algorithm and determine the password used so that the security in the IP layer can be guaranteed and the secure data transmission can be implemented The use of this kind of protocols to construct a VPN network means the encapsulation multiple encapsulation modes can be used and encryption of IP packets and the transmission of the IP packets on the Internet The use of IPSec improves the security but the processing of IPSec occupies large quantities of network equipment such as routers resources due to the complexity of protocols and leads to low efficiency Furthermore if a piece of dedicated encryption hardware is used the costs will inc
168. PS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 22 VPLS Configuration I ntroduction Contents I ntroduction Benefits Overview This chapter describes VPLS Both VPLS and VPWS are technologies for implementing MPLS VPN on Layer 2 of the network This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 354 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 22 Topic Page No VPLS 311 VPLS Service Configuration 312 VPLS Diagnosis and Maintenance 317 VPLS VPLS builds on the VPWS point to point pseudowire model adding packet replication and the ability to learn source based MAC addresses for multipoint Layer 2 capabilities It is an attractive option for service providers because it uses a Layer 2 architecture to offer multipoint Ethernet VPNs that connect multiple sites within a MAN or over a WAN Using VPLS service providers can create a Layer 2 virtual switch over an MPLS core Enterprises with large distributed ERP applications and VoIP can benefit from these multipoint services Users benefit from performance and connectivity that are on par with a direct connection to a switch This architecture for providing geographically dispersed Ethernet Multipoint Service EMS adheres to Metropolitan Ethernet Forum standards Each customer edge device or node communicates directly with all other customer edge nodes in the EMS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 311 Virtual Switching Instance VSI
169. R periodically sends booting BSR messages to advertise the RP information The router running the PIM SM updates the RP state according to the latest advertising messages The bootstrap message sent by the BSR is also used to select the formal BSR from the candidate BSRs The default priority of the candidate BSR is O The candidate BSRs with higher priority become the formal BSRs If the BSR 340 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Introduction Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration priorities of multiple routers are similar the IP addresses should be compared The candidate BSR with greater address will become the formal BSR 5 To Configure candidate RPs use rp candidate lt interface name group list lt access list number gt priority lt priority gt command in pimsm configuration mode as shown in Table 390 TABLE 390 RP CANDIDATE COMMAND Command Format Command Mode Command Function rp candidate lt interface name gt group list Pimsm This configures lt access list configuration candidate RPs number gt priority lt priority gt Result This configures candidate RPs In the PIM SM the RP is a root of the shared multicast tree It is responsible for sending multicast packets to the receiving member of the group in the downstream along the shared tree Each multicast group has only one formal RP The default priority of the
170. R10 GERO4 or from ito 2 ZXR10 GERO2 a Port ID refers to number allocated to interface module connector The value range and assignment of port IDs depend upon different types of line interface modules lt Sub interface or channel ID refers to sub interface ID or channel ID of E1 or E3 interface Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEdR Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 6 Interface Configuration Physical Interfaces Physical interfaces cover the following topics Topic Page No Configuring Ethernet Interfaces 85 Configuring E1 Interface 87 Configuring CE3 Interface 91 Configuring Packet over Sonet 95 Configuring ATM 99 103 Configuring VLAN Sub Interface Configuring Smart Group 105 Configuring Multilink 107 Configuring CPOS Interface 110 Aug 3 Mapping 111 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces This below procedure describes how to do configuration of Ethernet interfaces on ZTE ZXR10 GER a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Ethernet Interfaces is connected and running 1 Enter into configuration mode by writing following command as shown in Table 81 TABLE 81 CoNFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Enters into global configuration Exec terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode Enter into interface configuration mode by writing following command in global configuration
171. R10 configuration Method 1 ZXR ZXR AXR config LO l0 config if tip forwarding mode vlan switch LO config interface fei_1 3 interface fei_1 1 ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config v lan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 10 egress fei 1 3 20 range 10 ip forwarding mode vlan switch ZXR ZXR ZXR1 25954 ZXR1 ZXR1 lO config if 255 255 252 lO config subif fip 255 2992993192 O config interface fei 1 4 O config interface fei 1 2 30 O config subif fencapsulation dotiq 30 ip address 192 168 1 1 ZXR10 config finterface fei 1 2 31 ZXR10 config subif fencapsulation dotlq ZXR10 config subif tip 255 2554 255 192 address LO Los ds L SL address 10 1 1 65 Method 2 ZXR10 config finterface fei 1 3 ZXR10 config finterface fei 1 1 ZXR10 config if fip forwarding mode vlan switch Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 121 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 122 Purpose Prerequisite ZTE ZXR10 config if ip forwarding mode vlan switch ZXR10 config vlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 10 egress fei 1 3 20 ZXR10 config tvlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 11 egress fei 1 3 21 ZXR10 config vlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 12 egress fei 1 3 22 ZXR10 config vlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 13 egress fei 1 3 23 ZXR10 config vlan forwarding ingress fei 1 1 14 egress fei 1 3 2
172. R10_R1 config if ip address 10 10 30 1 255 255 2554 0 ZXR10 Rl1 config if ip pim sm ZXR10_R1 config frouter ospf 1 ZXR10_R1 config router network 10 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 area 0 0 0 0 O_R1 O_R1 O_R1 rit O_R 10 R2 configuration ZXR10_R2 config interface loopbackl ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 10412 242 255 2554 255 1255 ZXR10 R2 config finterface fei 1 1 ZXR1LO_R2 config if ip address 10 10 20 2 LIO 2 9 2 9 9 0 ZXR10 R2 config if fip pim sm ZXR10 R2 config finterface fei 1 2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 359 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 360 ZTE ZXR ZXR ZXR ZXR ZXR 255 255 10 R2 config if address 255 255 0 ip 10 R2 config if ip pim sm 10 R2 config finterface fei 1 3 10 R2 config if address 2554 255 0 ip 10 R2 config if ip igmp access group 10 10 10 40 1 10 10 50 1 ZXR ZXR ZXR ZXR pri ZXR 10 255 ZXR1 ZXR1 2I ous ZXR ZXR1 2554 ZXR1 ZXR1 ZXR 255 ZXR10_R2 config router ospf 1 ZXR10_R2 config router network 10 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 ZXR10 R2 config fip multicast routing ZXR10_R2 config router pimsm ZXR10_R2 config router rp candidate loopbackl priority 20 ZXR10_R2 config router bsr candidate loopbackl 10 20 ZXR1LO_R2 config access list 10 permit any R3 configuration ZXR10_R3 c
173. R2 through the ATM interface R2 is connected with R3 through the 100M interface In the networking R2 must be a transparent transmission device and R1 and the VLAN sub interface of the ATM virtual interface Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 153 154 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA must be in the same network section and can interwork with the 100M interface of R3 through bridge encapsulation FIGURE 79 ATM INTERFACE BRIDGE CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 192 168 1 2 30 atml55 6 1 1 fei 1 1 1007 3 funus munus 7100 a atml55 6 1 1 1 RI 192 168 1 1 30 R2 R3 R1 configuration ZXR10 Rl1 config finterface atmi55 6 1 1 ZXR10 Rl1 config if fatm pvc 100 100 ZXR10 Rl1 config if fexit ZXR1O_R1 config interface atmi155 6 1 1 1 ZXR10 R1 ZXR10_R1 config subif ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 config subif encapsulation dot1Q 1 R2 configuration ZXR10 R2 config finterface atmi55 6 1 1 ZXR10 R2 config if atm pvc 100 100 ZXR10 R2 config if ip forwarding mode mix ZXR10 R2 config if exit ZXR10 R2 config finterface fei 1 1 ZXR10 R2 config if ip forwarding mode mix ZXR10 R2 config if exit ZXR10_R2 config vlan forwarding ingress atm155_6 1 1 1 egress fei 1 1 100 R3 configuration ZXR10 R3 config finterface fei 1 1 100 ZXR10_R3 config subif encapsula
174. RH Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration a BGP is running on a network 1 To configure BGP aggregation advertisement use aggregate address ip address lt net mask gt count lt count gt as set summary only strict command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 286 TABLE 286 BGP AGGREGATE ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Mode Command Function Format aggregate address lt ip address net This creates an mask count BGP Route aggregation policy in lt count gt as set BGP routing table summary only strict Result This establishes an aggregation policy in BGP routing table END OF STEPS Example An aggregate address example is shown as follows As shown in Figure 96 routers R1 and R2 separately advertise routes 170 10 0 0 16 and 170 20 0 0 16 R3 aggregates the information about the two routes into a route 170 0 0 0 8 and advertises the route to R4 After aggregation configuration the routing table of R4 can only learn the aggregated route 170 0 0 0 8 FIGURE 96 BGP AGGREGATION ADVERTISEMENT AS100 AS300 Fo AS200 17020 00 16 i i 170 10 0 0 16 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 233 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Configuration of R1 ZXR10 Ri config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 2 2 2 2 255 0 0 0 ZXR10_Ri config router bgp 100 ZXR10_Ri config router netw
175. RPORATION 81 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Steps 1 To view hardware and software versions of the System use show version command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 79 TABLE 79 SHOW VERSION COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode show This displays the version Global Config information about the software version and hardware of System Result This shows the running software and hardware System information END OF STEPS Example The following information is displayed after carried out show version command ZXR10 show version ZXR10 Router Operating System Software ZTE Corporation ROS ZXR10 T64 Software ZXR10 T64 I M Version V1 2 m n EARLY DEPLOYMENT RELEASE SOFTWARE ROM System Bootstrap Version 1 0 0 RELEASE SOFTWARE Copyright c 2001 2003 by ZTE Corporation System image files are lt flash img img gt ZXR10 T64 MPC750 processor with 512M bytes of memory Processor Board ID 15007 128K bytes of non volatile configuration memory 64M bytes of processor board System flash Read Write ZXR10 82 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 6 Interface Configuration I ntroduction Contents Physical Interfaces Logical Interfaces Overview This chapter describes different types of interfaces on ZXR10 GER and their configuration examples for further illustration This chapter cove
176. S MPLS TE Maintenance Diagnosis Purpose This procedure describes how to diagnose and maintain MPLS configuration Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Steps 1 To check the network connectivity use command ping ip 324 2 address in Privileged mode as shown in Table 371 TABLE 371 PiNG COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ping ip Privileged This verifies the network addre connectivity Result This verifies the network connectivity To view MPLS TE enabled nodes interfaces use show mpls lt interface_id gt command in Privileged mode as shown in Table 372 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Chapter 23 Traffic Engineering Configuration TABLE 372 SHOW MPLS TRAFFIC COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function show mpls interface Privileged lt interface_id gt This display the MPLS TE enabled interfaces Result This display the MPLS TE enabled interfaces To view MPLS TE information at a node use show mpls traffic eng tunnels summary command in Privileged mode as shown in Table 373 TABLE 373 SHOW MPLS TRAFFIC ENG COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function show mpls traffic eng Privileged This display the MPLS TE tunnels g tunnels information summary Result This shows the MPLS TE tunnels information To view MPLS TE information for a specific tunnel at a node use show mpls
177. S eeenee 276 286 ZXUAS 10600 Carrier Class BRAS vou ia 63
178. SH To configure SSH meet the following requirements IP address of the remote router has been configured as 192 168 3 1 IP address of Radius Server is already configured 192 168 2 1 Both the Radius Server and the SSH client of the local host communication is already been checked with the remote router successfully a Router command Line Interface has been accessed 1 Open the WinRadius exe Select the Add an Account menu to add an account with the username being zte and password being 123 Click OK Figure 42 show the details Result System setting menu appears Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEGA Chapter 4 Usage and Operations FIGURE 42 RADIUS SERVER ACCOUNT CONFIGURATIONS 2 Select the System Setting menu Set the NAS password to GER and auth port to 1812 and then click OK as shown in Figure 43 FIGURE 43 RADIUS SERVER SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Result Radius Server has been configured END OF STEPS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 53 54 Purpose Prerequisites Steps y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDR Configuring SSH in Router This topic describes how to configure SSH in router Router command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enable the SSH function use ssh server enable command in global configuration mode as shown below ZXR10 config ssh s
179. SPF and IS IS into BGP Upon the use of the redistribute command prevent the redistribution of routes that IGP learns from BGP into the BGP once again Use the filter command to prevent the generation of loops if necessary END OF STEPS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 231 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Example An example for route advertisement in BGP in route redistribution mode is given in following Detailed network diagram is as follows FIGURE 95 BGP ROUTE ADVERTISMENT R4 1 1 1 1 24 Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 10 1 1 1 remote as 200 ZXR10_R1 config router network 182 16 0 0 255 255 0 0 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config router bgp 200 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 10 1 1 2 remote as 100 ZXR10_R3 config router network 182 17 0 0 255 255 0 0 Configuration of R3 ZXR10_R3 config router ospf 1 ZXR10_R3 config router network 175 220 0 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 ZXR10_R3 config router bgp 200 ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 1 1 1 1 remote as 300 ZXR10_R3 config router redistribute ospf_int BGP Aggregation Advertisement Purpose Refer to below procedure for BGP aggregation advertisement configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 232 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTE
180. TIVE DISTANCE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode distance ospf internal This defines OSPF route lt distance gt ext1 OSPF Route administrative distance lt distance gt ext2 based on route type lt distance gt Result This modifies the administrative distance of OSPF OSPF Maintenance amp Diagnosis Introduction OSPF is more complicated than RIP It is relatively difficult to overcome faults of the OSPF protocol since the same phenomenon may be caused by multiple reasons Common commands used in OSPF maintenance and diagnosis are as follows Refer to below procedure for OSPF maintenance and diagnosis Router Command Line Interface has been accessed OSPF is running on a network as described in above basic OSPF configuration 1 To display protocol information use show ip ospf lt process id gt command in Exec mode as shown in Table 251 TABLE 251 SHow IP OsPF COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This displays the detailed show ip ospf Exec information about OSPF lt process id gt process Result This shows detailed information about OSPF process 2 To display an OSPF interface use show ip ospf interface lt interface number gt process lt process id gt command in Exec mode as shown in Table 252 TABLE 252 SHOW IP OSPF INTERFACE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip ospf This displays the current interface Exec configurati
181. TM is the transmission mode in which the cell serves as the basic carrier It is required to segment the user information of different lengths into short cells with the fixed length or form the user information of different lengths again through short cells with the fixed length RFC2684 does not specify a new method for segmentation and reassembly SAR to route and bridge the protocol data unit PDU but makes the load area of the Common Part Convergence Sublayer CPCS of ATM Adaption Layer 5 AAL5 to carry the PDU RFC2684 describes two methods to carry connectionless network interconnection service information route and bridge PDUs on the ATM network In the first method multiple protocols can be reused on the single ATM virtual circuit The protocol type carrying the PDU is identified by adding a Logic Link Control LLC title specified in the IEEE802 2 standard to the PDU This method is called LLC encapsulation Using this method needs a few virtual circuits in the multi protocol environment The second method is to imply higher layer protocols to ATM virtual circuits This method is called VC based multi channel reuse To use multiple protocols configure virtual circuits for each protocol Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 151 152 Purpose Prerequisite Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Configuring ATM Bridge This procedure describes how t
182. The other areas must be directly connected to area 0 An OSPF network must have a backbone area According to specific task in area where a router is located the router can be one or multiple types of following routers as shown in Figure 86 FIGURE 86 OsPr ROUTER TYPE ie ae d S m Areal gt Lus rc o Area2 Internal router rea A I s I i ABR Q N bonb router Bag bdneYouter N 4 Baskbone r uter Internal router Interfaces of the router are inside the same area a Backbone router At least one interface of the router is inside area 0 Area Border Router ABR At least one interface of router is inside area O and at least one interface is in other area a Autonomous System Border Router ASBR the router connects an AS running OSPF to another AS running other protocol e g RIP LSA is a mode of exchanging link state database information among OSPF routers A router uses LSAs to construct an 188 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH OSPF Operation LSU Link State Acknowledgem ent Stub Area Totally Stub Area Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration accurate and complete network diagram and generate routes used in its routing table ZTE ZXR10 GER supports following six types of LSAs Type 1 Router LSA Type 2 Network LSA a Type 3 Network summary LSA a Type 4 ASBR summary LSA Type 5 External LSA of AS Type
183. This sets the framing as a sonet config Result This sets the framing as a sonnet To enter into the sts 1 configuration mode use sts 1 command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 136 TABLE 136 STS 1 COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This enter into the sts 1 sts 1 global config configuration mode Result This enters into the sts 1 configuration mode To select the mapping mode of sts 1 vt 15 or vt 2 use mode command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 137 TABLE 137 MODE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode mode Interface This select the mapping mode config of sts 1 vt 15 or vt 2 Result This select the mapping mode of sts 1 vt 15 or vt 2 END OF STEPS E1 Encapsulation VT 2 Refer to below procedure for configuring E1 encapsulation in case of VT 2 ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 114 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Steps Chapter 6 Interface Configuration 1 To enter into the vt 2 configuration mode use vt 2 1 command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 138 TABLE 138 VT 2 1 COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This enables to enter into the vt 2 1 global config 7 2 configuration mode Result This enables to enter into the vt 2 configuration mode To set the framing format of E1 channel in VTG use vtg lt Vtg
184. VPN on Layer 2 of the network This chapter describes the basic concepts of layer 3 MPLS TE and the relevant configuration on the ZXR10 GER router This chapter describes multicast routing and the relevant configuration on the ZXR10 GER router Related Documentation ZXR10 General Excellent Router GER User Manual is applicable to ZXR10 General Excellent Router Model 02 04 08 hereinafter called ZXR10 GER 02 04 08 for short For difference of product they can be mentioned separately Related ZXR10 GER manuals are as follows ZXR10 General Excellent Router GER V2 6 Installation Manual ZXR10 General Excellent Router GER V2 6 User Manual ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Command Manual Command Index ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Command Manual System Management ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Command Manual Functional System I Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION iii J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Typographical Conventions Mouse Operation Conventions a ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Command Manual Functional System II a ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Command Manual Functional System III a ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Command Manual Functional System IV a ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Command Manual Protocol Stack I a ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Command Manual Protocol Stack II a ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Command Manua
185. ZTE CORPORATION 265 P 266 ublic Network Tunneling Technology L2 Tunneling Protocol L3 Tunneling Protocol Encapsulation Mode Other VPN Technologies M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA private WAN is a technology to simulate a point to point leased line on a common data network by using the private tunneling technology On a virtual private network the connection between any two nodes does not have any end to end physical link necessary for a traditional private network but is dynamically set up by using the resources of the public network In addition a VPN user also can customize a network that best meet the actual requirements and also can control contact with other users Such a VPN also supports dial up users The tunneling technology similar to the point to point connection technology is a basic VPN technology which can set up a data channel tunnel on a public network so that packets can be transmitted on the tunnel A tunnel is formed by tunneling protocols covering L2 and L3 tunneling protocols The L2 tunneling protocol first encapsulates network protocols into PPP and then encapsulates an entire packet into the tunneling protocol The data packet formed through this kind of dual layer encapsulation conducts its transmission depending on layer 2 protocol Packets formed in this dual layer encapsulation are transmitted based on the L2 protocols such as L2F
186. ZTEmA ZXR10 GER General Excellent Router User Manual Volume Version 2 6 03 ZTE CORPORATION ZTE Plaza Keji Road South Hi Tech Industrial Park Nanshan District Shenzhen P R China 518057 Tel 86 755 26771900 800 9830 9830 Fax 86 755 26772236 URL http support zte com cn E mail doc zte com cn LEGAL INFORMATION Copyright O 2006 ZTE CORPORATION The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties Any reproduction or distribution of this document or any portion of this document in any form by any means without the prior written consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited Additionally the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality obligations All company brand and product names are trade or service marks or registered trade or service marks of ZTE CORPORATION or of their respective owners This document is provided as is and all express implied or statutory warranties representations or conditions are disclaimed including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose title or non infringement ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on the information contained herein ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the subject matter of this document Exce
187. a fei 1 1 193 1 168 111 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 183 Chapter 1 4 OSPF Configuration I ntroduction Contents Overview OSPF refers to Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol is a kind of link state routing protocol OSPF can meet the requirements for large and scalable networks while distance vector routing protocols such as RIP cannot meet the requirements This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 228 Topics IN CHAPTER 14 Topic OSPF CLI Configuration Configuring OSPF for Non Broadcast Network Configuring OSPF Authentication Configuring OSPF Area Parameters and NSSA Configuring Inter Area Route Aggregation Configuring Route Aggregation upon Route Redistribution Generating Default Route Configuring Virtual Links Redistributing Other Routing Protocols Configuring Administrative Distance OSPF Maintenance amp Diagnosis Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Page No 186 190 193 194 196 200 201 202 202 204 205 206 185 OSPF Basics OSPF Features OSPF Network 186 Type Hello Packets and Timers ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA OSPF Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol is one of the most popular and widely used routing protocols OSPF is a link state protocol which has overcome the disadvantages of RIP and other distance vector protocols OSPF is also an
188. a unique IP address of the Internet The address can be identified uniquely on the Internet GRE is used to encapsulate packets with the destination and source IP addresses being the internal addresses of the enterprise and add an IP header The destination address is the IP address of the egress of the remote Internet while the source address is the IP address of the egress of the local Internet Thus the packets can be transmitted correctly on the Internet This technology is the simplest VPN technology When a router sends or forwards an IP datagram if the IP datagram should be sent out a GRE tunnel interface after routing process GRE encapsulation is needed Upon encapsulation the GRE header field is processed according to the option configuration of the GRE tunnel interface and finally a route is found according to the encapsulated destination address and the datagram is sent to the output network interface to implement forwarding of the datagram If the length of the datagram to be sent is greater than the MTU Maximum Transmission Unit of the interface fragmentation operation should be performed before GRE encapsulation and sending that is fragmentation is performed before encapsulation If the DF bit of the IP data header is set to 1 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 267 268 Key Tag IP Data Header TTL Purpose Prerequisite Steps ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Ma
189. abel switching forwarding which provides routers with a Layer 2 like ability to direct traffic across multiple hops as directed by the resource based routing algorithm One approach to engineer a backbone is to define a mesh of tunnels from every ingress device to every egress device The IGP operating at an ingress device determines which traffic should go to which egress device and steers that traffic into the tunnel from ingress to egress The MPLS traffic engineering path calculation and signaling modules determine the path taken by the LSP tunnel subject to resource availability and the dynamic state of the network For each tunnel counts of packets and bytes sent are kept Sometimes a flow is so large that it cannot fit over a single link so it cannot be carried by a single tunnel In this case multiple tunnels between a given ingress and egress can be configured and the flow is load shared among them MPLS Basic Configuration Below procedure gives information about MPLS basic configuration Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed 1 To configure device for enabling MPLS TE signaling use mpls traffic eng tunnels in global configuration mode as shown in Table 366 TABLE 366 MPLS TRAFFIC COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode mpls traffic eng Global config This enables MPLS TE tunnels Result This configures MPLS TE signaling Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
190. accessed a TFTP server is up and running Steps 1 Connect serial port of ZXR10 GER COM port on SMP Panel to serial port of TFTP Server Computer System with console cable Result TFTP server computer system and Router are ready to transfer files 2 Connect management Ethernet port of router 10 100M Ethernet port on BIC to the network port of TFTP Server Computer System with an Ethernet cable and make sure the connections are correct Result Media Ethernet cable is ready to transfer files 76 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 5 System Management Configure both TFTP Server Computer System Ethernet port and router management Ethernet port of router in the same network section Result Different IP addresses belonging to same network are configured View information about the currently running image use show version command as shown in Table 67 TABLE 67 SHOW VERSION COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode show Exec This indicates software version of version flash and new image file present in directory Result This indicates new image file present in directory Use the delete command in Exec mode to delete the old image file zxr10 zar under the IMG directory in the FLASH only if space is not sufficient otherwise just change its name The command is shown in Table 68 TABLE 68 DELETE COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function For
191. ad from 2 5 Gbps optical signals and provides PPP packets for the packet processing card through the bus In the transmitting direction this card receives PPP packets from the packet processing card through the bus This card maps the packets into SONET SDH virtual containe281rs VC 4 16c and sends the packets through the 2 5 Gbps optical interface Figure 14 shows the RE 01GP48 SO2KLC card FIGURE 14 RE 01GP48 SO2KLC CARD RE 01GP48 S02KLC N RUN DATA LINK RE 01GP48 S02KLC card specifications are as follows LC connector single mode fiber Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 2km and single channel RE 01GP48 S02KLC card contains four LED indicators Table 21 describes their functions TABLE 21 RE 01GP48 S02KLC CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description This is constantly on if the interface card is working RUN normally and this goes off if the interface card fails This is constantly on in the case of data sending and DATA receiving and this is off in the case if data sending or receiving fails This is constantly on if optical signals are available SD and this goes off if optical signals are not available This is constantly on in the case of successful PPP link LINK setup and This is off in the case of PPP link setup failure 26 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Definition Function Panel Interfaces Indicators Chapter 3 S
192. ad the next hop address information in the routing table of the VPN In addition forwarded packets will be marked with a VPN label internal layer label In this case the next hop address obtained is the address of a PE that is the peer of this PE To reach the destination PE routing information of backbone network should be read from source PE to obtain the address of the next P router and meanwhile forwarded user s packets will be tagged with a backbone network label external layer label In the backbone network all P routers after the source PE read the external layer label to determine the next hop Therefore only simple label switching is performed on the backbone network When a packet reaches the last P router before arriving at the destination PE the external layer label will be cancelled After the packet reaches the destination PE the PE will read the internal layer label find the next hop CE in the corresponding VRF send the packet to the related interface and further transfer the data to the CE network of the VPN Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 291 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA MPLS VPN Configuration Purpose Refer to below procedure for MPLS VPN configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Steps 1 To define a name of a VPN on PE or give a name of the forwarding table of a VPN use i
193. al interface RJ45 electrical interface SFP optical interface 2 port GE electrical interface RJ45 2 port GE optical interface GBIC optical module 2 port POS12 SFP optical module 4 port POS3 SFP optical module 8 port 100M Ethernet electrical interface 8 port 100M Ethernet optical interface SFP optical module 16 port 120 ohm channelized non channelized El interface 16 port 75 ohm channelized non channelized El interface 16 port 100M Ethernet electrical interface Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 23 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA RE 01A3 SFP Definition This is a one port ATM3 optical interface board providing one channel standard OC 3c STM 1c ATM optical interface Function This card does the physical processing This card provides conversion of ATM SAR and AAL5 adaptation signals to optical electrical signals and serial parallel conversion of 155 52Mb s signals In addition this card implements communication between Interface cards and SMP through the bus in LLC encapsulation form Panel Figure 12 shows the RE 01A3 SFP card FIGURE 12 RE 01A3 SFP CARD RE 01A3 SFP card provides one channel optical interface of different transmission distances with different port types Different port has different specifications TABLE 17 RE 01A3 SFP CARD INTERFACE FEATURES Port Type Specifications LC connector multi mode fiber Wav
194. ale the network must be designed such that network is divided into multiple OSPF areas Figure 89 shows an example of multi area OSPF configuration FIGURE 89 MULTI AREA OSPF CONFIGURATION m BGP M De 10 0 1 130 ft we 10 0 2 1 30 The detailed configuration of each route is described as follows Area 0 0 0 1 is an NSSA area and R1 is an ABR working between NSSA area 0 0 0 1 and the backbone area R1 advertises a default route to the local area Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10 Ri1 config if ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 Ri config if exit ZXR10_R1 config tinterface fei 1 2 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 10 0 0 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 Ri1 config if exit ZXR10 Ri config zrouter ospf 1 ZXR10_Ri config router network 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 ZXR10_Ri config router network 10 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 area 0 0 0 1 ZXR10_Ri config router area 0 0 0 1 nssa default information originate Area 0 0 0 2 is a stub area and R2 is an ABR working between NSSA area 0 0 0 2 and the backbone area In the stub area ABR will automatically advertise a default route to the stub area Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10 R2 config if zip address 10 0 2 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 R2 config if exit ZXR10_R2 config interface fei 1 2 ZXR10 R
195. an port of data sending and receiving and it is off in the case of no data sending or receiving LINK per Link indicator It is constantly on in the case of P successful PPP link setup and it is off in the case of PPP link setup failure port RE 04P3 SFP This is a four port POS3 optical interface card providing four channel standard OC 3c STM 1c POS optical interface It mainly implements optical electrical signal conversion clock and data recovery of the line and POS Mapper function of the OC 3c Figure 23 shows RE 04P3 SFP Card FIGURE 23 RE 04P3 SFP CARD RE 04P3 D SFP RE 04P3 SFP card can provide four channel optical interface with different transmission distances by configuring SFP parts of different specifications Interface features are shown in Table 34 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 35 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEPA TABLE 34 RE 04P3 SFP CARD INTERFACE FEATURES Port Type SFP 2KM SFP 15KM SFP 40KM SFP 80KM Description LC connector multi mode fiber Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 2km LC connector single mode fiber nm Max transmission distance LC connector single mode fiber nm Max transmission distance LC connector single mode fiber nm Max transmission distance Wavelength 1310 15km Wavelength 1310 40km Wavelength 1550 80 km Indicators There i
196. and Table 346 Topics In Chapter 21 eese Table 347 Mpls Ldp Command eese Table 348 Mpls Xconnect Command Table 349 Show Mpls L2 Transport Command Table 350 Show Mpls L2 Transport Binding Command Table 351 Debug Mpls Ldp L2Vpn Event Command Table 352 Debug L2vpn Fsm Command Table 353 Debug Mpls L2Vpn Command Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTE ZTERH Tables Table 354 Topics In Chapter 22 essen nn 311 Table 355 Vfi Command sesssessem em 313 Table 356 Mpls Id Command eeeeem emm 313 Table 357 Vcid Command sssssssssrrssssrnrrsrsrrnrnnnnrnrnrenurnran 313 Table 358 Pwtype Command eee nennen 313 Table 359 Peer Command sssssesssseeen 314 Table 360 Maxmax Command sseeseeeene 314 Table 361 Mpls Ldp Target Command sssssssl 314 Table 362 Show Vfi Command seeeeeeeee 317 Table 363 Show Mpls L2Transport Vc Vpls Command 317 Table 364 Show Mac Table Vfi Command sees 317 Table 365 Topics In Chapter 23 ccccccceceeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 319 Table 366 Mpls Traffic Command 0cocccccocccnonncnancnnannnnnn cnn 321 Table 367 Mpls Traffic Interface Command 322 Table 368 Ip Rsvp Command sssssssssrrrrsssrrrrnesurnrnnesn
197. and Command Function Format Mode interface This creates a smartgroup interface global config interface and enters into number interface configuration mode Result This enables to create smart group and to enter into it 3 To configure an IP address of an interface use ip address ip address net mask broadcast address command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 116 TABLE 116 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip address Interface lt ip address gt This configures an ip address of lt net mask gt an interface lt broadcast address gt Result This configures an ip address of an interface 4 To add Ethernet interfaces into smartgroup use smartgroup xinterface number command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 117 TABLE 117 SMART GROUP ETHERNET COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode smartgroup This adds Ethernet interfaces interface Interface into smartgroup number gt Result This sets Ethernet interfaces into smartgroup END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 67 the smartgroup1 interface of ZXR10 GER router is interconnected with the st 1 interface of ZXR10 routing switch 106 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Background Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 6 Interface Configuration FIGURE 67 SMART GROUP EXAMPLE 192 168 1 2 30 smtgtp 8
198. and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration Refer to below procedure for configuration of OSPF virtual links 1 Router Command Line Interface has been accessed OSPF is running on a network as described in above basic OSPF configuration For virtual link configuration use area lt area id gt virtual link lt router id gt hello interval lt seconds gt retransmit interval lt seconds gt transmit delay lt seconds gt dead interval lt seconds gt authentication key lt key gt message digest key lt keyid gt md5 lt cryptkey gt delay lt time gt command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 248 TABLE 248 VIRTUAL LINK COMMAND Command Command Command Format Mode Function area lt area id gt virtual link lt router id gt hello interval lt seconds gt retransmit interval lt seconds gt transmit delay lt seconds gt dead interval lt seconds gt authentication key lt key gt message digest key lt keyid gt md5 lt cryptkey gt delay lt time gt This defines an OSPF virtual link if designated OSPF Route area does not exist an area will be created automatically Result This established a virtual link END OF STEPS Example Figure 90 shows an example of OSPF virtual link configuration FIGURE 90 OSPF VIRTUAL LINK CONFIGURATION Detailed configuration of each router is as
199. ansmission Control Protocol Tm 331 334 348 349 TS Riad oras 74 Imi 276 TUNNEL iriiri nanita ana 274 UBR deietan eite dela 100 UDP salar 169 277 UE 277 A whe tartans ak da 78 UPDATE enne 302 303 VBR ceren oae Ra eam Ead 100 Mec 99 MCI A divina es 275 276 Viewing System Information 81 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Virtual Private Network iii 265 266 267 270 VLAN oseanen 83 85 103 104 MLANT00 uu onda cia 104 VLAN200 eee 104 LN Senora 103 104 VLSM ara reli dens 186 VPOS MNMNEM RMNEM 99 VED AS 275 276 VPNiii 274 275 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 295 297 298 299 301 VPN IPv4 Address and Route Distinguisher RD 287 289 VPNS eeennn 288 289 290 VRF 291 292 293 294 299 300 301 MS maaa E 134 WAN anoc 89 109 139 Wide Area Network 266 ZTE iii 80 81 82 85 88 91 97 100 103 105 107 110 111 112 114 119 122 126 129 131 134 137 139 142 144 148 149 157 159 162 165 169 173 180 190 213 220 229 231 232 235 236 237 239 240 242 244 245 247 249 251 253 259 273 278 282 287 292 299 302 ZXR 213 229 231 232 235 236 237 239 240 242 244 245 247 249 251 253 259 ZXR10 T64E T128 72 76 78 84 87 89 90 91 94 98 100 102 105 107 109 155 189 216 ZXUA
200. ase of IBPG routers the number of neighbors will increase by n n 1 2 n stands for the number of IBGP routers To reduce the workload of maintenance and configuration route reflector and route confederation are used For routers running IBGP in an AS one router is selected as a Router Reflector RR and all other IBGP routers serve as clients only with adjacency set up with the RR All clients reflect routes through the RR In this way the number of neighbors is reduced to n 1 Refer to below procedure for BGP route reflector configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed BGP is running on a network 1 For configuring BGP route reflector use neighbor lt ip address route reflector client command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 297 TABLE 297 NEIGHBOR ROUTE REFLECTOR COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode neighbor lt ip This configures neighbors address route Route as client peers of the route refletor client reflector Result This configures neighbors as client peers of the route reflector As shown in Figure 102 there are two route reflectors in AS100 R3 and R4 Where the clients of R4 are R5 and R6 while those of R3 are R1 and R2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 247 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA FIGURE 102 BGP ROUTE REFLECTOR Configuration of R3
201. asic discovery mechanism is sent on all interfaces configured with LDP with multicast addresses of all routers on the subnet as the destination addresses The procedure for setting up an LDP session between two LSRs is as follows 1 Open a TCP connection used for label distribution On ZXR10 GER by default router ID of LDP serves as the transport address of the TCP connection Alternatively in interface configuration mode mpls Idp discovery transport address command can be used to designate an IP address or source IP address for sending Hello messages can serve as the transport address of the TCP connection NOTE To set up a TCP connection an LSR should have a route to TCP transport address of another LSR 2 Negotiate LDP session parameters Parameters to be negotiated are label distribution mode independent downstream label distribution downstream label distribution on demand and other parameters After the LDP session is set up the LDP can start label distribution Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 277 278 Purpose Prerequisite Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA MPLS Configuration Refer to below procedure for MPLS configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 2 3 4 Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in global configuration mode as shown in Table
202. asic IS IS Configuration 213 Configuring Global IS IS Parameters 216 IS IS Interface Parameters 218 Configuring IS IS Authentication 220 Multi Area IS IS 222 IS IS Overview IS IS is a routing protocol used for Connectionless Network Service CLNS This protocol is a link state routing protocol based on the Dijkstra SPF algorithm IS IS protocol is similar to OSPF protocol in many aspects Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 211 PDU Link State PDU Dijkstra SPF Algorithm Reduce Traffic 212 Three Types M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Since the IS IS protocol is based on CLNS not IP IS IS uses Protoco Data Unit PDU defined by ISO to implement communications among routers The types of PDUs used in the IS IS protocol are as follows Call PDU Link state PDU LSP Serial Number PDU SNP Where call PDU is similar to the HELLO packet in the OSPF protocol which is responsible for the formation of the adjacency between routers discovery of new neighbors and the detection of exit of any neighbors IS IS routers exchange routing information set up and maintain link state database by use of link state PDUs An LSP indicates important information about a router covering area and connected network SNP is used to ensure reliable transmission of LSPs SNP contains summary information about each LSP on a network When a router receives an SNP
203. ble 218 To disable this use the no form of this command TABLE 218 REDISTRIBUTE COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode redistribute RIP Config protocol metric This helps to configure metric value values for other routing protocols route map lt map tag gt lt protocol gt refers to both EGP and IGP protocols lt value gt ranges from lt 0 16 gt lt map tag gt refers to a tag values through route recognize Result This enables redistribution of other protocols in RIP routing domain 9 To set default metric values for RIP use this form of the default metric command in RIP router configuration mode as shown in Table 219 To return to the default state use the no form of this command TABLE 219 DEFAULT METRIC COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode default metric RIP Interface This enables the poison lt number gt Config reverse mechanism lt number gt ranges from lt 1 16 gt Default metric command is used in conjunction with the redistribute router configuration command to cause the 178 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Default Metric Version Configuration Chapter 13 RIP Configuration current routing protocol to use the same metric value for all redistributed routes A default metric helps solve the problem of redistributing routes with incompatible metrics Whenever metrics do not convert using
204. ble 58 MkDir Command Window eese 65 Table 59 RmDir Command Window eese 66 Table 60 RmDir Command Window eee 66 Table 61 Boot Window ssssssee mmm 73 Table 62 Version Upgrading Command Window 74 Table 63 Show Version Command Window eese 75 Table 64 Delete Command Window eese 75 Table 65 Copy Command Window een nnn 75 374 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Tables Table 66 Show Version Command Window eese 76 Table 67 Show Version Command Window 77 Table 68 Delete Command Window ceeeeeeee eee eee teenies 77 Table 69 Copy Command Window een 77 Table 70 Show Version Command Window 78 Table 71 Write Command Window essere 78 Table 72 Copy Command Window seen 79 Table 73 Copy Command Window cese 79 Table 74 Hostname Command Window esses 80 Table 75 Banner Incoming Command Window 80 Table 76 Enable Secret Command Window eese 81 Table 77 Telnet Username Command Window 81 Table 78 Clock Set Command Window eseesssss 81 Table 79 Show Version Command Window 82 Table 80 Topics In Chapter 6 esssss
205. border On the other hand this converts Type 7 LSA into Type 5 LSA OSPF The authentication can be used for packet exchange between Authentication two OSPF neighbors The neighbors must agree on authentication type and authentication type is contained in all packets Authentication type O indicates no authentication 1 indicates simple password authentication and 2 indicates MD5 password authentication When simple password authentication is configured an interface only allows one password The password of each interface can be different but each interface in a special network must have same password The simple password is sent through OSPF packets in plain text CLI Configuration Purpose This procedure describes how to configure OSPF on ZTE ZXR10 GER Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Steps 1 Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 229 TABLE 229 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 Enabling an OSPF process use router ospf lt process id gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 230 TABLE 230 ROUTER OSPF COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode 190 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR
206. bove figure is as follows Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config router isis ZXR10_Ri config router area 01 ZXR10_Ri config router system id 00D0 D0C7 53E0 ZXR10 Ri1 config router is type LEVEL 1 2 ZXR10_Ri config router exit ZXR10 Ri config Zinterface fei 2 4 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 192 168 15 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 Ri config if Zip router isis ZXR10_R1i config if isis circuit type LEVEL 2 ZXR10_Ri config router exit ZXR10_R1 config tinterface fei 2 6 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 192 168 100 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 Ri config if Zip router isis ZXR10 Ri config if isis circuit type LEVEL 1 222 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 15 IS IS Configuration ZXR10_R1i config if exit ZXR10_R1 config tinterface fei 2 7 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 192 168 101 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 Ri1 config if ip router isis ZXR10 Ri config if isis circuit type LEVEL 1 ZXR10_R1i config if exit ZXR10_R1 config tinterface fei 2 8 ZXR10 Ri config if zip address 192 168 102 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_Ri config if ip router isis ZXR10 Ri1 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 1 ZXR10 Ri config if exit ZXR10_R1 config router isis ZXR10_Ri config router summary address 192 168 100 0 255 255 252 0 10 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config router isis ZXR10_R2 config router area 00 ZXR10_R2 config router system id OODO EOD7 53E0 ZXR10_R2 config router
207. bute is available only in ATM virtual interfaces But the VLAN sub interface of the ATM virtual interface is a bridge interface once it is created The attributes ip forwarding mode and atm pvc are available only in ATM virtual interfaces And this attribute of the VLAN sub interface of the ATM virtual interface is the same as that of the parent interface To encapsulate vlan id use encapsulation dot1Q command in vlan sub interface configuration mode as shown in Table 191 TABLE 191 ENCAPSULATOPN DOT1Q COMMAND Command Command A Command Function Format Mode atm pvc interface config This encapsulates vlan id Result This encapsulates vlan id To configure the IP address of the interface use ip address command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 192 TABLE 192 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode m interface conio This configures the IP address of the interface Result This configures the IP address of the interface To configure the V_Switch forwarding table use vlan forwarding ingress command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 193 TABLE 193 VLAN FORWARING INGRESS COMMAND Command Command c ommand Function Format Mode vlan This configures the V Switch forwarding interface config forwardina table ingress 9 Result This configures the V_Switch forwarding table END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 79 R1 is connected with
208. can be configured to automatically shutdown after a specified period of time Exit after a period of inactivity i OOO OK Cancel Help Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 71 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Result Never option is selected 8 To save log in specific path this can be chosen from Log tab By default do not log request option is selected as shown in Figure 55 FIGURE 55 LOG WINDOW TFTP Server Configuration The TFTP Server can save a running log of all requests into a file of your choice Do not log requests Log requests into the following file DK Cancel Help Result Do not log option is selected END OF STEPS Software Version Upgrading Background Version upgrading is required only when original version does not support some functions or equipment cannot run normally due to some reasons If version upgrading operations are not performed properly upgrading failure may occur or system may even break down Version upgrading must be done with complete knowledge principles and operations of ZXR10 GER router Version upgrading includes two cases 72 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 5 System Management Topic Page No Version Upgrade in case of System Abnormality 73 Version Upgrade in Case of Normal System
209. capsulation at layer 2 The difference is that 802 3 encapsulation is performed before PPP encapsulation and then the whole 802 3 frame is encapsulated in the PPP At this moment the PPP link also supports 802 1q just like a true Ethernet link Configuring POS Bridge This procedure describes how to configure POS Bridge ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To select a POS interface to be configured use interface command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 181 TABLE 181 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION COMMAND Command Command a Command Function Format Mode interface global config This selects a POS interface to be configured Result This selects a POS interface to be configured 2 To encapsulate vlan id in the sub interface use encapsulation dot1Q command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 182 TABLE 182 ENCAPSULATION DOT1Q COMMAND command Command Command Function Format Mode encapsulation interface This encapsulates vlan id in dot1Q config the sub interface Result This encapsulates vlan id in the sub interface 3 To configure the IP address of an interface use ip address command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 183 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Prerequisite Chapter 10 Bridge Configuration TABLE 183 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function This configures th
210. cation of BGP functions such as route aggregation and static route redistribution Adjacency As shown in Figure 104 EBGP adjacency is set up between R4 and R1 IBGP adjacency is set up between R1 and R2 and multi hop EBGP adjacency is set up between R2 and R5 Where suppose R4 has four static routes marked on the upper right corner of the figure In the configuration of R4 only network section 192 16 0 0 16 is aggregated and advertised and furthermore a route map is used to disable the advertisement of network section 170 16 10 0 24 by means of BGP Multihop The EBGP multi hop relation is set up between R2 and R5 Relation through R3 In this case before BGP configuration make sure that the IP addresses for the two routers to set up adjacency can implement mutual inter working FIGURE 104 BGP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE i Static route i 192 16 20 0 24 i 192 16 21 0 24 i 192 16 22 0 24 170 16 10 0 24 Configuration of R4 ZXR10_R4 config router bgp 2 ZXR10_R4 config router redistribute static ZXR10_R4 config router neighbor 172 16 20 2 remote as 1 ZXR10_R4 config router aggregate address 192 16 0 0 255 255 0 0 count 0 as set summary only ZXR10_R4 config router neighbor 172 16 20 2 route map torouteri out 252 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Introduction Purpose Prerequisites Chapter 16 BGP Configuration ZXR10_R4 config access list 1 permit 172 16 10
211. cess list number gt command in pimsm configuration mode as shown in Table 398 TABLE 398 ACCEPT RP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode wees Pimsm This filter the candidate RP i addresses advertised in the list configuration BSR message number gt g Result This filter the candidate RP addresses advertised in the BSR message To limit PIM SM neighbors use ip pim neighbor filter lt access list number gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 399 TABLE 399 IP PIM NEIGHBOR FILTER COMMAND Command Function Format Mode ip pim Interface NC neighbor configuration This limits the PIM SM neighbors Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps Command Command Format Mode filter Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration Command Function Result This limits the PIM SM neighbors With the view of security the PIM SM limits some routers to be neighbors at the interface Example On the fei 1 1 interface forbid the router restricted by acl 10 to become the PIM neighbor ZXR10 config access list 10 deny 10 1 1 1 05 0 0420 ZXR10 config finterface fei 1 1 ZXR10 config if fip pim neighbor filter 10 Configuring MSDP This topic describes how to configure MSDP Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enable the MSDP PEER to configure a MSDP neighbor use ip msdp peer lt peer address gt connec
212. channel POS48 interface card installs only on slot 5 or 6 though its port performance is two times greater than single channel POS48 interface card When this is installed on slot 5 no other modules can be installed on slot 7 When this is installed on slot 6 no other modules installs on slot 8 Figure 17 shows the RE 01P48 S15KLC card FIGURE 17 RE 01P48 S15KLC CARD RE 01P48 S15KLC RUN DATA LINK RE 01P48 S15KLC card specifications are as follows LC connector single mode fiber Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 15km and binary channel There are four LED indicators on the RE 01P48 S15KLC card Table 24 shows their functions TABLE 24 RE 01P48 S15KLC CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description This is constantly on if the interface card is working EM normally and this goes off if the interface card fails This is constantly on in the case of data sending and DATA receiving and this is off in the case if data sending or receiving fails This is constantly on if optical signals are available aD and this goes off if optical signals are not available This is constantly on in the case of successful PPP link LINK setup and This is off in the case of PPP link setup failure Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 29 30 Definition Panel Interfaces Indicators Definition Specification ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Exce
213. comes from its defaulted value zero Address family identifier AFI Specifies the address family used RIP is designed to carry routing information for several different protocols Each entry has an address family identifier to indicate the type of address being specified The AFI for IP is 2 Address Specifies the IP address for the entry Metric Indicates how many internetwork hops routers have been traversed in the trip to the destination This value Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 171 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA is between 1 and 15 for a valid route or 16 for an unreachable route Note Up to 25 occurrences of AFI Address and Metric Fields are permitted in single IP RIP Packet HIPv2 Packet Format Simple RIP 2 specifications described in RFC 1723 allows more Authentication information to be included in RIP packets and provides a simple Mechanism authentication mechanism that is not supported by RIP Figure 84 shows IP RIP 2 packet format FIGURE 84 IP RIPV2 PACKET 1 octet 1 octet 2 octet 2 octet 2 octet 4 octet 4 octet 4 octet 4 octet command version unused AFI route network subnet next metric field number field field tag address mask hop field field field field field field Following descriptions summarize IP RIP 2 packet format fields illustrated in Figure 84 Command indicates whether the packet is a
214. config if isis circuit type LEVEL 1 ZXR10_R5 config if exit Configuration of R6 ZXR10_R6 config router isis ZXR10_R6 config router area 02 ZXR10_R6 config router system id OODO OECD 53E0 ZXR10_R6 config router is type LEVEL 1 ZXR10_R6 config router exit ZXR10_R6 config interface fei 2 4 ZXR10_R6 config if ip address 192 168 13 6 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R6 config if ip router isis ZXR10_R6 config if isis circuit type LEVEL 1 ZXR10_R6 config router exit ZXR10_R6 config interface fei_2 8 ZXR10_R6 config if ip address 192 168 14 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R6 config if exit ZXR10_R6 config ip route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 14 10 ZXR10_R6 config router isis ZXR10_R6 config router default information originate ZXR10_R6 config router redistribute protocol static metric 10 ZXR10_R6 config if end Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 225 I ntroduction Contents Chapter 1 6 BGP Configuration Overview Border Gateway Protocol BGP is a main inter domain routing protocol BGP 4 is being widely applied to the Internet used to exchange network reachability information among ASs This chapter covers following topics TABLE 279 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 16 Topic BGP Overview Basic BGP Configuration BGP Route Advertisement BGP Aggregation Advertisement Configuring Multi Hop in EBGP Filtering Routes using Route Map Route Filtering by Means of NLRI Route Filtering by Means of AS PATH Local Preference
215. config router network 175 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 PE2 configuration E2 config interface loopback10 E2 config if ip address 1 1 1 3 255 255 255 255 E2 config fsinterface fei 3 1 E2 config if fip address 148 1 1 3 255 255 255 0 E2 config if mpls ip E2 config tinterface fei 3 2 E2 config impls ip E2 config mpls ldp router id loopback10 force E2 config mpls ldp target session 1 1 1 1 E2 config fsrouter ospf 1 E2 config router fdnetwork 1 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 PI EI Pl Pl Pl PI PE2 config if mpls xconnect 1 1 1 1 100 PI PI PI PI PI PI E2 config router network 148 1 1 0 020 0 2255 area 0 0 0 0 VPWS Maintenance and Diagnosis Purpose This procedure describes how to do VPWS configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 308 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Steps 1 Chapter 21 VPWS Configuration To check VC is established use show mpls I2transport vc command in privilged mode as shown in Table 349 TABLE 349 SHOW MPLS L2 TRANSPORT COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function show mpls I2transport Privilged vc This enables to check VC is established Result This enables to check VC is established To check VC binding information use show mpls I2transport binding command in privilged mode as shown in Table 350 TABLE 350 SHOW MPLS L2 TRANSPORT BINDING
216. constraints imposed by backbone capacity and topology MPLS traffic engineering a Enhances standard IGPs such as IS IS or OSPF to automatically map packets onto the appropriate traffic flows Transports traffic flows across a network using MPLS forwarding a Determines the routes for traffic flows across a network based on the resources the traffic flow requires and the resources available in the network Employs constraint based routing in which the path for a traffic flow is the shortest path that meets the resource requirements constraints of the traffic flow In MPLS traffic engineering the traffic flow has bandwidth requirements media requirements a priority versus other flows and so on Recovers to link or node failures that change the topology of the backbone by adapting to a new set of constraints The IETF has the following RFCs related to the MPLS TE a RFC3209 RSVP TE Extensions to RSVP for LSP Tunnels a RFC3630 Traffic Engineering TE Extensions to OSPF Version 2 MPLS Engineering Working MPLS is an integration of Layer 2 and Layer 3 technologies By making traditional Layer 2 features available to Layer 3 MPLS enables traffic engineering Thus you can offer in a one tier network what now can be achieved only by overlaying a Layer 3 network on a Layer 2 network MPLS traffic engineering automatically establishes and maintains the tunnel across the backbone using RSVP The path used by a
217. d eee 208 Table 256 Debug Ip Ospf Packet o occcccccoccccccccnnananananannnnnos 208 Table 257 Debug Ip Ospf LSA generation ses 208 Table 258 Debug Ip Ospf Events eeeeennnn nn 208 Table 259 Topics In Chapter 15 esses 211 Table 260 Config Terminal Command eese 214 Table 261 Is Is Command Window sese 214 Table 262 Area Command Window ssseseesess 214 Table 263 System Id Command Window 214 Table 264 Ip Router IS Is command Window 215 Table 265 Is Type Command c ccccoccnccnncnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnanes 216 Table 266 Is IS Psnp Interval Command 217 Table 267 Set Overload Bit esee 217 Table 268 Default Route Command Window ese 217 Table 269 Summary Address Command 218 Table 270 Interface Level Command ssuesssss 218 Table 271 Is Is Hello Multiplier seeseseeeeeeeeeee 219 Table 272 Is Is Lsp Interval eese 219 Table 273 Is Is Priority cesses emm 219 Table 274 Is Is Metric Command seeseeeeesse 220 Table 275 Is Is Csnp Command eee 220 Table 276 Is Is Authentication Command 221 Table 277 Intra Area Authentication Command 221 Table 278 Snp Aut
218. d 56 byt msg 2372 from peer SDP 105 2 2 2 SA TLV len 56 ec 4 RP 103 4 4 4 SDP 105 2 2 2 Peer RPF check failed for 103 4 4 4 we are RP END OF STEPS Static Multicast Maintenance and Diagnosis Use the show ip route multicast command to show static multicast routing information Multicast Configuration Example PIM SM The following is an example of the PIM SM configuration See Configuration Figure 111 for network topology Example 358 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration FIGURE 111 MULTICAST CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE Lo 10 1 1 3 32 10 10 30 2 24 10 10 30 1 24 4 Lo 10 1 1 1 32 j Lo 10 1 1 2 32 10 10 20 2 24 10 10 10 1 24 10 10 50 1 24 10 10 10 2 24 10 10 50 2 24 Multicast source Receiver R1 configuration ZXR1 ZXR1 ZXRI prio l config ip multicast routing l config router pimsm l config router rp candidate loopbackl eI K T o ZXR1 10 1 config router bsr candidate loopbackl ZXR10_R1 config interface loopbackl ZXR10_R1 config if ip address L0 sJ3f 255 255 255 255 ZXR10_R1 config finterface fei 1 1 ZXR10_R1 config if ip address LOs 10 100 1 LID AOL O 10 ZXR1O_R1 config if ip pim sm ZXR10_R1 config finterface fei 1 2 ZXR10_R1 config if ip address 10 10 20 1 255 2 OO 29540 ZXR1O_R1 config if ip pim sm ZXR10_R1 config finterface fei 1 3 ZX
219. d Command Function Format Mode interface This creates a tunnel and Global enables to enter into the lt tunnel configuration interface configuration mode of number gt g g the tunnel Result This creates a tunnel and enables to enter into the interface configuration mode of the tunnel 2 To configure a source address for the tunnel use tunnel source lt ip address gt command in tunnel configuration mode as shown in Table 315 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 18 GRE Configuration TABLE 315 TUNNEL SOURCE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode tunnel source tunnel This configures a source ip configuration address for the tunnel address Result This configures a source address for the tunnel 3 To configure a destination address for the tunnel use tunnel destination lt ip address gt command in tunnel configuration mode as shown in Table 316 TABLE 316 TUNNEL DESTINATION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode tunnel Interface This configures a destination destination ip address configuration address for the tunnel Result This configures a destination address for the tunnel 4 To configure the GRE tunnel to enable the key option and configure a key use tunnel key key command in tunnel configuration mode as shown in Table 317 TABLE 317 TUNNEL KEY COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This co
220. d Command Function Format Mode This enables to enter into the controller global config CPOS channel configuration mode Result This enables to enter into the CPOS channel configuration mode 2 To add a description for the interface use description command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 124 TABLE 124 DESCRIPTION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode Interface This adds a description for the description config interface Result This adds a description for the interface 3 To configure the router interface clock extraction use clock source command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 125 TABLE 125 CLOCK SOURCE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode clock Interface This configures the router 110 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Follow Up Action Purpose Prerequisite Steps 4 5 Chapter 6 Interface Configuration Command Command Command Function Format Mode source config interface clock extraction Result This configures the router interface clock extraction To set the threshold parameter use threshold command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 126 TABLE 126 THRESHOLD COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode threshold Interface This sets the threshold config parameter To set the frame type of cpos3 use sdh command in interface configuration mode as shown in
221. d Diagnosis 358 Multicast Configuration Example 358 Overview In a multicast network the sender sends a packet to multiple receivers in a multicast mode In such a situation the sender is called the multicast source Multiple receivers for the same packet are identified by same ID This is called the multicast group address In the IP address allocation scheme class D IP address 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 is just the multicast address The 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 255 and the 239 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 are used for the purpose of research and management If a host expects to receive multicast packets sent to a specific group it should intercept all the packets sent to the specific group When a host begins to receive multicast packet as a local member of a certain group the multicast router will sent queryig message periodically to check if there is any local member still in this multicast group If the router receives no Membership Reports in response it assumes that the multicast group has no local members and does not forward any multicast packets addressed to this group The Internet group management protocol IGMP is used in multicasts to complete this task In this way multicast routers can know the members of multicast groups over networks and there out determine whether to forward multicast packets to their networks When a multicast router receives a multicast packet it checks the multicast destination address of the packet and
222. d in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 95 TABLE 95 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Format Miri Command Function ip address ip address gt net This configures IP mask Interface broadcast address of an interface address gt 92 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 6 Interface Configuration Result This sets an ip address of E3 interface Non Channelized E3 configuration covers the following contents To enter into E3 configuration mode use controller e3 t3 lt interface name gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 96 TABLE 96 E1 CONFIGURATION COMMAND command command Command Function Format Mode controller e3 t3 lobal conh enters E1 controller lt interface gen contig configuration mode name gt Result This enables to enter into E3 configuration mode To configure non channelize mode of E3 interface use No channelized command in controller configuration mode as shown in Table 97 TABLE 97 CHANNELIZED COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode No controller This configures channelized channelized mode Result This sets E3 interface into channelized mode To configure frame mode of an E3 interface use framing unframe frame command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 98 TABLE 98 FRAMING COMMAND WINDOW Command Mode Command Function Command Format This configures framing mode o
223. d of a router since status of loopback interface address does not change unless the interface is disabled manually MPLS Maintenance and Diagnosis Refer to below procedure for MPLS maintenance amp diagnosis on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To display interfaces with MPLS enabled use show mpls interface lt interface number gt command in privileged mode as shown in Table 329 TABLE 329 SHOW MPLS INTERFACE COMMAND Command command Command Function Format Mode show mpls interface Privileged This displays MPLS lt interface interfaces number gt Result This displays MPLS interfaces 282 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH 2 3 Chapter 19 MPLS Configuration ZXR10 show mpls interface interface of LDP Interface IP Tunnel Operational fei 1 5 Yes 1dp No Yes fei 1 6 Yes 1dp No Yes ZXR1O To check MPLS LDP parameters that is LDP timer parameters use show mpls idp parameters command in privileged mode as shown in Table 330 TABLE 330 SHOW MPLS LDP PARAMETERS COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function This check the current Privileged parameter information about LDP show mpls Idp parameters Result This check the current parameter information about LDP ZXR10 show mpls ldp parameters Protocol version 1 Downstream label pool min label 16 max label 1048575 Session hold time 180 sec
224. d then takes the center point as the root point to distribute packets to various receiving ends of the group The group center point of the PIM SM is called the Rendezvous Point RP A network may have multiple RPs whereas a multicast group has only one RP A router can obtain the location of the RP by three methods Configure RPs manually and statically on the various routers running the PIM SM a PIM SM V1 obtains such locations through automatic RPs Auto RP dynamically a PIM SM V2 obtains such locations through the candidate RP RP notification The RPs with higher priority will become formal RPs The PIM SM V2 manually configures some routers running PIM SM as candidate BSRs BootStrap Router and selects the candidate BSR with the highest priority as the formal BSR The BSR is responsible for collecting the candidate RP information of each multicast router to find out what candidate RPs is in the multicast domain and notify them to all the PIM routers in the PIM domain in a unified way Each PIM router according to the similar Hash rules selects the one with the highest priority as the formal RP from the same candidate RP set Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 333 Candidate RPs Unicast Router 334 Member Report Message Pruning Message MSDP Purpose Prerequisite Steps ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA The candidate RPs
225. d transferable attributes The attributes do not need support in all BGP implementations However if an attribute is supported the attribute can be transferred to its BGP neighbor while attributes not supported by the current router need to be continuously transferred to other BGP routers gt Aggregator gt Community Optional and non transferred attribute The attribute indicates that routers that do not support the attribute need to be deleted gt MNMulti Exit Discriminator MED In addition to above attributes the weight attribute defined by CISCO is also a common attribute Basic BGP Configuration Refer to below procedure for BGP configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 280 TABLE 280 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To enable BGP use router bgp lt as number gt command in global config mode as shown in Table 281 TABLE 281 ROUTER BGP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode router bgp as Global config This enables BGP routing process number Result This establish BGP routing process 3 To configure BGP neighbor for BGP communication use neighbor l
226. dential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Sparse mode PI M SM Rendezvous Point RP Candidate BSRs Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration this group which is called pruning When the neighbor router reports that a receiver of this group occurs again this interface will be added to the multicast tree of this group accordingly which is called graft Multicast routing protocol dense mode contains the following Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP Multicast Open Shortest Path First MOSPF Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode PIM DM Multicast routing protocol sparse mode is applicable to the sparse distribution of multicast receivers in networks where the bandwidth will be greatly wasted if multicast routing trees are constructed in the same way used in the dense mode flooding In the sparse mode if a network device wants to receive multicast packets it must first apply to join a multicast routing tree Multicast routing protocol sparse mode contains the following Core Based Trees CBT Protocol Independent Multicast Sparse Mode PIM SM ZXR10 GER Router supported PIM SM The PIM SM sends multicast packets by using a shared multicast tree A shared multicast tree has a center point that is responsible for sending packets to all the source sending ends of a multicast group Each source sending end sends packets to the center point along the shortest path an
227. detailed configuration of each router is as follows Configuration of R1 ZXR10_R1 config tinterface fei 1 1 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 10 0 0 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 Ri1 config if ip ospf authentication key ZXR10 ZXR10 Ri config if exit ZXR10 Ri config zrouter ospf 1 ZXR10_Ri config router network 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 ZXR10 Ri1 config router area O authentication Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 195 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Related Information Purpose Prerequisites Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 10 0 0 2 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 R2 config if ip ospf authentication key ZXR10 ZXR10_R2 config if exit ZXR10_R2 config interface fei_1 2 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R2 config if ip ospf message digest key 1 md5 ZXR10 ZXR10_R2 config if exit ZXR10_R2 config router ospf 1 ZXR10_R2 config router network 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 ZXR10_R2 config router network 10 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 area 0 0 0 1 ZXR10_R2 config router area O authentication ZXR10_R2 config router area 1 authentication message digest Configuration of R3 ZXR10_R3 config interface fei_1 1 ZXR10_R3 config if ip address 10 0 1 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R3 config if ip ospf message digest key 1 md5 ZXR10 ZXR10_R3 config if exit ZXR10_R3 config interface fei_
228. dule 2 Figure 8 shows ZXR10 GERO4 hardware structure 14 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 3 Structure and Principles FIGURE 8 ZxR10 GERO4 HARDWARE STRUCTURE Service interface card Service interface card 1 2 System main control module 1 F A System main control module 2 N Service interface card Service interface card 3H 4H Power module 1 Power module 2 ZXR10 GERO8 Hardware Structure Figure 9 shows ZXR10 GERO8 hardware structure FIGURE 9 ZxR10 GERO8 HARDWARE STRUCTURE Service interface card 14 Service interface card 2 Service interface card 3 Service interface card A System main control module 2 System main control module 1 xoq ui Bnjd uey Service interface card 5 Service interface card 6 Service interface card 7 Service interface card 8 Power module 1 Power module 2 ZXR10 GER System Architecture ZXR10 GER system architecture topics are described in below table Topic Page No ZXR10 GERO2 04 SMNP 16 ZXR10 GERO2 04 SMNP Panel 15 ZXR10 GERO8 SMP 19 ZXR10 GERO8 SMP Panel 20 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 15 16 Definition Central Processor Module Network Processor Module Console Part
229. dure describes how to diagnose and maintain the VPLS configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 3i 4 To show the relevant configuration of VPLS use show vfi command in privilged mode as shown in Table 362 TABLE 362 SHOW VFI COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function show mpls I2transport Privilged vc This shows the relevant configuration of VPLS Result This shows the relevant configuration of VPLS To show the successfully established PW use show mpls I2transport vc vpls command in privilged mode as shown in Table 363 TABLE 363 SHOW MPLS L2TRANSPORT VC VPLS COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function show mpls I2transport Privilged vc vpls This show the successfully established PW Result This show the successfully established PW To view the MAC forwarding table of VPLS instances use show mac table vfi command in privilged mode as shown in Table 364 TABLE 364 SHOW MAC TABLE VFI COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode sl ER Privilged This shows the MAC forwarding vfi g table of VPLS instances Result This shows the MAC forwarding table of VPLS instances Open the VPLS debug information Following command is used debug mpls Idp I2vpn END OF STEPS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 317 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA This
230. e above example the routing protocol OSPF will be configured Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 59 60 Diagnose Command Background Purpose Prerequisite Steps ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA To return from the route configuration mode to the global configuration mode input the exit command and to return from the route configuration mode to the privileged mode directly input the end command or press CTRL Z Diagnosis Mode In the privileged mode execute the diagnose command to enter the diagnosis mode as shown in the following example ZXR10fdiagnose Test commands ZXR10 diag Diagnosis test commands are provided in the diagnosis mode These commands can be used to test cards used in a router including bus and connectivity tests In a diagnosis test it is much better not to conduct router configuration To return from the diagnosis mode to the privileged mode input the exit or end command or press CTRL Z Online Help Available Commands In any command mode enter a question mark after the prompt of the system and a list of available commands in the command mode is displayed With the context sensitive help function the keywords and parameter lists of any command can be obtained Refer to below procedure for taking online help regarding the router CLI commands Router command Line Interface has been accessed 1 T
231. e IP address ip address interface config of an interface Result This configures the IP address of an interface To configure the V_Switch forwarding table use vlan forwarding ingress command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 184 TABLE 184 VLAN FORWARDING INGRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode vlan This configures the V Switch forwarding interface config forwarding table ingress Result This configures the V Switch forwarding table To configure interface forwarding attributes use ip forwarding mode command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 185 TABLE 185 IP FORWARDING MODE command command Command Function Format Mode Ip z This configures the interface forwarding interface config forwarding attributes mode Result This configures the interface forwarding attributes END OF STEPS Configuring POS BCP Bridge This procedure describes how to configure POS Bridge ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enable BCP Bridge use ppp bcp enable command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 186 TABLE 186 PPP BcP ENABLE COMMAND Command Command A Format Mode Command Function ppp bcp interface config This enables the BCP Bridge enable Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 149 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Resu
232. e aging time of ARP table entries in ARP cache use arp timeout lt seconds gt in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 199 TABLE 199 ARP TIMEOUT COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode arp f timeout Interface This configures aging time of an lt seconds gt ARP table entries in ARP cache Result This sets aging time of ARP table entries in ARP cache 2 To delete all dynamic ARP table entries in Ethernet interface ARP cache use clear arp cache lt interface number gt in Exec mode as shown in Table 200 TABLE 200 CLEAR ARP CACHE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode cear arp This deletes all dynamic ARP cache Exec table entries in Ethernet lt interface interface ARP cache number gt Result This deletes dynamic arp table entries in Ethernet interface ARP cache END OF STEPS Example An ARP configuration example is given as follows ZXR10 config interface fei_1 1 ZXR10 config if arp timeout 1200 Following command can be used to view an ARP table entry of a designated Ethernet interface Command Command Command Function Format Mode show arp User This displays an ARP table interface entry of an Ethernet interface number RACE d Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 159 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 160 View ARP table of Ethernet interface fei 1 1 ZTEPA ZXR10z show arp fei 1
233. e amount of overhead increases exponentially because packets sent to all devices in a broadcast for example must be replicated for the number of devices receiving them Depending on the type of VPLS application MAC address learning and broadcast packet replication can become problematic VPLS Service Configuration The latest breakthrough in MPLS development is called Virtual Private LAN Service VPLS paying due respect to Ethernet technology Main idea is using IP MPLS routing protocols instead of conventional Spanning Tree algorithm and its known shortcomings and the use of MPLS labels to replace now traditional VLAN Ids Ethernet frames are switched on basis of their Layer 2 MAC address The major advantage here is the possibility of a point to multipoint interconnection just as in the case of a local network Bridged or Switched LAN In the MPLS IP core transport network VPLS support Ethernet transmission service in layer2 This procedure describes how to do VPLS configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 22 VPLS Configuration To create VFI use command vfi lt vfi name gt in global configuration mode This is shown in Table 355 TABLE 355 VFI COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode vnu global config This creates VFI name Result This creates VFI To enable MPLS use command
234. e fan and that of the air intake vent are installed in the fan plug in box Fan plug in box is designed with the modular structure which facilitates disassembling for maintenance and cleaning Panel of the fan plug in box of ZXR10 GER is shown in Figure 34 FiGURE 34 FAN PLUG IN Box N ZTE ZXR10 GER Fan plug in box panel has three indicators whose functions are given in Table 49 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 45 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA TABLE 49 FAN PLUG IN BOX INDICATORS Indicators Function Description Fan 1 fault indicator It is off when fan 1 works ial normally and is constantly on when fan 1 fails Fan 2 fault indicator It is off when fan 2 works FAN2 normally and is constantly on when fan 2 fails Equipment temperature alarm indicator It is off when the internal temperature of the equipment is normal HOT and the fan works normally It is constantly on when the internal temperature of the equipment exceeds 70 C ZXR10 GER slot assignment is also indicated on the fan plug in box 46 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 4 Usage and Operations I ntroduction Contents Modes Overview This chapter describes common configuration methods command modes and the use of command lines of ZXR10 GER routers This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 50 ToPics IN
235. e flash sign 2 To display subdirectory information files under a designated equipment or directory use dir lt directory name gt command as shown in Table 54 TABLE 54 DiR COMMAND WINDOW command command Command Function Format Mode dir This display files subdirectory lt directory Exec information under a designated name gt directory This displays information about flash files including attribute size time and names of the same Result This shows directory of flash files 3 To delete a file under a designated directory of current equipment use delete lt directory amp filename gt command as shown in Table 55 64 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 5 System Management TABLE 55 DELETE COMMAND WINDOW Command Format command Command Function Mode This deletes a file under a Exec designated directory of the current equipment delete lt directory amp filename gt lt directory amp filename gt parameter is from 1 80 characters Result A Prompt appears Are you sure to delete files with options Yes No To enter into specific directory use cd lt directory name gt command as shown in Table 56 TABLE 56 CD COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode cd This command enable to Enter into a lt directory Exec file directory of a designated file name gt equipment or the current equipment lt directory name gt represents 1 80 cha
236. e installation operational and maintenance activities To avoid personal injury and equipment damages safety precautions introduced in this manual must be followed Note ZTE Corporation assumes no responsibility for consequences resulting from violation of general specifications for safety operations safety rules for design production and use of equipment Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 1 Chapter 2 System Overview I ntroduction Enterprise Requirements ZXR10 GER Description Overview This chapter describes ZXR10 GER software and hardware functions Product Overview With the explosive growth of the Internet IP services on the Internet is no more restricted to pure data services multiple value added services such as voice and video services are also in rapid development These demands have brought higher requirements on the traditional routers High speed carriers are looking for having more router line interface rates and more powerful data processing capabilities to keep in step with the growth of broadband services Routers are required to act as the expansible infrastructure for running value added services over the Internet so as to satisfy the carriers practical requirements for continuously launching new network services to get business operation profits For all these requirements routers must be operable manageable customizable and expansible On the basis of rich ex
237. e used by neighboring OSPF routers use ip ospf authentication key password command in OSPF interface mode as shown in Table 239 TABLE 239 IP OSPF AUTHENTICATION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip ospf This configures password authentication OSPF for an interface of simple Interface password authentication key lt password gt type Result This assigns a password to be used by neighboring OSPF routers on a network segment that is using the OSPF simple password authentication 3 For enabling OSPF MD5 authentication on OSPF interface use ip ospf message digest key lt keyid gt md5 password delay lt time gt command in OSPF interface mode as shown in Table 240 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration TABLE 240 IP OSPF MESSAGE DIGEST KEY Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip ospf message This configures password pata e OSPF serial number pair for an Bist delay Interface interface of MD5 lt time gt authentication type Result This enables OSPF MD5 authentication The values for key id and key arguments must match values specified for other neighbors on a network segment END OF STEPS Example Figure 88 shows an OSPF authentication example The plain text authentication is used in area 0 while the MD5 encryption authentication is used in area 1 FIGURE 88 OSPF AUTHENTICATION EXAMPLE The
238. eaten 211 212 COM ipiis panirani 73 76 Configuring ATM 85 99 Configuring E1 Interface 85 87 Configuring E3 Interface 85 91 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces 85 Configuring Multilink 85 107 Configuring Packet over Sonet O 85 95 Configuring Smart Group 85 105 Configuring System Parameters E 80 Configuring VLAN Sub Interface vont ice e E 85 103 COS Em 273 CR ds 289 CRG ads TT 89 CREDP inier tn he nene 274 CSNP inicias 220 DOG acosa 215 216 222 DOCF ERR 224 DATA e 63 64 66 67 Data Backup and Recovery 78 DECESE estote daci n 132 DEPLOYMENT 82 Designate Router334 342 354 355 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 387 388 DI Puna 156 DIS roble 211 213 219 Dai a 104 DR PR PAPE 187 188 DWDM iussi ioci etuictoa casas 96 zio ey occ 223 EOLJ acc nenekd eni dsdc diei auis 223 BUE paraa ciales 224 EARLY 82 EBGP 227 228 230 234 235 238 244 245 246 248 249 250 252 294 296 2c ponian baii 178 EIGRP MNT 162 ENTER eenenee 74 76 78 299 FCS A 133 FEC eseeeeene 274 279 280 FLASH 74 75 76 77 78 79 as RM ACE 77 79 PU Lenis tes diua US 208 General Routing Encapsulationiii 265 267 268 269 270 A 89 AAA et inia 96 132 HELLO eris Dnus 212 HyperTerminal 73 IANA enin pet iia 290 IBGP 228 238 240 245 246 247 249 250
239. ected with the multicast source Thus the shortest path tree from the source to the RP is established After a DR or a router directly connected with multicast members receives the first multicast packet from the multicast group or the received packets reaches a threshold it can switch to the source based shortest path tree from the shared multicast tree Once switchover occurs the router will send a pruning message to the upstream neighbor requiring to leave the shared tree Multicast Source Discovery Protocol MSDP This is a mechanism used to connect multiple PIMSM domains It works over the transmission control protocol TCP and provides existence of multicast sources out of the PIM domain for the PIM SM Multicast Common Configurations Below procedure gives information about multicast common configurations Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Multicast common configuration is used to start the configuration shared by the multicast group management protocol and the Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration multicast routing protocol including multicast configuration showing multicast routing table and multicast forwarding table 1 To start the multicast protocol use ip multicast routing command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 376 TABLE 376 IP MULTICAST ROUTING COMMAND Command C
240. ectrical interfaces Panel Figure 20 shows RE 02GE E100RJ card FIGURE 20 RE 02GE E100RJ CARD RE 02GE E100RJ ACTIVE1 LINK1 ACTIVE2 LINK2 RUN n J LU Interfaces Table 28 shows the RE 02GE E100RJ card specifications TABLE 28 RE 02GE E100RJ CARD SPECIFICATIONS Port Type Description In compliance with IEEE 802 3u RJ45 connector 100Base T Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP are used Maximum transmission distance 80m Note When 100Base T port connects with a hub switch or router a crossover cable must be used when it connects with a host a straight through cable must be used Indicators RE 02GE E100RJ card has only one run indicator In addition each port has two indicators Table 29 describes their functions TABLE 29 RE 02GE E100RJ CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description This is constantly on if the interface card is working SUM normally and this goes off if the interface card fails ACTIVE per This indicates the transmission state of the current port link When this is on data transmission occurs This is constantly on in the case of successful PPP LINK per port link setup and This is off in the case of PPP link setup failure 32 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 3 Structure and Principles RE 02GE GBIC Definition This is a two port GBIC GE interface card providing two GE optical interfaces Panel Fig
241. eeeeeeeese 28 RE 01P48 S15KLC Card esee 29 RE 02CE3 75 Card di hen tenera ours 30 RE Q02GE Card ette ced eee rper ramas 31 RE 02GE E100RJ Card sese 32 RE 02GE GBIC Card seseeseeeeeee 33 RE 02P12 SEP CGBLFQ isnt en hn nenne n d 34 RE 04P3 SFP Card ii oci rnt ree rr dava eate 35 RE 08FE E1000RJ Card eese 36 RE O8FE SEP Card or dada 37 RE 16CE1 120DB44 Card esses 38 RE 16CE1 75DB44 Card cen 39 Panel View of the RE 16FE RJDBAA 40 ZXR10 GER Power Supply een 41 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 369 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Figure 30 Panel View of the GPWA ssssssssssssssssrrnrrsenrnrnreserns 41 Figure 31 Gpwd Panel oooccccccccnncncnnconncnncnnnnnnnnn eene 42 Figure 32 SPWA Panel View sssssm m 43 Figure 33 SPWD Panel eseesseese emm 44 Figure 34 Fan plug In Box esseeseeemm e 45 Figure 35 ZXR10 GER Configuration Mode eseenee 48 Figure 36 Connection Window ssseseee 49 Figure 37 Connect to Window sssessessemme 49 Figure 38 Com Properties Window eseeennn ee 50 Figure 39 Cli WindOW coincida nn 50 Figure 40 Expression Cli Window eene 51 Figure 41 Enabled Mode Cli Window eeennee 51 Figure
242. eeeene 83 Table 81 Config Terminal Command eee 85 Table 82 Interface Configuration Command 85 Table 83 Ip Address Command cc0ccccocccccnnncnoncncancncnnnnnnannnnans 86 Table 84 Duplex Command Window c eese 86 Table 85 Interface Autoconfig Command ss 86 Table 86 Config Terminal Command eene 88 Table 87 El Configuration Command esee 88 Table 88 Framing Command Window eene 88 Table 89 Channel Group Command eese 89 Table 90 Ip Address Command eee 89 Table 91 Config Terminal Command eeeeeenneee 91 Table 92 El Configuration Command sees 92 Table 93 Channelized Command suseeseeeeseess 92 Table 94 Framing Command Window eene 92 Table 95 Ip Address Command eese 92 Table 96 El Configuration Command eeeeeenenee 93 Table 97 Channelized Command sssssssssssrsrssrrrrrrrsrrnrrsrsrrnrs 93 Table 98 Framing Command Window eene 93 Table 99 Ip Address Command esee 94 Table 100 Config Terminal Command eese 97 Table 101 Interface Configuration Command 97 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 375 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume
243. eigbhour to each other Configure the mpls xconnect command in the interface which is connected to the CE in PE1 and PE2 FiGURE 108 VPWS SERVICE Fei 1 1 Fei 3 2 Fei 4 1 Fei 5 1 PE1 configuration El config finterface loopback10 El config if fip address 1 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 El config 4 interface fei 1 1 El config if mpls xconnect 1 1 1 3 100 El config interface fei 1 2 l config if ftip address 175 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 El config if mpls ip El config itmpls ip El config mpls ldp router id loopback10 force El config itmpls ldp target session 1 1 1 3 U CU CU CU CO sas ql El config router ospf 1 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 307 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA PE1 config router network 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 PE1 config router network 175 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 P configuration P config tinterface loopback10 P config if ip address 1 1 1 2 255 255 255 255 P config interface fei 2 1 P config 1f tip address 175 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 P config if mpls ip P config interface fei 2 2 P config 1f tip address 148 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 P config if mpls ip P config mpls ip P config mpls ldp router id loopback10 force P config router ospf 1 P config router network 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 P config router network 148 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 P
244. elci aiaia 16 ZXRTO GEROS SMP eret dl Cre nn ee un 19 ZXR10 GER08 SMP Panelis iaa 20 Line Interface Cards LIC 0ococccccccoccconconnnananan anar nnn 23 RE O0TA3 SFDB i desees su o A eat ios 24 RESOTEP3 SPP maior topo near gra de Lea aT Ero XA e a EROR a RORIS 25 RE 0fSGPABSSQ2KLC afi doe ere ace a errores EE E RR ERR Cees 26 RE O0fIGPAS STDKEC x ur e yr Cre a XP MEER ER ERN 27 RE OTPA8 SO2KLC 2 redde lia 28 RE OIPAS ST5KLEG aad eere iex ier eie e ERE eaa rra odd rre rer ER TP RAS 29 RE 02CE3 75 tidad nia Ie dba dep LE ARR dot Tika oe 30 RE 02GEL iiia err dines peptone eh ae Prae wea les aga e arose RR EY sica 30 RE 02GE ET100RJ i d eee RR qe ia nA ERE RE ERES er YR IRE 32 RE 02GE GBIG iiec Gi ra dre EY ex cdd a RR VR NN REA 33 RE 02PAX2 SFP iria Extr re on Ere pi vien Y Een p Y Y 34 RE 04P3 SEDB 5 ireess veu ocd epi ary MERE ETRPERE ERR DERA RET ERERRMRED C SR TAS 35 RE 0S8FE ETO0R J 0 sarria rere br apa arena 36 RE O08FE SEP cerei ht ip AA 37 RE 16CE1 120DBA44 vie ror ene errat ren AATA REDE RE YR 38 RE 16CE1 75DB44 iso eee dia 39 RE A46FE RJDBAMA ln erret etr Ere e e pa xke eii 40 Power Supply Module our 40 ZXR10 GERO2 04 Power Supply e a enn 41 ZXR10 GEROS Power Supply 2 eite eaa ra nya denn 43 Fan ultio cS 45 CH APLC 4 ener PER Fl Usage and Operations 1eeeneeeeeerennn AY OVER Sieh E A E EA 47 Basic Configuration Modes sss 47 Configuring COM P
245. elength 1310 SEFSEISM nm Max transmission distance 2km SFP 15KM LC connector single mode fiber Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 15km SFP 40KM LC connector single mode fiber Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 40km SFP 80KM LC connector single mode fiber Wavelength 1550 nm Max transmission distance 80 km Indicators pE 01A3 SFP card has three indicators on the card and their functions are shown in Table 18 TABLE 18 2 RE 01A3 SFP CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description This is constantly on if the interface card is working RUM normally and it goes off if the interface card fails This is constantly on in the case of data sending and DATA e m f receiving and this is off in the case of failure This is constantly on in the case of successful PPP link LINK setup and this is off in the case of PPP link setup failure 24 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 3 Structure and Principles RE 01CP3 SFP Definition This is a one port channelized POS3 interface card SCP3 which provides single port channelized OC3 interfaces The channel granular is 2 048MHz Panel Figure 13 shows the RE 01CP3 SFP card FIGURE 13 RE 01CP3 SFP CARD RE 01CP3 SFP RUN Interfaces RE 01CP3 SFP card adopts the SFP optical module and the supported port types are not identified on the panel Table 19 shows the relationship between the p
246. ember is received the host member will cancel it if not the host member will send the host report at the right time Therefore prolonging the max response time will accordingly increase the waiting chances for the group members of the network segment and spare down the burst rate of multiple host reports on the network segment According to the actual network conditions appropriately adjust parameter values of several timers related to the Querier Below procedure gives information about configuring IGMP timer Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To configure the IGMP query time interval use ip igmp query interval seconds command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 382 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 337 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA TABLE 382 IP IGMP QUERY INTERVAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip igmp query This configures the IGMP interval Interface config seconds query time interval Result This configures the IGMP query time interval 2 To configure the maximum response time value carried by query messages when they are sent by the IGMP use ip igmp query max response time seconds command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 383 TABLE 383 IP IGMP QuERY MAX COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip igmp This configures the maximum
247. en Ra Rer E gata n Re ni sa Rad Ea PY 278 MPLS Configuration Example sici n rre 280 MPLS Maintenance and Diagnosis ococcocnccnnnnnncnnnernnennnananennns 282 Chapter ZO nica acts a DA MPLS VPN Configuration 1e 287 lou ES 287 MPLS VPN OVERVIEW S mocseszisetiaia ei pbi de Ame ade ER epe E ER 287 Advantages of MPLS in IP based Network sesseeeeee 288 Related EMS Tarn eire ix rea rr ree ee e Er 289 VPN IPv4 Address and Route Distinguisher RD 289 Operational Principles of MPLS VPN sseenm 290 MPES VPN Config ratiOn eiecit iere rennen tae a dara ne ni Da ra 292 MPLS VPN Configuration Example sse 295 MPLS VPN Maintenance and Diagnosis esses 299 Chapter 2 RORIS VPWS Configuration enses 305 Ie ind eR 305 VPMS A tae eise gar hae re d n cedens d aaah ds 305 Configuring VPWS iecsse irae tao neant taa ed a E da ENANA 306 VPWS Maintenance and DiagnoSiS oooccccnccncnnnncnnnnnncnnnernnnnnos 308 ChOapter 22 EDT LL VPLS Configuration ccuoconcinciancanianscanio non ones niccaninads SLL Iul m 311 UP So 311 VPLS Service Configuration iue ad 312 VPLS Diagnosis and Maintenance esses 317 Chapter 2 e e iii 3 LO Traffic Engineering Configuration 319 OVERVIEW pas use cetur LA M ANE NUR E NE CERE ER MEAN NE EUER 319 OVERVIGW usi e ex crx
248. en traversed in trip to destination This value is between 1 and 15 for a valid route or 16 for an unreachable route NOTE Up to 25 occurrences of AFI Address and Metric Fields are permitted in single IP RIP Packet That is up to 25 routing table entries can be listed in a single RIP packet If the AFI specifies an authenticated message only 24 routing table entries can be specified Given that individual table entries aren t fragmented into multiple packets RIP does not need a mechanism to again make a sequence datagram s bearing routing table updates from neighboring routers This procedure describes how to configure RIP on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 3 Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 208 TABLE 208 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode To enable RIP use the following command as shown in Table 209 TABLE 209 ROUTER RIP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode router rip config This establish rip routing process Result This configures RIP routing process To associate a network with RIP routing process use command network ip address in RIP config mode as shown in Table 210 TABLE 240 NETWORK COMMAND WINDOW
249. ential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 263 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA This page is intentionally blank 264 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION I ntroduction Contents VPN Implementation Chapter 1 8 GRE Configuration Overview The chapter introduces several common VPN technologies and also describes the General Route Encapsulation GRE technology and its detailed configuration on ZXR10 GER This chapter covers following topics TABLE 313 ToPics IN CHAPTER 18 Topic Page No Introduction 265 GRE Overview 267 268 Configuring GRE GRE Maintenance and Diagnosis 270 GRE Configuration Example 270 Introduction VPN stands for Virtual Private Network which is relative to actual private networks An actual private network such as a banking network a governmental network or a large enterprise network implements interconnection via leased lines while a VPN is a private to transmit private data over the common Internet A virtual private network is not a real private network but can implement the functions of a private network VPN depends upon ISP Internet Service Provider and NSP Network Service Provider to set up a dedicated data communications network on a public network The description of IP based VPNs in the IETF Draft is as follows The use of the IP mechanism to simulate a Confidential and Proprietary Information of
250. er Supply Application requirements for general routers are fully considered Units in the design of ZXR10 GER system To satisfy the strict requirements on equipment reliability for telecommunications 40 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEdR Load Sharing GPWA Chapter 3 Structure and Principles the power part must be designed in hot backup mode and two power supply modes of 48V DC and 220V AC are designed Load sharing is adopted for the master slave power supply module working in normal state When a power supply becomes faulty the other module will supply the system with the power for normal operation Figure 29 shows the power supply of ZXR10 GER FIGURE 29 ZXR10 GER POWER SUPPLY System main control module 1 EM System main control module 2 Power module 1 Power module 2 eue dxpeq SurqoxAS interface card Power supply module is divided according to the GER models These are described below Topic Page No ZXR10 GERO2 04 Power Supply 41 ZXR10 GERO8 Power Supply 43 ZXR10 GERO02 04 Power Supply GPWA panel is shown in Figure 30 FiGURE 30 PANEL VIEW OF THE GPWA PWR AC E 2 5V CAUTION THE POWER CABLE A 1 OUT THIS POWER UNIT 100 240V 50 60Hz GPWA technical parameters are given below Technical Parameters Input voltage mono phase 110 220VAC410 Input current 110V 3 0A 220V 1 5A Frequency 65 5
251. er label that PE1 assigns to VPN routes Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 301 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDR PElfshow ip protocol routing vrf testl Routes of vpn status codes valid best Dest NextHop Intag Outtag RtPrf Protocol gt 10 1 1 0 24 TO Lo Oe 153 notag 0 connected gt 10 1 1 1 32 10 1 1 1 152 notag 0 connected gt 10 10 10 0 24 10 10 3 3 22 17 200 bgp int gt 100 1 1 0 24 T0 D 1 52 20 notag 20 bgp ext gt 200 1 1 0 24 10 10 3 3 21 27 200 bgp_int PE1 ZTE ZXR10 GER router provides debug commands for tracing routes advertised by MPBGP When using the debugging commands the reset command can be used to reset BGP sessions Command Command Command Function Format Mode This traces and displays update debug ip packets transmitted received by bgp Privileged a BGP connection and also updates displays route processing in packets reset Resets BGP session by software b P The commands has the function gp Privileged of enable for a neighbor neighbor already in non BGP session stop lt addr gt status Trace and display updates packets transmitted received by a BGP connection and also displays route processing in packets ZXR10 debug ip bgp updates ZXR10 config reset ip bgp neighbor 10 10 3 3 ZXR10 config 1d4h BGP 100 1 1d4h BGP 100 1 1d4h BGP 10 10 1d4h BGP 10 10 ZXR10 config
252. eral Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Table 390 Rp Candidate Command ccoccccconccconcncannnnnannnnnns 341 Table 391 Spt Threshold Infinity Command 341 Table 392 Ip Pim Dr Priority Command ssssss 342 Table 393 Ip Pim Bsr Border Command sss 342 Table 394 Packet Count Command ssseeseesses 343 Table 395 Ip Pim Query Interval Command 343 Table 396 Ip Pim Neighbor Filter Command 343 Table 397 Ip Pim Neighbor Filter Command 344 Table 398 Accept Rp Command coooconccncconcnnnnnanccnncnnnnnnnnnnos 344 Table 399 Ip Pim Neighbor Filter Command 344 Table 400 Ip Msdp Peer Command ssseeseeesss 345 Table 401 Ip Msdp Default Peer Command 345 Table 402 Ip Msdp Description Command 346 Table 403 Ip Msdp Originator Command 346 Table 404 Ip Msdp Sa Limit Command sss 347 Table 405 Ip Msdp Ttl Threshold Command 347 Table 406 Ip Msdp Redistribute Command 347 Table 407 Ip Msdp Sa Filter In Command 348 Table 408 Ip Msdp Sa Filter Out Command 348 Table 409 Clear Ip Msdp Peer Command 349 Table 410 Clear Ip Msdp Sa Cache Command
253. erminal command in privilged mode as shown in Table 110 TABLE 110 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To enter into interface configuration mode use interface lt interface number gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 111 TABLE 111 INTERFACE CONFIG COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode interface This enters into interface lt interface global config configuration mode number gt Result This enables to enter into interface configuration mode 3 To encapsulate dotiq VLAN ID use encapsulation dotiQ lt vian id gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 112 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 103 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA TABLE 112 ENCAPSULATE DOT1Q COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode encapsulation Interface This encapsulates VLAN ID dot1Q lt vlan id gt for a created sub interface Result This encapsulates dotiq vlan id for different VLANs 4 To configure an IP address of an interface use ip address lt ip address gt lt net mask gt lt broadcast address gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 113 TABLE 113 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Functio
254. erver enabl Result This enables the SSH function To configure the SSH authentication radius mode use ssh server authentication mode radius as shown below ZXR1O config ssh server authentication mode radius Note If the Local authentication mode is configured it is unnecessary to configure the Radius Server Result This configures the SSH authentication radius mode To configure the SSH authentication type as there are two types of SSH authentication modes pap and chap use ssh server authentication type chap command as shown below ZXR10 config ssh server authentication type chap Result This configures SSH authentication type To configure the SSH version 2 as two SSH versions are available version 1 and version 2 use ssh server version 2 command as shown below ZXR10 config ssh server version 2 Result This configures SSH version 2 To generate SSH key use ssh server generate key command as shown below ZXR10 config ssh server generate key Note No key is needed if SSH version 2 is selected They are only for version 1 Result This generates a SSH key To configure the ISP group number of SSH authentication use ssh server authentication ispgroup command as shown below ZXR10 config ssh server authentication ispgroup 1 Note If Local is selected in step 2 this step is unnecessary Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps
255. es by means of information elements with the transmission throughput of each channel up to 1 6 Gbps Control processor module and network processor module connects by means of a standard bus In the system two high performance RISC processors use to form a symmetrical dual CPU processing system Each processor bus connects with two network processor modules System is configured with a maximum of four network processor modules Control channel administrates the operation and initialization configuration for all other modules by using RISC CPU processor Figure 6 shows ZXR10 GERO8 system architecture Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 11 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 12 Definition Process Definition FIGURE 6 ZXR10 GERO8 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ZTE Service Service interface card HB Network Network gt interface card A processor je A processor Service H gt __ module El module Lage Service interface card El interface card Th 5 o AJo Service Network E Network hb Servi interface card 2 GINMSS processor eH gt processor TA gt gt module module Service A interface card Service interface card E Protocol processor module 4 d Control processor module lt yy gt Forwarding channel
256. estination Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration VPN forwarding table contains a label corresponding to the VPN IP address Label is used to send the data to the corresponding destination Since the label is used instead of the IP address a user can maintain its dedicated address structure without the need of data transfer by means of Network Address Translation NAT According to the data ingress the corresponding router will select a special VPN forwarding table that only contains a valid destination address in VPN CE advertises routing information on the user s network to the PE by means of static route default route or routing protocols RIP OSPF IS IS and BGP Meanwhile extended multi protocol BGP is used between PEs to transfer VPN IP information and the corresponding label VPN label called internal layer label hereinafter Traditional IGP is used between PE and P to learn the routing information from each other and the LDP is used for the binding of routing information and label a label on the backbone network called external layer label hereinafter In this case basic network topology and routing information of CE PE and P routers have already been formed A PE router has the routing information of the backbone network and the routing information of each VPN When a CE user on a VPN enters the network the system can identify to which VPN the CE belongs on the interface between the CE and the PE and will further re
257. eter contained address config in the Hello message interface lt ip g address gt Result This configures the transport address parameter contained in the Hello message Note By default ZXR10 GER regards the router ID on an interface in frame mode as transport address and advertises the address in Hello message Above command can change default behavior of router on an interface If parameter interface is used the LDP will advertise the IP address of the interface in the Hello message of the interface If parameter lt ip_address gt is used LD will advertise designated IP address in Hello message on the interface To designate the IP address of an interface as the router ID of the LDP use mpls Idp router id lt interface number gt force command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 325 TABLE 325 MPLs LDP ROUTER ID COMMAND command Command Command Function Format Mode mpls Idp router id This designates the IP address lt interface global config of an interface as the router ID number of the LDP force Result This designates the IP address of an interface as the router ID of the LDP To control the LDP to create the FEC item that is FEC filtering policy for which destination network sections use mpls Idp access fec for prefix access list host route only command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 326 TABLE 326 MPLS LDP ACCESS FEC COMMAND Command Command c dF 3 Forma
258. etwork 100 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 area 0 R2 config router network 10 10 23 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 R2 config router exit R2 config R3 configuration R3 config int fei_3 1 ip address 10 10 2323 255 255 255 0 mpls traffic eng tunnels ip rsvp bandwidth 30000 10000 mpls traffic eng tunnels exit terface loopbackl ip address 2990 S20 0 200 DO exit R3 config router ospf 3 100 1 L 3 ter mpls traffic eng router id ter mpls traffic eng area 0 ter network 100 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 area ter network 10 10 23 0 0 50 00 255 ter exit Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 327 328 Y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDH Configure the explicit path Tunnel on R1 l config in l config if l config 1if l config 1if l config 1if PFD J V y Ww explicit pa l config 1if R1 R1 config R1 config ip address 100 1 l config ip ddress 100 1 D w L config in config if l config if l config if l config if explicit pa RI DW WD DW l config if l config ip R R1 config R1 address 10 10 R1 config tip address 10 10 terfac tunnel21 tunnel mode mpls traffic eng ip address 1 1 21 1 255 255 255 0 tunnel destination ipv4 100 1 1 3 tunnel mpls traffic eng path option th identifier 21 exit explicit path identifier 21 next 1 2 loose explicit path identifier 21
259. f E3 interface When non framing mode global config is configured system automatically create a sub channel with channel ID 1 framing unframe frame Result This sets framing mode of an E1 interface To configure an ip address for E3 interface use ip address ip address net mask lt broadcast address gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 99 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 93 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 94 TABLE 99 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Format Mode ip address ip address net mask Interface lt broadcast address gt ZTE Command Function This configures IP address of an interface Result This sets an ip address of E3 interface END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 59 ce3_5 2 interfaces of two ZTE ZXR10 GER units are interconnected Channelized configuration is used FIGURE 59 E3 EXAMPLE ce3_5 2 ce3_5 2 RI Configuration of R1 R2 ZXR10_R1 config controller ce3 5 2 ZXR10_Ri config control channelized el ZXR10_Ri config control e1 2 framed ZXR10_Ri config control e1 3 framed ZXR10_Ri config control e1 4 framed ZXR10_R1 config control el 5 framed ZXR10_Ri config control e1 6 framed ZXR10_Ri config control e1 7 framed ZXR10_Ri config control e1 8 framed ZXR10_Ri config control e1 9 framed ZXR10_Ri config control e1 ZXR10_Ri config con
260. fication status as shown in Table 62 Result Parameter modification status window is displayed 5 Change the boot mode to Boot from the background TFTP change the address of the TFTP Server to corresponding TFTP Server Computer System IP address as shown in Table 62 Result Boot mode is changed from normal boot to TFTP boot 6 Change Client address and gateway address to address of built in Ethernet interface and configure corresponding subnet mask as shown in Table 62 TABLE 62 VERSION UPGRADING COMMAND WINDOW ZXR10 Boot c clear field go to previous field D quit Boot Location 0 Net 1 Flash 0 0 indicates booting from the background TFTP and 1 indicates booting from the FLASH Client IP 0 bootp 168 4 168 168 Corresponding to the address of the management Ethernet port Netmask 255 255 0 0 Server IP 0 bootp 168 4 168 89 Corresponding to the address of the background TFTP Server Gateway IP 168 4 168 168 The gateway address is the address of the management Ethernet port Boot Path zxr10 zar Use the default value Enable Password Use the default value Enable Password Confirm Use the default value ZXR10 Boot Result The following prompt ZXR10 Boot appears 7 Enter Q and press ENTER System boots with the image from the background TFTP Server automatically as shown in below table ZXR10 Boot Loading get file zxr10 zar 15922273 successfully file size 15
261. follows Configuration of R1 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 203 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA ZXR10_Ri config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10_R1i config if ip address 10 0 0 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R1 config if exit ZXR10 Ri config zrouter ospf 1 ZXR10_Ri config router network 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 10 0 0 2 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R2 config if exit ZXR10_R2 config interface fei_1 2 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 10 0 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R2 config if exit ZXR10_R2 config router ospf 1 ZXR10_R2 config router network 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 ZXR10_R2 config router network 10 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 area 0 0 0 1 ZXR10_R2 config router area 1 virtual link 10 0 1 2 Configuration of R3 ZXR10_R3 config interface fei_1 1 ZXR10_R3 config if ip address 10 0 1 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R3 config if exit ZXR10_R3 config interface fei_1 2 ZXR10_R3 config if ip address 10 0 2 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R3 config if exit ZXR10_R3 config router ospf 1 ZXR10_R3 config router network 10 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 area 0 0 0 1 ZXR10_R3 config router network 10 0 2 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 2 ZXR10_R3 config router area 1 virtual link 10 0 0 2 Related For additional information on OSPF additional configurations Information please refer to below procedures Redistributing Othe
262. fore OSPF defines a Designated Router DR and a Backup Designated Router BDR The DR and BDR must form an adjacent relation with each OSPF router on network and each Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 187 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I Router Priority and DR Election OSPF Area Backbone Area LSA Type and Flooding ZTE OSPF router forms an adjacent relation with only DR and BDR If the DR stops work the BDR will become a DR Each router interface has a priority which will affect the router s capability of becoming a DR or BDR on the network to which router is connected A router priority is expressed with an eight bit unassigned integer ranging from O to 255 the default value is 1 Upon DR election the router with highest priority will become DR If two routers have same priority the one with the highest IP address will become the DR The router with priority O cannot be DR or BDR OSPF areas divide a network into certain smaller parts to reduce the information volume stored and maintained in each router Each router must have complete information about area where it is located The information among different areas is shared and routing information can be filtered on edges of areas to reduce routing information volume stored in router An area is identified with a 32 bit unsigned integer Area O is reserved and is used to indicate backbone network
263. formation that is then passed along to other routers If a router cannot route a packet packet has to be dropped However this is not hoped that packet is dropped in an unknown destination To support complete connection of router this must have a route connected to a network If router wants to keep complete connection and meanwhile does not need to record each independent route default route can be used By use of default route an independent route can be designated to indicate all other routes Refer to below procedure for configuring default route on ZTE ZXR10 GER Routers Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 205 TABLE 205 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To configure default route use ip route lt prefix gt lt net mask lt interface number gt lt forwarding address gt Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 165 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA RIP Protocol OSPF Protocol lt distance metric gt globle tag lt tag gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 206 TABLE 206 DEFAULT ROUTE COMMAND Command Mode Command Comma
264. g versus the T1 which carries signals at 1 544 Mbps 24 channels at 64Kbps E1 and T1 lines may be interconnected for international use There are two types of E1 working modes a Channelized Mode a Non Channelized Mode This is physically divided into 32 timeslots corresponding to numbers 0 through 31 Bandwidth of each timeslot is 64Kbps Timeslot O is used to transmit synchronous information Except Timeslot O all the other timeslots can be bound into groups Each group of timeslots can serve as a sub interface whose logical features are also equivalent to those of a synchronous serial port An E1 interface can be divided into a maximum of 31 sub interfaces Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 87 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Non Channelized Mode Purpose Prerequisite Steps This is equivalent to an interface with a data bandwidth of 2 048Mbps without timeslot division Logical features are similar to those of a synchronous serial port El interface support data link layer protocols such as PPP MPPP and network protocols such as IP This procedure describes how to do El Configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER 1 Router Command Line Interface has been accessed El cable is connected and running Enter into configuration mode by writing following command as shown in Table 86 TABLE 86 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function
265. g of the mails to individual destinations The basic concept of MPLS is the assignment of labels that is labels are bound with network layer routes Basic MPLS routing mode is routing hop by hop which permits a forwarding mechanism simpler than packets and can implement faster routing Since the common label allocation method and generic routing protocols are used in multiple types of media such as packets cells and frames MPLS supports efficient definite routing mode such as QoS that can be used to fulfill different purposes common traffic engineering method and other operation modes Label Distribution Protocol LDP LDP Label Distribution Protocol is the core protocol of MPLS LDP works in conjunction with standard network layer routing protocols and distributes label information among different pieces of equipment on an MPLS network in the connectionless working mode MPLS also can use the work mode in which resources are reserved but no definite connection is set up that is protocols RSVP and RSVP LSP TUNNEL are used to serve traffic engineering In addition CRLDP Constrained based Routing LDP executes some routes with definite paths LDP divides Forwarding Equivalence Class FEC based on IP prefixes In an MPLS network internal gateway protocols are used to discover the information about IP prefixes When a Label Switch Router LSR discovers such information it will distribute a label to the FEC and advertise t
266. g router network 1 1 fig router network 148 fig router network 175 2944 1 2 2955 255 255 0 8 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area 0 0 0 0 PE2 configuration E2 config vfi E2 config vfi El config vfi El config vfi El config vfi E2 config if E2 config if E2 config if E2 config E2 config if E2 config E2 config if E2 config E2 config E2 config E2 config P E P Z P P E P Z P P P P P P P P E P P P P P P 0 0 0 0 E2 config vfi vpls a vcid 100 XUAS config vfi mac timeout 180 peer 1 1 1 maxmac 1000 mpl mpl exit El config bras XUAS config bras vfi account group 100 E2 config interface loopback10 ip address E2 config interface fei 3 1 ip address mpls ip interface fei_3 2 xconnect vfi interface fei 3 3 xconnect vfi ls ip mpl ls ldp target router ospf 1 E2 config router network 1 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 E2 config router network pwtype ethernet ls ldp router id loopback10 force session 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 255 255 2255 255 148 1 1 3 255 255 255 0 vpls a vpls a 148 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 area Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 22 VPLS Configuration VPLS Diagnosis and Maintenance This proce
267. g router neighbor 3 3 3 1 route map setmetricout out ZXR10_R4 config router neighbor 1 1 1 1 remote as 300 ZXR10_R4 config route map setmetricout permit 10 ZXR10_R4 config route map set metric 200 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config router bgp 400 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 4 4 4 2 remote as 100 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 243 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Introduction Purpose Prerequisites Steps ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 4 4 4 2 route map setmetricou out ZXR10_R2 config route map setmetricout permit 10 ZXR10_R2 config route map set metric 50 In the following the command bgp always compare med is used to compare the metric values of R1 and R2 by force Since the metric value of R2 is less than that of R3 for updates of 180 10 0 0 R1 will select update from R2 instead of R3 Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 2 2 2 1 remote as 300 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 3 3 3 2 remote as 300 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 4 4 4 1 remote as 400 ZXR10_R1 config router bgp always compare med Community String Attribute The community string attribute is a transferred optional attribute 0 to 4 294 967 295 The decision on a group of routes can be made according to the community attribute The definitions of several known and accepted community attributes are given as follo
268. g the first interface of the Ethernet interface module in slot 2 ZXR10 config 1f A user can modify interface parameters in the interface configuration mode For details refer to Chapter 6 Chapter 6 Interface Configuration To return from the interface configuration mode to the global configuration mode input the exit command and to return from the interface configuration mode to the privileged mode directly input the end command or press CTRL Z Channelized Configuration Mode In the global configuration mode execute the control command to enter the channelized configuration mode as shown in the following example ZXR10 config controller cel 1 1 cel 1 1 is the interface name indicating the first interface of the El interface module in slot ZXR10 config control The interface cards requiring channelized configuration include cel ce3 and cp3 In the above example cel is to be configured To return from the channelized configuration mode to the global configuration mode input the exit command and to return from the channelized configuration mode to the privileged mode directly input the end command or press CTRL Z Route Configuration Mode In the global configuration mode execute the router command to enter the route configuration mode as shown in the following example ZXR10 config router ospf 1 ZXR10 config router Routing protocols used include RIP OSPF IS IS and BGP In th
269. group list 336 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Introduction Query Messages Maximum Response Time Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration lt access list number gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 381 TABLE 381 IP IGMP IMMEDIATE Command Command A Command Function Format Mode ip igmp This configuration removes a immediate group immediately when that leave Interface config group falls into the group group list allowing range lt access list number gt Result This configuration removes a group immediately when that group falls into the group allowing range END OF STEPS Configuring IGMP Timer After booting the IGMP on the multicast router interface connected with the shared network segment select the optimum one as the Querier of the network segment responsible for sending the query message to obtain the information of group members After sending query messages the Querier will wait for the member report of the receiving host for some time The duration is the max response time value carried when sending query messages The default value is 10 seconds Upon receiving query messages the host member on the network segment will reduce a random deviation value based on the maximum response time and take the result as its own response time During the period if the report of another host m
270. gures tag bit for mentioning overload condition to other routers To generate default route in IS IS domain use command default information originate always metric lt metric value gt metric type lt type value gt level 1 level 1 2 level 2 in IS IS config mode as shown in Table 268 TABLE 268 DEFAULT ROUTE COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Function Command Format Mode default IS IS information config originate always metric lt metric This defines the OL tab bit value gt metric type of IS IS lt type value gt level 1 level 1 2 level 2 This command is used to redistribute default routes in routing entries metric lt metric value gt parameter range is from lt 0 4261412864 gt Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 217 218 Related I nformation Purpose Prerequisites Steps 5 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA metric type lt type value gt parameter defines external lt Set IS IS external metric type internal Set IS IS internal metric type gt Result This configures default route information in IS IS routing table To summarize some entries in IS IS routing table use command summary address lt ip address gt lt net mask gt value level 1 level 1 2 level 2 in IS IS config mode as shown in Table 269 TABLE 269 SUMMARY ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode summary
271. he Open Shortest Path First OSPF This chapter describes the Intermedia System Intermedia System IS IS protocol configuration This chapter describes Border Gateway Protocol BGP that is a main inter domain routing protocol BGP 4 is being widely applied to the Internet used to exchange network reachability information among ASs This chapter describes policy routing and relevant configurations on ZXR10 GER Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEPA Chapter Chapter 18 GRE Configuration Chapter 19 MPLS Configuration Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration Chapter 21 VPWS Configuration Chapter 22 VPLS Configuration Chapter 23 Traffic Engineering Configuration Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration About This Manual Summary This chapter describes several common VPN technologies and also describes the General Route Encapsulation GRE technology and its detailed configuration on ZXR10 GER This chapter describes the basic concepts of Multi Protocol Label Switching MPLS technology and MPLS configuration and troubleshooting on ZTE ZXR10 GER router This chapter describes the basic concepts of L3 MPLS VPN and the configuration and troubleshooting of MPLS VPN on ZTE ZXR10 GER router This chapter describes the VPWS protocol and its related configuration on the ZXR10 GER This chapter describes VPLS Both VPLS and VPWS are technologies for implementing MPLS
272. he case of successful PPP link LINK setup and This is off in the case of PPP link setup failure Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 27 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Definition Function Panel Interfaces Indicators RE 01P48 S02KLC This is a one port POS48 binary channel optical interface card providing one channel standard OC 48c STM 16c POS optical interface In the receiving direction this cad extracts payload from 2 5 Gbps optical signals and provides PPP packets for the packet processing card through the bus In the transmitting direction the card receives PPP packets from the packet processing card through the bus This card maps the packets into SONET SDH virtual containers VC 4 16c and then sends the packets through the 2 5 Gbps optical interface Note Binary channel POS48 interface card installs only on slot 5 or 6 though its port performance is two times greater than single channel POS48 interface card When this is installed on slot 5 no other modules can be installed on slot 7 When this is installed on slot 6 no other modules installs on slot 8 Figure 16 shows the RE 01P48 SO2KLC card FIGURE 16 RE 01P48 S02KLC CARD RE 01P48 S02KLC RUN DATA LINK RE 01P48 SO2KLC card specifications are as follows LC connector single mode fiber Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 2km and binary chan
273. he fixed cell size ensures that time critical information such as voice or video is not adversely affected by long data frames or packets The header is organized for efficient switching in high speed hardware implementations and carries payload type information virtual circuit identifiers and header error check FIGURE 64 ATM FIXED LENGTH CELLS Virtual Circuits ATM standards defined two types of ATM connections virtual path connections VPCs which contain virtual channel connections VCCs A virtual channel connection or virtual circuit is the basic unit which carries a single stream of cells in order from user to user A collection of virtual circuits can be bundled together into a virtual path connection A virtual path connection can be created from end to end across an ATM network In this case the ATM Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 99 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ATM Standards 100 Purpose Prerequisite Steps ZTEPA network does not route cells belonging to a particular virtual circuit All cells belonging to a particular virtual path are routed the same way through the ATM network thus resulting in faster recovery in case of major failures Service Class Constant Bit Rate CBR Variable bit rate non real time VBR NRT Variable bit rate real time VBR RT Available bit rate ABR Unspecified b
274. he label to all upstream LDP neighbors Hop by hop dynamic label distribution of LDP leads to the generation of a series of labeled paths called Label Switched Paths LSPs Along these LSPs the label traffic can pass the MPLS backbone to reach a designated destination With this capability a service provider can deploy MPLS based IP VPN as well as the IP ATM service over multi proxy MPLS networks The propagation process of IP packets through the MPLS backbone is as follows An ingress border LSR receives a packet puts the packet into an FEC and then uses the outgoing label corresponding to the FEC to label the packet For a unicast IP route based on destination address the FEC corresponds to a destination subnet Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH MPLS Operational Principles MPLS in frame relay Labels Chapter 19 MPLS Configuration A backbone LSR receives the labeled packet searches the label forwarding table and uses a new outgoing label to replace the label in the input packet An egress border LSR receives the labeled packet deletes the label and performs the traditional L3 search for the IP packet Operational Principles of MPLS MPLS is a label based IP routing method These labels can be used to stand for hop by hop mode or explicit routes and also to indicate QoS VPN and the transmission of special types of traffic or special user s traffic on a network
275. he priority The metric value cannot be transplanted to a third AS that is if a router receives an update configured with metric value and also the update needs to be transferred to a third AS the router will transfer the update with the default metric value As shown in Figure 100 R1 receives updates of 180 10 0 0 from R2 R3 and R4 simultaneously By default only the metric values of neighbors R3 and R4 in the same AS are compared The metric value of R3 is less than that of R4 so for the updates of 180 10 0 0 R1 will only accept the update of R3 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 16 BGP Configuration FIGURE 100 MED ATTRIBUTE In the following the route map command is used to configure the MED value Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 2 2 2 1 remote as 300 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 3 3 3 2 remote as 300 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 4 4 4 1 remote as 400 Configuration of R3 ZXR10_R3 config router bgp 300 ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 2 2 2 2 remote as 100 ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 2 2 2 2 route map setmetricout out ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 1 1 1 2 remote as 300 ZXR10_R3 config route map setmetricout permit 10 ZXR10_R3 config route map set metric 120 Configuration of R4 ZXR10_R4 config router bgp 300 ZXR10_R4 config router neighbor 3 3 3 1 remote as 100 ZXR10_R4 confi
276. he query interval of a specific IGMP group END OF STEPS Configuring PIM SM PIM SM configuration covers the following contents This topic describes how to configure PIM SM in ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enable the PIM SM use router pimsm command in 3 global configuration mode as shown in Table 386 TABLE 386 ROUTER PIMSM COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode router Global config This enables the PIM SM pimsm Result This enables the PIM SM To add an interface running the PIM SM use ip pim sm command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 387 TABLE 387 IP Pim SM COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function This adds an interface running ip pim sm Interface config the PIM SM Result This adds an interface running the PIM SM To configure the static RP use static rp lt ip address gt group list lt access list number gt priority priority command in pimsm configuration mode as shown in Table 388 TABLE 388 STATIC RP COMMAND Command Format command command Mode Function static rp lt ip Pimsm This configures the Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 339 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Static RP Mechanism Default Priority Command Format command command Mode Function address gt group list configuration static RP acce
277. he share multicast tree constructs for each multicast group This tree is shared by all members of a group Namely a shared multicast tree is shared by G instead of being constructed for each pair S G Each device wanting to receive the multicast packets of the group must explicitly join the shared multicast tree The shared multicast tree uses a router or a group of routers as the center of the multicast tree All sources of the group send multicast packets to receivers by sending them to the center in a unicast mode first and then forward them from the center along the shared multicast tree in a multicast mode Multicast Routing Protocol Multicast routing protocol is responsible for create multicast trees by exchanging information between routers Different multicast routing protocols feature different usages Multicast routing protocols are divided into two categories based on the distribution of multicast users in networks dense mode and sparse mode Multicast routing protocol dense mode is based on dense distribution of multicast users in networks and redundant bandwidth It periodically floods multicast packets to the entire network to create and maintain multicast trees That is routers that run multicast routing protocol flood the received multicast packets to all the other interfaces When a neighbor router at an interface reports no existence of a group this interface will be deleted from the multicast tree of Confi
278. hello for sending the LDP hello holdtime global config discovery message and the lt holdtime gt interval timeout time of the lt interval gt discovered LDP neighbor Result This configures the interval for sending the LDP hello discovery message and the timeout time of the discovered LDP neighbor END OF STEPS MPLS Configuration Example Figure 106 shows a simple network where frame interfaces are used for MPLS forwarding Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 19 MPLS Configuration FIGURE 106 MPLS CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE fei 1 5 10 10 12 2 24 fei 1 6 10 10 23 2 24 fei 1 1 10 10 12 1 24 fei 3 1 10 10 23 3 24 Basic configuration tasks of three routers are to ZX ZX ZX ZX ZX ZX ZX ZX ZX Enable MPLS hop by hop forwarding on POS links between R1 and R2 and that between R2 and R3 Configure LDP label distribution between R1 and R2 and that between R2 and R3 Configure the IP address of a loopback interface to serve as the router ID of the LSR Configuration of R1 RIQ R10 R10 RIO R10 R10 R10 RIO R1 config mpls ip R1 config interface Loopbackl Rl config if fip address 10 10 1 1 255 255 255 255 R1 config interface fei_1 1 R1 config if ip address 10 10 12 1 255 255 255 0 R1 config if mpls ip R1 config mpls ldp router id loopbackl R1 config router ospf 1 R10 R1 config router network 10
279. hentication Command Window 221 Table 279 Topics In Chapter 16 eeeennnne 227 Table 280 Config Terminal Command eese 229 Table 281 Router Bgp Command eese 229 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Table 282 Table 283 Table 284 Table 285 Table 286 Table 287 Table 288 Table 289 Table 290 Table 291 Table 292 Table 293 Table 294 Table 295 Table 296 Table 297 Table 298 Table 299 Table 300 Table 301 Table 302 Table 303 Table 304 Table 305 Table 306 Table 307 Table 308 Table 309 Table 310 Table 311 Table 312 Table 313 Table 314 Table 315 Table 316 Table 317 Tables Bgp Neighbour Command sssssssses 230 Bgp Network Command sseesssessses 230 Bgp Network Command sees 231 Bgp Redistribute Command sssss 231 Bgp Aggregate Address Command 233 Multihop Command eseseeen mnn 235 Route Map Command eeeeeeeeeen nnns 236 Neighbor Route Map Command 236 Neighbor Route Map Command 237 Access List Command seeseeseseesee 238 Ip As Path Access List Command s 239 Bgp Default Local Preference eeeseeee 240 Bgp Always Med Attribute Command 242 Send Community Attribute Command
280. hrough console part by using terminal emulation software like HyperTerminal CONSOLE port is a RS 232 DB9 TO RJ45 which is connected with background administration terminal through serial cable Connection cable contains two ends one with DB 9 and another is RJ45 Cable sequence is shown in Table 6 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH AUX Port 10 100 1000 Base T Ethernet Interface Chapter 3 Structure and Principles TABLE 6 CABLE SEQUENCE RJ 45 End Signal DB9 End 1 7 2 6 3 TXD 2 4 GND 5 5 GND 5 6 RXD 3 7 4 8 8 1 9 AUX port enables to monitor the equipment remotely AUX port is a DBO male port pin Therefore it needs to be matched with the DB9 female port interpolation Table 7 shows AUX port configuration TABLE 7 AUX PORT CONFIGURATIONS SMP AUX Signal DB9 End Signal 1 T232DCD 7 RTS 2 T232RX 3 TX 3 T232TX 2 RX 4 T232DTR 6 DSR 5 GND 5 GND 6 T232DSR 4 DTR 7 T232RTS 1 DCD 8 e 8 Not connected 9 T232RI 9 RI 10 100 1000Base T Ethernet interfaces are available on SMNP front panel This port is a management port connecting the system to the background This interface can serve as an out band router NM port The features of 10 100 1000Base T Ethernet interface are listed in Table 8 TABLE 8 ETHERNET PORT SPECIFICATIONS Port Type Specifications In compliance with IEEE 80
281. hs use command Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 219 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTE isis metric lt metric value gt level 1 level 2 in IS IS interface config mode as shown in Table 274 TABLE 274 Is Is METRIC COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode 1515 meme mete IS IS This defines the metric value level interface i value of an interface 1 level 2 config The metric value ranges from lt 0 16777214 gt and divides into two modes Narrow mode 0 63 wide mode 0 16777214 Result This configures metric value of an interface IS IS configure CSNP interval in order to set the interval between CSNP packets use command isis csnp interval num level 1 level 2 in IS IS interface config mode as shown in Table 275 TABLE 275 Is Is CSNP COMMAND Command Format Command Command Function Mode Isis csnp Interval Ici This defines CSNP packet num level interface dE sending interval 1 level 2 config value of num is 10 is 3600 In a broadcast network the default In point to point network default value of num Range is from 1 65535 Result This configures CSNP packet interval END OF STEPS Related I nformation For More information about IS IS configuration please follow the below procedures Configuring IS IS Authentication Overview n a a ZTE ZXR10 GER supports four
282. ig ctrlr au3 tug 2 1 t1 1 channel group 1 timeslots 1 24 ZXR ZXR I config ctrlr au3 exit config control exit ZXR ZXR1 config interface cpos3_1 1 1 1 1 1 ZXR10 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 25 90 290 299 292 ZXR10 config if cre 16 LO LO ZXR10 config control exit lO config control exit LO Example of Non channelized CPOS Interface Configuration As shown in Figure 70 the CP3 of a ZXR10 GER router is interconnected with that of a remote ZXR10 GER router It adopts non channelized configuration layer 2 WAN encapsulation protocol PPP crcl6 frame format and internal clock mode FIGURE 70 EXAMPLE OF NON CHANNELIZED CPOS CONFIGURATION 192 168 1 2 30 cpos3_1 1 1 1 1 1 ZXR10 cpos3_1 1 1 1 1 1 ZXR10 192 168 1 1 30 ZXR10 configuration ZXR1 config controller cpos3 1 1 LO ZXR10 config control clock source internal ZXR10 config control framing sdh ZXR10 config control aug mapping au 3 ZXR10 au 3 1 ZXR10 config ctrlr au3 tug 2 1 t1 1 framing unframe ZXR10 config ctrlr au3 exit ZXR10 config control config control exit LO ZXR10 config control exit ZXR10 config control exit ZXR10 config interface cpos3 1 1 1 1 1 1 ZXR10 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 LIDAD 20 0 s 202 ZXR10 config if cre 16 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 117 Chapter T V_Switch Configuration
283. ighbor for an input or output route map use neighbor lt ip address gt route map lt string gt lt in out gt command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 289 TABLE 289 NEIGHBOR ROUTE MAP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode neighbor lt ip This configures the address gt route BGP Route filtering of routes map lt string gt advertised from or to the in out neighbor Result This sets route filtration coming from or to the neighbor END OF STEPS Example In below example a route map that is MAP1 is defined The route map allows the advertisement of the network 172 3 0 0 to AS 200 and the setting of its MED value to 5 Upon route filtering operation by means of a router map normally the commands match and set are used in conjunction The match Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Introduction Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration command defines the matching standard while the set command defines actions executed when the match conditions are satisfied ZXR10_Ri config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 182 17 20 1 remote as 200 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 182 17 20 1 route map MAP1 out ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 182 17 20 1 send med ZXR10_Ri config route map MAP1 permit 10 ZXR10_Ri config route map match ip address 1 ZXR10_Ri config route map set metric 5 ZXR10_R1 config access list 1 permit 172 3 0
284. iguration RIP Maintenance amp Diagnosis 180 Background RFC 1058 RIP is a relatively old but still commonly used interior gateway Protocol protocol created for use in small homogeneous networks This is a classical distance vector routing protocol RIP is documented in RFC 1058 UDP RIP uses broadcast User Datagram Protocol UDP data packets to exchange routing information The metric that RIP uses to rate value of different routes is hop count Hop count is number Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 169 RI P Topology Single Routing Metric Routing Loops 170 Stability Features ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA of routers that can be traversed in a route ZXR10 GER supports RIPv1 and RIPv2 completely RIPv2 is used by default Routing Updates RIP sends routing update messages at regular intervals and when network topology changes When a router receives a routing update that includes changes to an entry it updates its routing table to reflect the new route The metric value for path is increased by 1 and sender is indicated as next hop RIP routers maintain only best route the route with the lowest metric value to a destination After updating its routing table router immediately begins transmitting routing updates to inform other network routers of the change These updates are sent independently of regularly scheduled updates that RIP router
285. iguration should be made so that CE1 and CE2 can learn the loopback routes from each other The BGP runs between CE1 and PE1 while the OSPF protocol runs between CE2 and PE2 Configuration of CE1 El config interface Loopbackl El config if ip address 100 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 El config interface FastEthernet0 0 El config if fip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 El config router bgp 200 El config router network 100 1 1 0 mask 255 255 255 0 0200000 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 295 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEPA m 1 1 B config router neighbor 10 1 1 1 remote as 100 config router no auto summary Configuration of PE1 EE U o UU WU UU v U El config fip vrf testl El config vrf rd 100 1 El config vrf route target import 100 1 El config vrf route target export 100 1 El config interface loopbackl El config if fip address 10 10 1 1 255 255 255 255 El config interface fei 1 1 El config if fip address 10 10 12 1 255 255 255 0 El config 1f impls ip El config if mpls ldp discovery transport address nterface El config interface fei 1 2 El config 1f tip vrf forwarding testl El config if fip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 El config trouter ospf 1 El config router router id 10 10 1 1 El config router network 10 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 area 0
286. imer for better rip performance in some cases use command timers basic lt update gt lt invalid gt lt holddown gt lt flush gt in RIP config mode as shown in Table 211 To restore the default timers use the no form of this command Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Timing Parameters Chapter 13 RIP Configuration TABLE 211 TIMERS COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Mode Command Function Format timers basic RIP Config lt update gt This sets the timers for lt invalid gt good rip performance lt holddown gt lt flush gt update parameter range is from lt 1 65535 gt seconds This configures Rate in seconds at which update are sent This is the fundamental timing parameter of routing protocol invalid ranges from lt 1 65535 gt seconds This configures Interval of time in seconds after which a route is declared invalid lt holddown gt ranges from 0 655352 This is an Interval in seconds during which routing information regarding better paths is suppressed flush ranges from 1 655352 This is an Amount of time in seconds that must pass before this route removes from the routing table This interval measures from last update received for the route The basic timing parameters for RIP are adjustable Since RIP is executing a distributed asynchronous routing algorithm it is important that these timers be the same for all routers and access servers in the ne
287. improved With respect to flexibility special control policy can be customized to meet special requirements of different users and implement value added services The scalability covers the following two aspects More VPNs on a network Easy user expansion in the same VPN MPLS technology will find wider application in networks of different carriers so that an enterprise user can set up a global VPN conveniently MPLS serves as a channel mechanism to implement transparent packet transmission LSPs of MPLS have high reliability and security similar to frame relay and ATMVCC Virtual Channel Connection A network can support the integration of data audio and video services Related standards and drafts drawn by IETF for BGP MPLS VPN a RFC 2547 BGP MPLS VPN Draft RFC 2547bis BGP MPLS VPN RFC 2283 multi protocol extension BGP4 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH PE Provider Edge P Provider CE Customer Edge L3 VPN RFC 2547bis RD Definition Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration Related Terms A BGP MPLS VPN network system covers the following types of network equipment A PE refers to a router connected to a CE in a client site on a carrier s network A PE router supports VPN and labeling function the labeling function can be provided by RSVP LDP or CR LDP In a single VPN a tunnel is used for connecting two PE routers and the tunnel can be an MPLS LSP tu
288. ing command can be used to view information about multilink TABLE 171 SHOW PPP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ppp This Displays summary User Privileged multilink information about multilink FR Protocol FR protocol covers the following topics which are described below Topic Page No FR Overview 142 Configuring FR 142 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 141 142 Frame Relay Architecture DLCI LMI Purpose Prerequisite Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Topic Page No FR Maintenance and Diagnosis 144 FR Overview FR Frame Relay protocol is a high performance WAN protocol running in the physical layer and data link layer of the OSI reference model FR is a packet switching technology and is a simplified version of X 25 With the omission of some complicated functions of X 25 such as window technology and data retransmission technology FR relies on upper level protocols to support error correction since the FR works on a piece of WAN equipment that is better than the WAN equipment where the X 25 works Equipment has higher reliability The FR strictly corresponds to the bottommost two layers of the OSI reference model while X 25 also provides L3 services Therefore the FR has higher performance and more efficient transmission efficiency than X 25 The WAN equipment of FR is divided into Data Terminal
289. interface mode as shown in Table 236 TABLE 236 IP OsPF DEAD INTERVAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip ospf dead OSPF This designates the dead interval interval of the neighbor on an Interface seconds interface Result This sets the number of seconds that a device must wait before it declares a neighbor OSPF router down because this has not received a hello packet END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 87 OSPF runs on routers R1 and R2 and network is divided into three areas Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Related Information Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration FIGURE 87 OSPF CONFIGURATION Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config router ospf 1 ZXR10_Ri config router network 192 168 2 0 0 0 0 255 area 23 ZXR10_Ri config router network 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 area O Configuration of R2 ZXR10 R2 config zrouter ospf 1 ZXR10 R2 config router network 192 168 3 0 0 0 0 255 area 24 ZXR10 R2 config router Znetwork 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 255 area O For additional information on OSPF additional configurations please refer to below procedures Configuring OSPF for Non Broadcast Network This procedure describes how to configure OSPF for non broadcast network a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a OSPF is running on a network as described in above basic OSPF configuration 1 To
290. ion Chapter 7 V Switch Configuration Chapter 8 Smart Group Configuration Chapter 9 Link Protocol Configuration Chapter 10 Bridge Configuration Chapter 11 Network Protocol Configuration Chapter 12 Static Route Configuration Chapter 13 RIP Configuration Chapter 14 0SPF Configuration Chapter 15 IS IS Configuration Chapter 16 BGP Configuration Chapter 17 Policy Routing Configuration ZTEHA Summary modes and the use of command lines of ZXR10 GER routers configurations This chapter introduces system management of ZXR10 GER routers details the file system and its operations of routers and also gives a detailed description of version upgrading This chapter describes different types of interfaces on ZXR10 GER and their configuration examples for further illustration This chapter introduces relevant configurations of the V_Switch on the ZXR10 GER router This chapter introduces SMARTGROUP and relevant configurations on the ZXR10 GER This chapter introduces the link protocol PPP and related configurations on the ZXR10 GER This chapter introduces the bridging of the POS and ATM interfaces and relevant configurations on the ZXR10 GER This chapter describes the IP address and ARP configuration This chapter describes the static route configuration This chapter describes the Routing Information Protocol RIP configuration This chapter describes the configuration of t
291. ion information for the convenience of troubleshooting GRE Configuration Example Suppose the public network of a router R1 in place A of a certain cooperation is 100 1 1 1 and private network is 10 1 1 0 24 and public network of a router R2 in place B is 200 1 1 1 and private network is 172 16 0 0 16 To interconnect the network segments of the private networks in the two places and to realize the VPN function use the following configuration R1 configuration ZXR10_Rl config terminal ZXR10_R1 config interface tunnell ZXR10_R1 config ip address 192 168 1 1 255 2554 255 252 ZXR1LO_R1 config if tunnel source 100 1 1 1 ZXR10_R1 config if ftunnel destination 200 1 1 1 ZXR10 Rl1 config if fexit L L ZXR10_R1 config if tunnel key test L L ZXR1LO_R1 config ip route 172 16 0 0 255 255 0 0 192 168 1 2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH R2 configuration Chapter 18 GRE Configuration ZXR ZXR ZXR ZXR ZX ZX ZX ZX 192 10_R2 config terminal 10_R2 config interface 10_R2 config ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 10 R2 config if ftunnel 10 R2 config if ftunnel 10 R2 config if ftunnel 10 R2 config if f fexit 10 R2 config tip route 168 1 1 tunnell source 200 1 1 1 destination 100 1 1 1 key test l 1l 1 0 255 255 255 0 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 271 I ntroduction
292. ion of BGP ZXR10z debug ip bgp events BGP events debugging is on ZXR10 04 10 07 BGP 192 168 1 2 reset due to Erroneous BGP Open received 04 10 07 BGP 192 168 1 2 went from Connect to Idle 04 10 08 BGP 192 168 1 2 went from Idle to Connect 04 10 13 BGP 192 168 1 2 went from Connect to OpenSent 04 10 13 BGP 192 168 1 2 went from OpenSent to OpenConfirm 04 10 13 BGP 192 168 1 2 went from OpenConfirm to Established ZXR10 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 255 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA This page is intentionally blank 256 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 1 T Policy Routing Configuration I ntroduction Contents Routing Table Message Forwarding Control This chapter introduces policy routing and relevant configurations on the ZXR10 GER This chapter covers following topics TABLE 304 ToPics IN CHAPTER 17 Topic Page No Overview 257 Configuring Policy Routing 259 Overview Traditionally a router obtains the next hop by searching in the routing table according to the destination address and then forwards messages The routing table entry is specified statically by the network administrator or generated dynamically by the routing protocol through the routing algorithm Compared with the traditional routing policy routing is more powerful and more flexible With policy routing the ne
293. ion of P P config interface fei_1 5 P config if ip address 10 10 12 2 255 255 255 0 P config if mpls ip P config if mpls ldp discovery transport address interface P config interface fei 1 6 P config if ip address 10 10 23 2 255 255 255 0 P config if mpls ip P config if mpls ldp discovery transport address interface P config interface loopbackl P config if ip address 10 10 2 2 255 255 255 255 P config router ospf 1 P config router network 10 0 0 0 0 2554255 4 259 area 0 0 0 0 P config impls ip P config mpls ldp router id loopbackl force Configuration of PE2 Here an Ethernet sub interface is used for connection with CE2 PE2 config fip vrf testl PE2 config vrf rd 100 1 PE2 config vrf route target import 100 1 PE2 config vrf route target export 100 1 PE2 config interface loopbackl PE2 config if fip address 10 10 3 3 255 255 255 255 PE2 config interface fei_3 1 PE2 config if ip address 10 10 23 3 255 255 255 0 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 297 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEPA E2 config 1f mpls E2 config if mpls nterface config if config if config if config router config router 0 0 config router config router config router config router config router config router oopbackl tg ps cg rng rng rg CU J c mW mW u Uu tg
294. ions between their different sites as the VPWS can emulate the existing links Customer can keep the same layer 2 connections to the service provider but instead of data being carried natively over an ATM or Frame Relay service the traffic is encapsulated and routed over the provider s MPLS backbone VPWS makes the convergence of Layer 2 and Layer 3 services possible over an IP MPLS cloud VPWS lets service providers deploy point to point circuits with Ethernet as an attachment circuit allowing high speed LAN connectivity Mostly two Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 305 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA pseudowire technologies are available in all major vendor products ATOM for MPLS networks a L2TPv3 for native IP networks Both AToM and L2TPv3 support the transport of Frame Relay ATM HDLC and Ethernet traffic over an IP or MPLS core IP Network VPWS is generating interest among service providers that wish to migrate existing Layer 2 networks to their packet MPLS or IP network Figure 4 or for service providers that wish to use the packet infrastructure to extend Layer 2 service offerings in new markets VPWS provides a common framework to encapsulate and transport supported Layer 2 traffic types over an MPLS network core Service providers can use a single MPLS network infrastructure to offer connectivity for supported Layer 2 traffic and for IP traffic in
295. is shows the detailed information of MSDP neighbors Result This shows the detailed information of MSDP neighbors Example This shows the detailed neighbors ZXR10fshow ip msdp peer MSDP Peer 55 1 1 42 Description Connection status State Up Resets 0 Connection 55 idos 4h Uptime Downtime 00 20 07 sent received 21 21 Connection and counters cleared O0 SA Filtering 356 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION information of MSDP source fei 1 5 j Messages 0 24 09 ago ZTERH Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration Input S G filter none Output S G filter none Peer ttl threshold O0 SAs learned from this peer 0 2 To show the S G state of every MSDP neighbor use 3 debug ip msdp message recv command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 424 TABLE 424 SHOW IP MspP SA CACHE COMMAND Command Format Command command Mode Function debug ip msdp Priviliged This shows the S message recv G state of every MSDP neighbor Result This shows the S G state of every MSDP neighbor Example This shows the S G state of every MSDP neighbor ZXR10 show ip msdp sa cache MSDP Source Active Cach 4 ntries 101 101 101 101 224 1 1 1 RP 49 4 4 4 00 21 45 00 05 57 101 101 101 101 224 1 1 2 RP 49 4 4 4 00 21 45 00 05 57 101 101 101 101 226 1 1 1 RP 50 4 4 4 00 09 04 00 04 57 101 101 101 101 226 1 1
296. it rate UBR Quality of Service Parameters This class is used for emulating circuit switching The cell rate is constant with time CBR applications are quite sensitive to cell delay variation Examples of applications that can use CBR are telephone traffic i e nx64 kbps videoconferencing and television This class allows users to send traffic at a rate that varies with time depending on the availability of user information Statistical multiplexing is provided to make optimum use of network resources Multimedia e mail is an example of VBR NRT This class is similar to VBR NRT but is designed for applications that are sensitive to cell delay variation Examples for real time VBR are voice with speech activity detection SAD and interactive compressed video This class of ATM services provides rate based flow control and is aimed at data traffic such as file transfer and e mail Although the standard does not require the cell transfer delay and cell loss ratio to be guaranteed or minimized it is desirable for switches to minimize delay and loss as much as possible Depending upon the state of congestion in the network the source is required to control its rate The users are allowed to declare a minimum cell rate which is guaranteed to the connection by the network This class is the catch all other class and is widely used today for TCP IP ZTE ZXR10 GER provides ATM 155M and ATM 622M standard speed interface
297. ke place if traffic exists To set the DR priority use ip pim dr priority lt priority gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 392 TABLE 392 IP Pim DR PRIORITY COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip pim dr priority inte Meee This sets the DR priority lt priority gt configuration Result This sets the DR priority A DR must be selected in a shared or Multi Access network segment The router with the highest priority will win the selection If the priorities are identical the router with the greatest IP address will be selected In the shared network segment connected with the multicast data source only the DR can send the registration information to the RP In the shared network segment connected with the receiver only the DR can respond to IGMP joining leaving messages and send PIM joining pruning messages to upstream The priority of a router is contained in the Hello message exchanged with neighbors The default value is O 3 To configure an interface to be the PIM domain border use ip pim bsr border command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 393 TABLE 393 IP PiM BSR BORDER COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip pim bsr interface This configures an interface to border configuration be the PIM domain border Result This configures an interface to be the PIM domain border 4 To enable disable reporting of the multicast
298. l Protocol Stack III a ZXR10 Router Ethernet Switch Information Manual Commands supported by the ZXR10 GER V2 6 routers are based on the uniform platform ZXROS V4 6 02 Conventions ZTE documents employ the following typographical conventions TABLE 2 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS Typeface Italics Quotes Bold CAPS Constant width Meaning References to other Manuals and documents Links on screens Menus menu options functions names input fields radio button names check boxes drop down lists dialog box names window names Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens and company name Text that you type program code files and directory names and functions names TABLE 3 MOUSE OPERATION CONVENTIONS Typeface Click Double click Right click Drag Meaning Refers to clicking the primary mouse button usually the left mouse button once Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button usually the left mouse button twice Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button usually the right mouse button once Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and iv Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEPA Customer Support Documentation Support About This Manual Typeface Meaning moving the mouse How to Get in Touch The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for the documentation and the software If you have prob
299. l or partial information about the link state database NOTE Link state database is source of all OSPF routes in IP routing table Possibly many route problems are caused by incorrect information or information loss of the link state database Debugging ZXR10 GER provides the debug command to debug OSPF protocol and trace related information Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 207 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA 1 To turn on the debugging information switch for OSPF use debug ip ospf adj in Exec mode as shown in Table 255 TABLE 255 DEBUG IP OSPF COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This turns on debugging information switch for returning OSPF adjacency events debug ip ospf adj Exec Result This sets debugging information switch for returning OSPF adjacency events 2 To turn on for debugging OSPF switch packets use debug ip ospf packet command in OSPF in Exec mode as shown in Table 256 TABLE 256 DEBUG IP OsPF PACKET Command Command Command Function Format Mode This turns on the debugging information switch for returning OSPF packet sending receiving events and monitors the sending and receiving of all OSPF packets debug ip ospf packet ETE Result This turn on debugging for OSPF packets 3 To turn on debugging information for OSPF LSA use debug ip ospf Isa generation command in Exec mode as shown in Table 257
300. label header is four bytes containing a 20 bit label a 3 test bits a 1 bit stack bottom tag and 8 bit TTL Time To Live A router sending an MPLS packet needs to use a method to notify a router receiving the packet The transmitted packet is not a pure IP packet but an MPLS datagram For Ethernet packets Ethernet types 8847 and 8848 in hexadecimal notation are used to label MPLS packets while for PPP packets the protocol field is set to 8282 in hexadecimal notation to label MPLS packets MPLS LDP LDP label binding is an association relation between a destination prefix and a label Labels used for label binding are locked from a label set called label space LDP supports two types of label spaces Label space per interface uses the label resources of the interface For example the LC ATM interface uses VPI VCI as a label Based on different configurations an LDP instance can support or may not support one or multiple interface label spaces LDP instance supports a label space shared by all interfaces in a platform range Except the LC ATM interface ZXR10 T64 T128 uses the label space per platform on all the other interfaces LDP uses six bytes to name a label space called LDP identity LDP Id which is composed of two parts a First four bytes indicate the router ID of the router that has the label space Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Rules for selecting router
301. label is meaningful only between two pieces of equipment in mutual communications When an IP packet enters the network core a border router will assign a label to it Since then the MPLS equipment will check the label information all the time and switch the labeled packet to the destination Since route processing is reduced the waiting time of the network is shortened and the scalability is improved Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 275 Border Router 276 MPLS Label Header MPLS LDP Label space per interface Label space per platform LDP identity ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Border router of MPLS determines the QoS type of an MPLS packet according to the parameters such as source destination IP address port ID and TOS value in the IP packet For IP packets to the same destination different forwarding paths can be set up according to the requirements for TOS values to meet the requirements for transmission quality In the meantime the management of special routes also can solve the problem of load balance and congestion on the network efficiently When congestion occurs in a network MPLS sets new forwarding routes that disperse the traffic to ease the network congestion MPLS Label Header An MPLS label is inserted between an L2 header and an L3 packet Therefore an MPLS label header is also called a shim header The length of an MPLS
302. lems questions comments or suggestions regarding your product contact us by e mail at support zte com cn You can also call our customer support center at 86 755 26771900 and 86 800 9830 9830 ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document For further questions comments or suggestions on the documentation you can contact us by e mail at doc zte com cn or you can fax your comments and suggestions to 86 755 26772236 You can also browse our website at http support zte com cn which contains various interesting subjects like documentation knowledge base and forum and service request Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION v y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA This page is intentionally blank vi Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Declaration of RoHS Compliance To minimize the environmental impact and take more responsibility to the earth we live this document shall serve as formal declaration that ZXR10 GER manufactured by ZTE CORPORATION is in compliance with the Directive 2002 95 EC of the European Parliament RoHS Restriction of Hazardous Substances with respect to the following substances Lead Pb Mercury Hg Cadmium Cd Hexavalent Chromium Cr VI a PolyBrominated Biphenyls PBB s PolyBrominated Diphenyl Ethers PBDE s Compliance is evidenced by wri
303. lizes unsuccessfully This indicates working status of the fan This is constantly on when the fan is working normally This flashes if the fan fails This indicates equipment inside temperature This is off when the equipment is working normally this flashes if the equipment fails This indicates SMNP master slave status This is constantly on in the master mode this is off in slave working status This indicates SMNP CPU working status This is displayed when the equipment works normally 18 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Buttons Definition Central processor module Standard MIPS Bus Switching module Chapter 3 Structure and Principles SMNP board contains two buttons Their functions are listed in Table 10 TABLE 10 SMNP BUTTONS FUNCTIONS Buttons Function Description If SMNP master board reset button is pressed in the presence of SMNP slave master slave SMNP switchover RST will occur If there is no slave SMNP then equipment will be reset If SMNP slave has RST button SMNP slave will be reset Using EXCH button SMNP board master slave switches EXCH over master slave function There is no response if this button presses on SMNP slave ZXR10 GERO8 SMP ZXR10 GERO2 04 core part is SMP This consists of central processor module switching module and network processor module Central processor module and switching module are fixed on the SMP while the SNP is de
304. llent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA RE 02CE3 75 ZXR10 GER system has two port channelized E3 interface card which can be inserted in any one of eight slots This connects with the SMP board through the backplane Figure 18 shows the RE 02CE3 75 card FIGURE 18 RE 02CE3 75 CARD RE 02CE3 75 RX RX DATA1 DATA2 RUN FR LINKI B LINK2 RE 02CE3 75 card provides two E3 T3 interfaces This adopts the CC 4 connectors and provides 75 ohm coaxial cable interfaces for users There are three LED indicators Table 25 shows their functions TABLE 25 RE 02CE3 75 CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description This is constantly on if the interface card is working iin normally and this goes off if the interface card fails DATA per This is constantly on in the case of data sending and port P receiving and this is off in the case if data sending or receiving fails This is constantly on in the case of successful PPP LINK per port link setup and This is off in the case of PPP link setup failure RE 02GE This is a two port GE electrical optical interface board providing two 10 100 1000BASE T Ethernet electrical interfaces of RJ45 or providing two 1000BASE X Ethernet optical interfaces of SFP Maximum transmission of the optical interface is 120km board compliances with IEEE802 3 This board only supports two GE Ethernet interfaces so choose either of port electrical or optical Confidential and
305. lt This enables the BCP Bridge Note ppp bcp enable and ip forwarding mode attributes are provided only in the POS real interface These two attributes of the POS VLAN sub interface are the same as those of its parent interface In addition the POS VLAN sub interface can only be used for bridge and will be inactived if its parent interface does not enable the BCP END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 78 R1 is connected with R2 through the POS3 interface R2 is connected with R3 through the 100M interface In the networking R2 must be a transparent transmission device Througth BCP Encapsulation and Vlan Switch configurate POS Vlan interface can communice to the ethernet interface of R3 directly and actived as a pair of ethernet interfaces in a network FIGURE 78 POS BRIDGE CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 192 168 1 2 30 ous pos ll gt feil 1100 a Vo I fei 1 1 100 RI R2 R3 192 168 1 1 30 R1 configuration ZXR10 Rl1 config finterface pos3 1 1 ZXR10_R1 config if ppp bcp enable ZXR10 Rl1 config if fexit ZXR10_R1 config finterface pos3 1 1 10 ZXR10_R1 config subif fencapsulation dotlOQ 10 ZXR10_R1 config subif ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 R2 configuration ZXR10 R2 config finterface pos3 1 1 ZXR10 R2 config if ftppp bcp enable ZXR10 R2 config if fip forwarding mode mix ZXR1O_R2 config if exit ZXR10 R2 config finterface fei 1 1 ZXR10 R2 config if fip forwarding mode mix
306. lt route in order to inject into OSPF by ASBR use notify default route always metric lt value gt metric type lt type gt route map lt map tag gt command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 247 TABLE 247 DEFAULT ROUTE COMMAND Command Command Command Format Mode Function notify default route always metric lt value gt metric type OSPF Route lt type gt route map lt map tag gt This configures ASBR to advertise the default route to OSPF Result This sets ASBR to advertise the default route to OSPF Configuring Virtual Links OSPF typically requires coordination among many internal routers Area Border Routers ABRs which are routers connected to multiple areas and Autonomous System Boundary Routers ASBRs At a minimum OSPF based routers or access servers can be configured with all default parameter values no authentication and interfaces assigned to areas In OSPF all areas must be connected to a backbone area If there is a break in backbone continuity or the backbone is purposefully partitioned there can be a virtual link The two endpoints of a virtual link are ABRs The virtual link must be configured in both routers The configuration information in each router consists of the other virtual endpoint the other ABR and the non backbone area that the two routers have in common called the transit area Note that virtual links cannot be configured through stub areas Confidential
307. lue of a static route Suppose there are two different routes from R1 to network section 192 168 6 0 24 the configuration is as follows ZXR10_Ri config ip route 192 168 6 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 4 2 ZXR10_Ri config ip route 192 168 6 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 3 2 25 tag 10 Above two commands configure two different static routes to same network First command does not configure administrative distance so default value 1 is used Second command configures administrative distance of 25 Since administrative distance of first route is less than that of the second route only information about first route appears in routing table that is to say the router arrives at destination network 192 168 6 0 24 through next hop address 192 168 4 2 The second route appears in routing table only when first route fails and disappears from routing table Static Route Summary A summary static route is a special kind of static route which can summarize two or multiple special route expressions into one expression to reduce entries of routing table but to reserve the all the original links The detailed description of static route summary is shown in Figure 81 FIGURE 81 STATIC ROUTE SUMMARY 10 2 0 0 16 10 2 0 1 16 192 168 5 2 24 As shown in Figure 81 R3 has two networks 10 1 0 0 16 and 10 2 0 0 16 For R1 to access these networks normally R1 must be configured with following two static routes ZXR10_Ri config ip
308. mand Command Command Function Format Mode show ip Privileged rpf This shows the IGMP information source on an interface address Result This shows the IGMP information on an interface Example This shows the IGMP information of the fei 1 1 interface Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 351 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Purpose Prerequisites ZXR10fshow ip igmp interface fei 1 1 fei_1 1 Internet address is 131 1 1 45 subnet mask is 255 2554255 0 IGMP is enabled on interface Current IGMP version is 2 IGMP query interval is 125 seconds IGMP last member query interval is 1 seconds IGMP query max response time is 10 seconds IGMP querier timeout period is 251 seconds IGMP querier is 131 1 1 45 never expire Inbound IGMP access group is not set IGMP immediat leav control is not set 2 To view the joining information about the IGMP group on an interface use show ip igmp groups lt interface name gt command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 417 TABLE 417 SHOW IP IGMP GROUPS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip Privileged This shows the joining igmp information about the IGMP groups group on an interface Result This shows the joining information about the IGMP group on an interface Example This shows the group member information at the fei 3 1 interface ZXR10 show ip igmp groups fei 3 1 IG
309. mand Command Function Format Mode ip igmp a This configures the group range version Interface config allowing He IGMP o he 9 lt version gt Result This configures the group range allowing the IGMP to join When running the IGMP on the interface receive all multicast groups by default Set the receiving group range Discard the joining request when the joining request from the host does not fall into this range Example Only receive the group 239 10 10 10 allowed by the acl 10 at an interface ZXR10 config taccess list 10 permit 239 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 ZXR10 config fint fei 1 1 ZXR10 config if ip igmp access group 10 3 To configure the static group member on the IGMP interface use ip igmp static group group address command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 380 TABLE 380 IP IGMP STATIC GROUP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip igmp This configures the static group static Interface config member on the IGMP interface group Result This configures the static group member on the IGMP interface Statically bind the group address to an interface Namely supposing there are always members of the group at the interface Example Configure the static group 239 10 10 10 at an interface ZXR10 config fint fei 1 1 ZXR10 config if fip igmp static group 239 10 10 10 4 To configure the group range allowing the IGMP to leave immediately use ip igmp immediate leave
310. mat Mode delete Exec This deletes file present in flash Result This deletes old image file Copy new image file in background TFTP Server into IMG directory in FLASH The name of the image file is zxr10 zar The operation of copying the image file to the FLASH in FTP mode is shown in Table 69 TABLE 69 CoPY COMMAND WINDOW ZXR10 copy tftp 168 4 168 89 zxr10 zar flash img zxr10 zar Starting copying file file copying successful ZXR10 Result This copies new image file in flash Check whether the new image file exists in FLASH using command show version in Exec mode as shown in Table 70 Important If file does not exist this indicates a copy failure Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 77 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA TABLE 70 SHOW VERSION COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode show Exec This indicates software version of version flash and new image file present in directory Result This indicates new image file present in directory Note gt Reboot ZXR10 GER Based on method mentioned in Step 8 change the boot mode to Boot from the FLASH In this case Boot path will change to flash img zxr10 zar automatically Note The boot mode also can be changed to Boot from the FLASH by using the command nvram imgfile location local in the global configuration mode Under ZXR10 Boot enter and press
311. max 0 4 20 ms PE1 2 To display some configuration information about VRF use show ip vrf command in privileged mode as shown in Table 342 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 299 300 4 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA TABLE 342 SHow IP VRF COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This displays some show ip vrf Privileged configuration information about VRF Result This displays some configuration information about VRF View the VRF information on PE1 PE1 show ip vrf Being deleted Name Default RD Interfaces testl 100 1 fei_1 2 PE1 To display the status of and information about the VRF interface use show ip vrf interfaces command in privileged mode as shown in Table 343 TABLE 343 SHOW IP VRF INTERFACES COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This displays the status information about the VRF interface show ip vrf User interfaces Privileged Result This displays the status information about the VRF interface View the status of and information about the VRF interface on PE1 PElfshow ip vrf interfaces interface IP Address VRE Protocol fei_1 2 LO 1 40 21 testl up PE1 To check the VRF routing table to see whether there is any correct route on PE use show ip route vrf lt vrf name gt command in privileged mode as shown in Table 344 TABLE 344 SHow IP ROUTE VRF COMMA
312. mmand Function Format Mode ppp multiin This configures end point string endpoint Interface string lt string gt of multilink Result This sets end point string of multilink 108 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 6 Interface Configuration END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 68 ZXR10 GER is interconnected to non channelized E1 interfaces of another ZXR10 GER in a binding manner PPP serves as the L2 WAN encapsulation protocol FIGURE 68 MULTILINK CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 192 168 1 2 30 ET Multi 7 1 2 AS man t ZXR10 1 192 168 1 1 30 ZXR10 2 Configuration of ZXR10 GER A ZXR10 1 config interface multilink1 ZXR10 1 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 1 config controller ce1 8 1 ZXR10 1 config control framing unframe ZXR10 1 config interface cel 8 1 1 ZXR10 1 config if zz multilink group multi 8 1 ZXR10 1 config controller ce1 8 2 ZXR10 1 config control framing unframe ZXR10 1 config interface cel 8 2 1 ZXR10 1 config if multilink group multi 8 1 ZXR10 1 config controller ce1 8 8 ZXR10 1 config control framing unframe ZXR10 1 config interface cel 8 8 1 ZXR10 1 config if zz multilink group multi 8 1 Configuration of ZTE ZXR10 GER 2 ZXR10 2 config interface multi 7 1 ZXR10 2 config if ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 2 config controller ce1 7 1 ZXR1
313. mode as shown in Table 82 TABLE 82 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode interface global config This enters into interface interface configuration mode Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 85 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDX Command Command Command Function Format Mode number gt Result This enables to enter into interface configuration mode 3 To configure an IP address of an interface use ip address lt ip address gt lt net mask gt lt broadcast address gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 83 TABLE 83 IP ADDRESS COMMAND command omma Command Function Format Mode ip address ip address interface This configures an ip address of net mask config an interface lt broadcast address gt Result This configures an ip address of an interface 4 For configuring duplex mode of an interface use full duplex half duplex command interface configuration mode as shown in Table 84 TABLE 84 DUPLEX COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode This configures duplex mode of full duplex interface fast Ethernet interface to full config duplex This configures duplex mode of half duplex one fast Ethernet interface to half duplex Result This sets duplex mode for an interface 5 To configure negotiation mode of an interface use neg
314. mode input the enable command and the corresponding password to enter the privileged mode as shown in the following example ZXR10 gt enable Password The entered password is not displayed on the screen ZXR104 In the privileged mode a user can view more detailed configuration information and also can enter the configuration mode to configure the entire router Therefore a password should be used to prevent illegal use of unauthorized users To return from the privileged mode to the user mode execute the disable command Global Configuration Mode In the privileged mode input the config terminal command to enter the global configuration mode as shown in the following example ZXR10fconfigure terminal Enter configuration commands one per line End with Ctrl Z ZXR10 config Commands in the global configuration mode act on the entire system not merely on a protocol or an interface To return from the global configuration mode to the privileged mode input the exit or end command or press CTRL Z Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Interface Parameters Control Command Routing Protocols Chapter 4 Usage and Operations Interface Configuration Mode In the global configuration mode execute the interface command to enter the interface configuration mode as shown in the following example ZXR10 config finterface fei 2 1 fei 2 1 is the interface name indicatin
315. multiple ASs multiple IBGP routers in the AS belong to different sub ASs IBGP is set up inside each sub AS and EBGP is set up among sub ASs The sub AS ID is called confederation ID Sub ASs are invisible external to the AS Refer to below procedure for BGP confederation configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER router a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a BGP is running on a network 1 For dividing autonomous system into sub autonomous system use bgp confederation identifier value command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 298 TABLE 298 BGP CONFEDERATION IDENTIFIER COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode bgp confederation Route This configures identifier confederation ID value Result This configures confederation ID In the following an example will be given to describe the application of route confederation As shown in Figure 103 AS200 has five BGP routers which is divided into two sub ASs One is defined as AS65010 containing routers R3 R5 and R6 and the other is defined as AS65020 consisting of routers R4 and R7 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 249 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA FIGURE 103 BGP CONFEDERATION 2224 50 7 210 61 19 1 38 AS65020 Lo 210 61 10 1 Lo 210 61 40 1 Configuration of R3 ZXR10 R3 config zrouter bgp 65010 ZXR10_R3 config router bgp confederatio
316. n Format Mode ip address ip Interface address net mask lt broadcast address gt This configures an ip address of an interface Result This configures an ip address of an interface END OF STEPS Example In following configuration example the VLAN sub interface technology is applied to implement the access and routing of different VLAN users on same physical Ethernet interface As shown in Figure 66 fei 1 3 interface of ZXR10 GER is connected to port 10 of a ZXR10 3904 switch Ports 2 and 3 of ZXR10 3904 switch belong to VLAN100 and VLAN200 in turn supporting two PCs FiGURE 66 VLAN SUB INTERFACE EXAMPLE 10 40 50 10 26 10 40 50 70 26 104 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Background Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 6 Interface Configuration Configuration of ZTE ZXR10 GER ZXR10 config interface fei_1 3 10 ZXR10 config subif encapsulation dotiq 100 ZXR10 config subif ip address 10 40 50 1 255 255 255 192 ZXR10 config interface fei 1 3 11 ZXR10 config subif encapsulation dotiq 200 ZXR10 config subif ip address 10 40 50 65 255 255 255 192 Configuration of ZXR10 3904 ZXR10 3904 bridge set vlan create br100 100 ZXR10 3904 bridge set vlan create br200 200 ZXR10 3904 bridge set vian del bri 2 3 10 ZXR10 3904 bridge set vlan add br100 2 untagged ZXR10 3904 bridge set vlan add br100 10 tagged ZXR10 3904 bridge set vlan add
317. n global configuration mode as shown in Table 260 TABLE 260 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode To enable IS IS use router isis command in global config mode as shown in Table 261 TABLE 261 Is IS COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode router isis global config This establish isis routing process Result This enables IS IS routing process For defining an IS IS area use area lt area string gt command in IS IS config mode as shown in Table 262 lt area string gt refers to format e g 1111 1111 1111 TABLE 262 AREA COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode area lt string gt IS IS config identify an area to which IS IS instance is assigned Result This enables an area to which router interface belongs To designate router for specific area use system id lt system id gt range range number gt command in IS IS config mode as shown in Table 263 lt system id gt normally expressed a unique ID of an interface of router range range number gt parameter is 1 32 TABLE 263 SYSTEM ID COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Function Command Format Mode system id lt system id gt range lt range number gt ta le conma epe identify router in an area Result This configures system id of the IS
318. n identifier 200 ZXR10_R3 config router bgp confederation peers 65020 ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 210 61 10 1 remote as 65010 ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 210 61 20 1 remote as 65010 ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 210 61 19 2 remote as 65020 ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 2 2 2 2 remote as 100 Configuration of R5 ZXR10 Rb5 config zrouter bgp 65010 ZXR10_R5 config router bgp confederation identifier 200 ZXR10 R5 config router neighbor 210 61 30 1 remote as 65010 ZXR10 R5 config router neighbor 210 61 20 1 remote as 65010 Adjacency Upon adjacency setup the EBGP adjacency is set up between R3 and confederation peers IBGP adjacency is set up inside the confederation and the EBGP adjacency is set up with AS100 AS100 does not know whether the confederation exists Therefore router R1 in AS100 still sets up adjacency with R3 by using AS200 Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 2 2 2 1 remote as 200 250 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Introduction Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration BGP Route Dampening Every time when a route flaps a penalty of 1000 will be assigned When the penalty reaches a suppress limit the advertisement of the route will be suppressed For each half life time the penalty will decrease geometrically When the penalty reduces to the reuse limit the route advertisemen
319. n in the case of successful PPP link setup and This is off in the case of PPP link setup failure Note 3 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 33 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Indicators Function Description Notes a DATA indicator is sensitive to traffic in the port regarding flash frequency When the small volumes of data send receives by a port DATA indicator becomes on for a few times if the local port sends receives a large volume of data DATA indicator becomes on for a certain time If the traffic is above a certain threshold the indicator becomes normally on SD indicator becomes on if the optical transmitting receiving devices detect any optical signals which belongs to the scope of the physical layer in L7 protocol Two cases are involved when the Link indicator becomes on gt When the port works in the non auto negotiation mode LINK indicator is on if optical signals are detected just like the SD indicator Actually this link set up mode is not reliable gt When the port works in auto negotiation mode the link must be set up according to the specified negotiation of the Ethernet that is in the scope of the data link layer Part of the network equipment requests link setup by means of ARP which belongs to the network layer category RE 02P12 SFP Definition This is a two port POS12 optical interface card providing t
320. nd configuration files from TFTP server or FTP server to Router and Vice versa copy Exec This copies from flash file system flash copy ftp Exec This copies from ftp file system copy tftp Exec This copies from tftp file system Result This makes configuration backup Example The following command can be used to back up a configuration file in the FLASH to the backup TFTP Server To copy the image file into TFTP server FTP server or copy from TFTP server FTP server into router use copy command ZXR10 copy flash cfg db dat tftp 168 1 1 1 cfg db dat as shown in Table 73 TABLE 73 CoPY COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode copy Exec This copies image and configuration files from TFTP server or FTP server to Router and Vice versa copy Exec This copies from flash file system flash copy ftp Exec This copies from ftp file system copy tftp Exec This copies from tftp file system Result This copies image file from TFTP server or To TFTP server from Router Example The following command can be used to copy an image file into FLASH from TFTP Server Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 79 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA ZXR10 copy tftp 168 1 1 1 img zxr10 zar flash img zxr10 zar Configuring System Parameters Purpose Refer to below procedure for configuring system parameters of ZTE ZXR10 GER Prerequisite Ro
321. nd Format z Function ip route lt prefix gt lt net mask gt lt interface number gt This configures lt forwarding global config MERE s address lt distance metric gt globle tag lt tag gt Result This sets default route Tag is a route label Two static routes with different next hop IP addresses to same destination network cannot have same tag value Example An example is given in the following to describe the functions and use of the default route FIGURE 82 DEFAULT ROUTE COMMAND 192 168 3 1 24 192 168 4 2 244 211 211 211 2 24 Y 92 168 4 1 24 7211 211 211 1 24 As shown in Figure 82 R2 is connected to router R3 in Internet R2 does not record addresses of all networks on the Internet so it uses a default route to directly send unknown packets to R3 for proper processing The configuration of the default route in R2 is as follows ZXR10 R2 config Zip route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 211 211 211 2 When default route is used in routing protocol configuration default route varies with routing protocols If default route is configured for a router where an RIP runs the RIP will advertise default route 0 0 0 0 0 to its neighbor and even route redistribution is not needed in RIP domain For OSPF protocol a router where the OSPF protocol runs will not inject the default route into its neighbor automatically For OSPF to send the default route to OSPF domain the command notifie
322. nds TFTP is downloaded from When http www solarwinds net Download Tools htm downloading is completed run SolarWinds TFTP Server exe from downloaded location After installation follow these steps to configure TFTP 1 Select SolarWinds TFTP server from start menu and then Click gt TFTP Server as shown in Figure 48 FiGURE 48 TFTP SERVER SELECTION WINDOW Q Set Program Access and Defaults LAN Windows Catalog o Windows Update md SecureCRT 5 0 SolarWinds Free Tools gt If Accessories SB MSN Messenger 7 5 S Documents gt Fi Microsoft Office Hi E Snaglt 6 gt 2 2a Settings Ed I e o ASA r7 SolarWinds Web Site gt E Search gt Y f uninstall p 9 Help and Support v E EJ Run c o Shut Down Result A Windows XP Firewall prompt appears that SolarWinds TFTP wants to run Note This occurs only if Windows XP firewall is enabled For other firewall configurations refer to their documentation Important This is to be in notice that TFTP uses communication port 69 2 Click gt Unblock for permanently allowing TFTP server to run as shown in Figure 49 68 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 5 System Management FIGURE 49 WINDOWS FIREWALL ALERT Windows Security Alert E To help protect your computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking
323. neighbor detail Peer LDP Ident 10 LOL LOs Local LDP Ident 10410420200 TCP connection 10 10 12 1 1025 10 10 2 2 646 state Oper Msgs sent rcvd 240 240 Downstream Up Time 03 52 25 LDP discovery sources fei 1 5 Src IP addr 10 10 12 1 holdtime 15000 ms hello interval 5000 ms Addresses bound to peer LDP Ident 10 10 12 1 10 10 1 1 Peer holdtime 180000 ms KA interval 60000 ms ZXR1O 5 To check label binding after the LDP session is set up normally use show mpls idp bindings command in privileged mode as shown in Table 333 284 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 19 MPLS Configuration TABLE 333 SHOW MPLS LDP BINDINGS COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function This displays the learned LDP label binding show mpls Idp bindings Privileged Result This displays the learned LDP label binding ZXR10 show mpls ldp bindings 10 10 1 1 255 255 255 255 local binding label 17 remote binding lsr 10 10 3 3 0 label 18 remote binding lsr 10 10 1 1 0 label imp null inuse 10 10 2 2 255 255 255 255 local binding label imp null remote binding lsr 10 10 3 3 0 label 17 remote binding lsr 10 10 1 1 0 label 18 10 10 3 3 255 255 255 255 local binding label 16 remote binding lsr 10 10 3 3 0 label imp null inuse remote binding lsr 10 10 1 1 0 label 17 10 10 12 0 255 255 255 0 local binding label imp null remote binding lsr 10 10 3 3 0
324. nel RE 01P48 SO2KLC card panel has six LED indicators Each port has a LINK indicator and a DATA indicator Table 23 describes their functions TABLE 23 RE 01P48 SO2KLC CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description This is constantly on if the interface card is working RUM normally and this goes off if the interface card fails This is constantly on in the case of data sending and DATA receiving and this is off in the case if data sending or receiving fails This is constantly on if optical signals are available up and this goes off if optical signals are not available This is constantly on in the case of successful PPP link LINK setup and This is off in the case of PPP link setup failure 28 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Definition Function Panel Interfaces Indicators Chapter 3 Structure and Principles RE 01P48 S15KLC This is a one port POS48 binary channel optical interface providing one channel standard OC 48c STM 16c POS optical interface In the receiving direction this card extracts payload from 2 5 Gbps optical signals and provides PPP packets for the packet processing card through the bus In the transmitting direction the card receives PPP packets from the packet processing card through the bus This card maps the packets into SONET SDH virtual containers VC 4 16c and then sends the packets through the 2 5 Gbps optical interface Note Binary
325. nel controller number and time slots of E1 interface Result This configures E1 channels and timeslots for channelized E1 5 To configure an ip address for E1 interface use ip address ip address net mask broadcast address command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 90 TABLE 90 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Format RAM Command Function ip address ip address net This configures IP mask Interface broadcast address of an interface address gt Result This configures an ip address of an interface Note In configuration of routers at both ends of an El interface following parameters of E1 interface must be consistent Timeslot framing linecode HDB3 by default CRC 32 by default L2 encapsulation protocol PPP by default In addition pay attention to clock synchronization END OF STEPS Example Channelized Configuration As shown in Figure 57 E1 interface of ZTE ZXR10 GER 1 is interconnected with E1 interface of another ZTE ZXR10 GER 2 In channelized configuration timeslots 1 through 10 are used The default L2 WAN encapsulation protocol is PPP linecode is hdb3 frame format is crc32 and clock mode is internal Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 89 90 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA FIGURE 57 CHANNELIZED E1 CONFIGURATION 192 188 1 j30 GE o GNE A 1721 E UU i Configuration of ZXR
326. nel Checksum Command Table 320 Topics In Chapter 19 Table 321 Config Terminal Command Table 322 Mpls Ip Command sssseeseeesss Table 323 Mpls Ip Command esee Table 324 Mpls Ldp Discovery Command Table 325 Mpls Ldp Router ID Command Table 326 mpls Ldp Access Fec Command Table 327 mpls Advertise Label Command Table 328 Mpls Ldp Discovery Command Table 329 Show mpls Interface Command Table 330 Show Mpls Ldp Parameters Command Table 331 Show Mpls Ldp Discovery Command Table 332 Show Mpls Ldp Neighbor Command Table 333 Show Mpls Ldp Bindings Command Table 334 Topics In Chapter 20 sees Table 335 Ip Vrf Command c cccocnccconnnconancnnnnccnnn anno Table 336 Rd Command ssssssssssrssssrrrrssurrrrrernrrrrrens Table 337 ip Vrf Forwarding Command Table 338 ip Route Vrf Command sess Table 339 Router Ospf Vrf Command Table 340 Address family Command Table 341 Ping Vrf Command eene Table 342 Show Ip Vrf Command sese Table 343 Show Ip Vrf Interfaces Command Table 344 Show Ip Route Vrf Command Table 345 Show Ip Protocol Routing Vrf Comm
327. network addresses as an aggregated address This procedure describes how to configure inter area route aggregation in OSPF a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed OSPF is running on a network as described in above basic OSPF configuration 200 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Steps Introduction Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration 1 To configure area route aggregation use area lt area id gt range lt ip address gt lt net mask gt advertise not advertise command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 245 TABLE 245 INTER AREA ROUTE AGGREGATION COMMAND Command Command Command Format Mode Function area lt area id gt range lt ip address gt lt net mask gt advertise not advertise This configures the Route range of summary address in an area Result This sets range of summary address in an area Configuring Route Aggregation upon Route Redistribution After routes of other routing protocols are redistributed into the OSPF each independent route is advertised as an external LSA By means of aggregation these external routes can be advertised as an independent route which will greatly reduce the size of the link state database of the OSPF This below procedure describes how to configure inter area route aggregation in OSPF a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed OSPF is running on a network as desc
328. next slro loose terfac tunnel22 tunnel mode mpls traffic eng ip address 1 1 22 1 255 255 255 0 tunnel destination ipv4 100 1 1 3 tunnel mpls traffic eng path option th identifier 22 exit explicit path identifier 22 next 2342 SdbXut explicit path identifier 22 next zou SELECT Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration Overview Introduction This chapter describes multicast routing and the relevant configuration on the ZXR10 GER router Contents This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 375 ToPics IN CHAPTER 24 Topic Page No Overview 330 Multicast Tree 331 Multicast Routing Protocol 332 Multicast Common Configurations 334 Configuring IGMP 335 Configuring IGMP Timer 337 Configuring PIM SM 339 Setting PIM SM Global Parameters 341 PIM SM Policy Control 344 Configuring MSDP 345 MSDP Extended Configuration 346 MSDP Policy Configuration 347 348 Clearing the MSDP Status Static Multicast Configuration 349 Multicast Maintenance and Diagnosis 350 IGMP Maintenance and Diagnosis 351 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 329 330 Multicast Address I GMP Multicast Usage Multicast Group Members ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Topic Page No PIM SM Maintenance and Diagnosis 352 MSDP Maintenance and Diagnosis 356 Static Multicast Maintenance an
329. nfiguration esses 193 Figure 88 Ospf Authentication Example sss 195 Figure 89 Multi Area Ospf Configuration eese 198 Figure 90 Ospf Virtual Link Configuration 203 Figure 91 Is Is ATA oue detiene eae reote XR iade A 213 Figure 92 Is Is configuration Example ssss 215 Figure 93 Multi Area Configuration sess 222 Figure 94 Basic Bgp Configuration Example 230 Figure 95 Bgp Route Advertisment sse 232 Figure 96 Bgp Aggregation Advertisement 233 Figure 97 Bgp Multihop Configuration eessesses 235 Figure 98 Route Filtering by Means Of Nlri 238 Figure 99 Local Preference Attribute esses 241 Figure 100 Med Attribute ooococoncccconccnnncnncanccnncnnnnnnnnn nn 243 Figure 101 Bgp Synchoronization esses 246 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 371 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Figure 102 Bgp Route Reflector oooocccccocconcnconcconcnncnnnnnnos 248 Figure 103 Bgp Confederation ocococccoccnoncncnncnnncnncnncnnnnnnnos 250 Figure 104 Bgp Configuration Example suse 252 Figure 105 Policy Routing Configuration Example 262 Figure 106 Mpls Configuration example 281
330. nfigures the GRE tunnel tunnel key Interface n key configuration and enable the key option and configure a key Result This configures the GRE tunnel and enables the key option and configures a key Note The key strings at both ends of the tunnel must be the same 5 To configure the GRE tunnel and to enable the tunnel sequence option use tunnel sequencing command in tunnel configuration mode as shown in Table 318 TABLE 318 TUNNEL SEQUENCING COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function This configures the GRE tunnel and to enable the tunnel sequence option tunnel key Interface key configuration Result This configures the GRE tunnel and to enable the tunnel sequence option Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 269 270 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA 6 To configure the GRE tunnel and to enable the tunnel checksum option use tunnel checksum command in tunnel configuration mode as shown in Table 319 TABLE 319 TUNNEL CHECKSUM COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function This configures the GRE tunnel and to enable the tunnel checksum option tunnel key Interface lt key gt configuration Result This configures the GRE tunnel and to enable the tunnel checksum option END OF STEPS GRE Maintenance and Diagnosis Use the debug gre command to output the debugging contents of the GRE tunnel encapsulat
331. ng information exchanges This command permits the point to point non broadcast exchange of routing information when use with combination of passive interface router configuration command routing information exchanges between a subset of routers and access servers on a LAN Result This configures a peer router with whom routing information exchanges To enable authentication for RIP Version 2 packets and to specify set of keys that uses on an interface use ip rip authentication key command in RIP interface configuration mode as shown in Table 214 Use the no form of this command to prevent authentication TABLE 214 IP RIP AUTHENTICATION KEY Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip rip RIP Interface This designates a key that authentication Config can be used for simple text key lt key gt authentication of an interface lt key gt refers to authentication key in characters ranges from lt 1 16 gt This command specifies to accept only those RIP update packets coming from the peer that is authenticated Result This configures authentication for RIP routing updates To specify the type of authentication used in RIP Version 2 packets use ip rip authentication mode command in RIP interface configuration mode as shown in below table Use the no form of this command to restore clear text authentication Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH IP Split Horizon No IP Split
332. nk is each port normal It is off when the link is disconnected Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 39 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA RE 16FE RJDB44 Definition This is sixteen port 100M Ethernet electrical interface providing sixteen 10 100 1000BASE T Ethernet electrical interfaces of RJ45 the cable H ETH 008 is special that GER can use it Panel Figure 28 shows RE 16FE RJDB44 card FiGURE 28 PANEL VIEW OF THE RE 16FE RJDB44 RE 16FE RJDB44 Interfaces Table 43 shows interface features of RE 16FE RJDB44 card TABLE 43 INTERFACE FEATURES OF THE RE 16FE RJDB44 CARD Port Type Description In compliance with IEEE 802 3 From DB44 to RJ45 connector 10Base T Category 3 4 5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP are used Maximum transmission distance 185m In compliance with IEEE 802 3u From DB44 to RJ45 connector Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP are used Maximum transmission distance 100m 100Base T Indicators RE 16FE RJDB44 card panel has one LED indicators each port Table 44 describes their functions TABLE 44 DESCRIPTION OF INDICATORS ON THE RE 02GE CARD PANEL Indicators Function Description Link state indicator It is on when the link is normal Port and there is no data to send or receive It flashes Indicators when sending or receiving data It is off when the link is disconnected Power Supply Module Pow
333. nnection with all designated MSDP neighbors use clear ip msdp sa cache lt group address gt command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 409 348 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration TABLE 409 CLEAR IP MsDP PEER COMMAND Command Command Mode Command Function Format clear ip msdp Priviliged This clears the TCP sa cache connection with lt group all designated MSDP address gt neighbors Result This clears the TCP connection with all designated MSDP neighbors 2 To clear the MSDP SA cache entry use clear ip msdp statistics lt peer address gt command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 410 TABLE 410 CLEAR IP MsDP SA CACHE COMMAND Command Command Mode Command Function Format clear Ip msdp pages This clears the MSDP statistics peer address SA cache entry Result This clears the MSDP SA cache entry 3 To clear the statistics of the MSDP neighbor use clear ip msdp statistics lt peer address gt command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 411 TABLE 411 CLEAR IP MSDP STATISTICS COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode ip msdp sa filter Priviliged out peer This clears the statistics address list of the MSDP neighbor lt acl number gt Result This clears the statistics of the MSDP neighbor END OF STEPS Static Multicast Configuration This topic describes
334. nnel or an LDP tunnel Here P refers a router in the core of a carrier s network which is not connected to any router in any customer site but is a part of the tunnel in a PE pair P supports MPLS LSP or LDP but does not need to support VPN CE refers to a router or switch connected to a carrier s network in a customer site Normally CE refers to an IP router VPN function is provided by a PE router while P and CE routers do not have other VPN configuration requirements VPN IPv4 Address and Route Distinguisher RD L3 VPN may be connected to private networks via the Internet these private networks can use public addresses or private addresses When private networks use private addresses addresses between different private networks may be repeated To avoid repetition of private addresses public addresses can be used in network equipment to replace private addresses A solution is provided in RFC2547bis which uses an existing private network ID to generate a definite new address New address is a part of VPN IPv4 address cluster and is a BGP address cluster of the MP BGP protocol In a VPN IPv4 address there is a value used to differentiate different VPNs called Route Distinguisher RD Format of a VPN IPv4 address is an eight byte Router Distinguisher RD plus a four byte IP address RD is the eight byte value used for VPN differentiation An RD consists of the following domains Type domain two bytes De
335. nterface associated with the VRF If the interface is configured with an IP address in advance the original IP address will disappear and address reconfiguration is needed To define VRF route PE can define static routes or run dynamic routing protocols to implement automatic interaction with CE i To designate the vrf in static route configuration use ip route vrf lt vrf name gt lt prefix gt lt network mask gt lt forwarding router s address gt lt interface number gt lt distance metric gt tag lt tag gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 338 TABLE 338 IP ROUTE VRF COMMAND command Format Command Command Mode Function ip route vrf lt vrf name gt prefix lt network mask gt lt forwarding router s global config This sets up a address gt lt interface static route number gt lt distance metric gt tag lt tag gt Result This sets up a static route ii For different dynamic routing protocols the configurations on PE are different At present the version supports four protocols OSPF BGP ISIS and RIP To run an OSPF protocol PE should rerun the process by using the following command router ospf lt process id gt vrf vrf name in global configuration mode as shown in Table 339 TABLE 339 ROUTER OSPF VRF COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function router ospf lt process id gt vrf lt vrf name gt global config This enable
336. nual Volume I ZTERA and also fragmentation is needed an ICMP message will be returned the type is 3 the code is 4 with the MTU of the interface included When a router receives an IP datagram if the destination address is a local address and the protocol field of the header is 47 it indicates that the datagram has experienced GRE so resolution on the local router is needed After validity check the GRE packet should be mapped to the locally saved GRE tunnel ID according to the source and destination addresses of the GRE packet If the corresponding GRE tunnel does not exist the datagram will be dropped and then the GRE options will be processed subsequently System supports the key sequence checksum options If the key tag in the flag field in the GRE header is different from the key tag of the corresponding tunnel or the key tags are configured but the key values are different the datagram will be dropped Minus 1 from the TTL of the resolved IP data header further process it A routing process is used to judge whether the datagram is to be locally sent or forwarded Configuring GRE Below procedure gives information about GRE configuration Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To create a tunnel and enter into the interface configuration mode of the tunnel use interface lt tunnel number gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 314 TABLE 314 INTERFACE TUNNEL COMMAND Command Comman
337. o point links PPP also established a standard for assignment and management of IP addresses asynchronous start stop bit oriented synchronous encapsulation network protocol multiplexing link configuration as network layer address negotiation and data compression negotiation PPP supports these functions by providing an extensible Link Control Protocol LCP and a family of Network Control Protocols NCPs to negotiate optional configuration parameters and facilities In addition to IP PPP supports other protocols including Novell s Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX and DECnet PPP provides a method for transmitting datagram s over serial point to point links PPP contains three main components A method for encapsulating datagram s over serial links PPP uses High Level Data Link Control HDLC protocol as a basis for encapsulating datagram over point to point links An extensible LCP that establishes configures and test the data link connection A family of NCPs for establishing and configuring different network layer protocols PPP is designed to allow the simultaneous use of multiple network layer protocols PPP uses principles terminology and frame structure of International Organization for Standardization ISO HDLC procedures ISO 3309 1979 Transmission ISO 3309 1979 specifies HDLC frame structure for use in synchronous environments ISO 3309 1984 PDAD1 specifies proposed modifications to ISO 330
338. o 193 1 168 95 via fei 1 1 193 1 168 111 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 periodic update to 193 1 168 86 via fei 1 1 193 1 168 111 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 periodic update to 193 1 168 77 via fei 1 1 193 1 168 111 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 periodic update to 193 1 168 68 via fei 1 1 193 1 168 111 ZXR10 debug ip rip RIP protocol debugging is on ZXR1O 11 01 28 RIP building update entries 130 1 0 0 16 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 130 1 1 0 24 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 177 0 0 0 9 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag O 193 1 168 0 24 via 0 197 1 0 0 16 via 0 0 199 2 0 0 16 via 0 0 202 119 8 0 24 via 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 periodic update to 224 0 0 9 via 182 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 13 RIP Configuration pos3_3 1 193 1 1 111 T30 130 TY 193 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 via fei 1 1 193 1 168 111 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 via fei 1 1 193 1 168 111 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 via fei 1 1 193 1 168 111 e onu 0 0 16 via 0 0 0 0 1 0 24 via 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 via 0 0 0 0 1 0 24 via 0 0 0 0 metric 1 tag 0 metric 1 tag 0 metric 1 tag O metric 1 tag 0 periodic update to 193 1 168 95 periodic update to 193 1 168 86 periodic update to 193 1 168 77 11 01 28 RIP sending v2 periodic update to 193 1 168 68 vi
339. o do ATM Bridge configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Le 4 To select an ATM interface to be configured use interface command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 187 TABLE 187 INTERFACE COMMAND command command Command Function Format Mode interface global config This configures ATM interface Result This configures ATM interface To enable BCP Bridge use bridge enable command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 188 TABLE 188 BRIDGE ENABLE COMMAND Command Command 5 Format Mode Command Function bridge enable global config This enables BCP Bridge Result This enables BCP Bridge To configure interface forwarding attributes use ip forwarding mode command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 189 TABLE 189 IP FORWARDING MODE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode forwarding interface config Dun D E mode 3 Result This configures interface forwarding attributes To configure ATM PVC use atm pvc command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 190 TABLE 190 ATM Pvc COMMAND Command command Command Function Format Mode atm pvc interface config This configures ATM PVC Result This configures ATM PVC Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR 5 Chapter 10 Bridge Configuration Note ATM real interfaces do not support bridge The bridge enable attri
340. o take help in any command mode enter a question mark after the prompt of the system as shown below Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH 2 Chapter 4 Usage and Operations ZXR10 Exec commands enable Turn on privileged commands exit Exit from the EXEC login Login as a particular user logout Exit from the EXEC ping Send echo messages quit Quit from the EXEC show Show running system information telnet Open a telnet connection trace Trace route to destination who List users who is logining on ZXR10 Result A list of all commands in the mode and the brief description of the commands are displayed To view the list of commands or keywords beginning with character or character string Input the question mark behind a character or character string as shown below ZXR1O CO configure copy ZXR10dco Note There is no space between the character string and the question mark To view the command or keyword beginning with a unique character string use TAB key behind the character string as shown below Note There is no space between the character string and the TAB For example ZXR10fcon lt Tab gt ZXR1LO configure There is a space between configure and the cursor Input a question mark after a command a keyword or a parameter the next keyword or parameter to be input is listed and also a brief explanation is given There is a space in front of the
341. ols supported integrated IS IS 6 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Item Media interface protocols supported RMON Management Access control list ACL Network Address Translation NAT Hot backup and redundancy components Mean Time Between Failure MTBF Mean Time To Repair MTTR Electromagnetic compatibility Dimensions H x W x D Power supply and power consumption Ambient temperature Environment humidity Chapter 2 System Overview Specification 802 3 10Base T 802 3u 100Base TX 802 3x 1000Base SX and 1000Base LX 802 3z 1000Base SX and 1000Base LX E1 WAN Multi rate In accordance with RFC1757 supporting four groups statistics history alarm and events SNMP and CLI Command line Interface Implements the standard quintuple ACL supporting 100 000 user rules Implements source IP address translation of a network supporting 256K user rules Main processing card 1 1 hot backup Power module 1 1 redundancy design 2200000 hours 0 5 hours In light of the GJB 367 1 87 requirement 222mmx483mmx340mm 220VAC 50Hz or 48V 500W 5 C 45 C 20 90 without condensation Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 7 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA This page is intentionally blank 8 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 3 Str
342. om the designated MSDP neighbor in the SA cache interface table name gt Result This limits the number of SA messages from the designated MSDP neighbor in the SA cache table To limit the scope of the MSDP neighbor to which the multicast packets encapsulated into the SA packets to be sent use ip msdp ttl threshold lt peer address gt lt ttl value gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 405 TABLE 405 IP MsDP TTL THRESHOLD COMMAND Command Command Mode Command Function Format ip msdp ttl Global configuration This limits the scope threshold of the MSDP neighbor lt peer address gt to which the multicast lt ttl value gt packets encapsulated into the SA packets to be sent Result This limits the scope of the MSDP neighbor to which the multicast packets encapsulated into the SA packets to be sent MSDP Policy Configuration This topic describes how to configure MSDP policy Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed 1 To limit generation of the SA message use ip msdp sa filter in lt peer address gt list lt acl number gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 406 TABLE 406 IP MsDP REDISTRIBUTE COMMAND Command Command Mode Command Function Format ip msdp sa Global filter in lt peer configuration This limits generation of address gt list the SA message lt acl number gt Result This limits generation of the SA message Confidential and Pro
343. ommand Command Function Format Mode ip multicaste Global config This starts the multicast A protocol routing Result This starts the multicast protocol 2 To clear multicast routing use clear ip mroute command in Privileged mode as shown in Table 377 TABLE 377 CLEAR IP MROUTE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode clear ip This clears multicast routing mroute Global config table Result This clears multicast routing table END OF STEPS Configuring IGMP Below procedure gives information about configuring IGMP Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To start IGMP for different version according to the actual conditions use access group lt access list number gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 378 TABLE 378 IP IGMP VERSION COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip igmp This starts IGMP for different version Interface config version according to the actual version conditions Result This starts IGMP for different version according to the actual conditions Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 335 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA 2 To configure the group range allowing the IGMP to join use ip igmp access group lt access list number gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 379 TABLE 379 IP IGMP ACCESS GROUP COMMAND Command Com
344. on This sets the max number of MAC maxmac VFI address Result This sets the max number of MAC address 7 To configure Idp neighbor use command mpls Idp target session lt ip address gt in global configuration mode This is shown in Table 361 TABLE 361 MPLS LDP TARGET COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function mpls Idp target session global config This configures Idp neighbor lt ip address gt Result This configures Idp neighbor END OF STEPS Example Create VFI and configure the parameters such as vcid pwtype and peer Configure the loopback at PE1 P and PE2 Run the IGP protocol such as OSPF protocol between PE1 P and PE2 Enable mpls in the global configuration mode this also needs to enable on interface such as fei 1 2 at PE1 fei 2 1 and fei 2 2 at P fei 3 1 at PE2 Configure target session in PE1 and PE2 make PE1 and PE2 became neighbor Enable the vpls service in the interface fei 1 1 at PE1 fei 3 2 and fei 3 3 at PE2 This is shown in Figure 109 314 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR FIGURE 109 VPLS SERVICE Chapter 22 VPLS Configuration m mm PEI zu rei 1 2 Fei 2 1 anum PE1 configuration HOCU CO CU M CU CO CU ti El config vfi E El config vfi 1 config vfi D config vfi config vfi El config bras El config vfi vpls a
345. on and status of lt interface an OSPF interface 206 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration Command Command Command Function Format Mode number gt process lt process id gt Result This shows the current configuration and status of an OSPF interface To display OSPF neighbors use show ip ospf neighbor interface lt interface number gt neighbor id lt neighbor gt process lt process id gt command in Exec mode as shown in Table 253 TABLE 253 SHOW IP OSPF NEIGHBOR COMMAND Command Format Command Mode Command Function show ip ospf neighbor interface lt interface number gt This displays the neighbor id Exec information about lt neighbor gt an OSPF neighbor process lt process id gt Result This shows the information about an OSPF neighbor Important If routing information between two routers cannot implement communications possibly the adjacency has not been formed yet Check whether the adjacency status between two OSPF routers is FULL The FULL status is a flat indicating normal running between the OSPF protocols To display an OSPF link state database use show ip ospf database in Exec mode as shown in Table 254 TABLE 254 SHOW IP OSPF DATABASE Command Command Command Function Format Mode This displays full or partial Exec information about the link state database show ip ospf database Result This shows ful
346. on is disabled on an interface and there is requirement to enable it use the ip split horizon command to restore the split horizon mechanism Important In general changing state of the default for the ip split horizon command is not recommended this is certain that application requires a change in order to properly advertise routes If split horizon is disabled on a serial interface and that interface is attached to a packet switched network this is must to disable split horizon or all routers and access servers in any relevant multicast groups on that network Result This configures split horizon mechanism Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 177 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA 7 To enable the poison reverse mechanism use the ip poison reverse command in RIP interface configuration mode as shown in Table 217 To disable the split horizon mechanism use the no form of this command TABLE 217 IP POISON REVERSE COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip poison RIP Interface This enables redistribution of reverse Config other protocols in RIP routing domain Result This enables redistribution of other protocols in RIP routing domain 8 To redistribute a route from another routing domain to rip routing domain use command redistribute protocol metric lt value gt route map lt map tag gt in RIP configuration mode as shown in Ta
347. on mode use interface lt interface number gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 197 TABLE 197 INTERFACE CoNFIG COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode interface enterar Global config This enters into interface numbers configuration mode Result This enables to enter into interface configuration mode 3 To configure an IP address of an interface use ip address ip address lt net mask gt lt broadcast address gt in interface config mode as shown in Table 198 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 157 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Overview Procedure ARP aging time TABLE 198 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip address Interface lt ip address gt This configures an ip address of lt net mask gt an interface lt broadcast address gt Result This configures an ip address of an interface END OF STEPS Example Suppose a Gigabit Ethernet interface card is inserted into slot 3 of ZXR10 GER to configure an IP address of second interface as 192 168 3 1 and to set mask code to 255 255 255 0 The detailed configuration is as follows ZXR10 config interface gei 3 2 ZXR10 config if ip address 192 168 3 1 255 255 255 0 show ip interface command can be used to view an IP address of the interface Configuring ARP When a piece of network equipment
348. onfig interface loopbackl ZXR10 R3 config if fip address T0 1x33 255 255 255 0 R3 config finterface fei 1 1 0 R3 config if address 255 255 0 ip LO R3 config if ip pim sm 10 R3 config finterface fei 1 2 0 R3 config if address 255 255 440 ip 0 R3 config if ip pim sm O_R3 config router ospf 1 LO_R3 config router network 255 255 0 area 0 0 0 0 10_R3 config ip multicast routing 10_R3 config router pimsm 10_R3 config router rp candidate ority 30 10_R3 config router bsr candidate 30 10 10 30 2 10 10 40 2 10 0 0 0 loopbackl loopbackl MSDP Configuration Example R1 configuration Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Assign R1 and R3 as a PIMS SM domain and R2 as another PIMS SM domain and then enable the multicast data streams of the two PIMS SM domains to inter work through the MSDP ZTERH Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration ZXR10_R1 config in ZXR10_R1 config if 2 094 2 99429942595 ZXR10_R1 config in ZXR10_R1 config if 255 255422554 0 ZXR10_R1 config if ZXR10_R1 config in ZXR10_R1 config if 2554 255 4 2595 0 ZXR10_R1 config if ZXR10_R1 config if ZXR10_R1 config in ZXR10 Rl1 config if 2900 42904 205 v U ZXR10_R1 config if ZX ZX 0 R1 R10 Rl config rou 0 ZXR10_R1 config ip R 1 R 1 0 255 area 0 0 ZX ZX priority 10 terface loopbackl ip address terface fei 1
349. onfig router neighbor 128 213 11 1 remote as 256 ZXR10_R4 config ip as path access list 7 permit 300 ZXR10_R4 config route map setlocalin permit 10 ZXR10_R4 config route map match as path 7 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 241 242 I ntroduction Purpose Prerequisites Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA ZXR10_R4 config route map set local preference 200 ZXR10_R4 config route map setlocalin permit 20 ZXR10_R4 config route map set local preference 150 MED Attribute The metric attribute is also called the MED Multi_Exit_Discrimination attribute which is used for route interaction and decision among ASs By default a router only compares the metric value of BGP neighbors from the same AS Refer to below procedure for MED attribute configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER a Refer Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a BGP is running on a network 1 If neighbors from different ASs are to be compared use bgp always compare med command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 294 TABLE 294 BGP ALWAYS MED ATTRIBUTE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This configures the local Route precedence value of routes advertised by BGP bgp always compare med Result This configures the local precedence value of routes advertised by BGP The default metric value is 0 Smaller is the metric value the higher t
350. onfiguring Administrative Distance oocococccconcnconancnnncconnnnnos 205 OSPF Maintenance amp Diagnosis ismertesse ainina 206 Chapter UG Deme x li SS Configuration ire eooun ie rana co nan sa sones nacianinas 2 LL OVERVIGW zen od ere ike deeem mibi ie eec BA 211 ISIS OVerVIeW 5 i e seeded ss ence a 211 IS IS Ar a s uccide esser ERR catenin NEIN CERE EG EN M AERE HORE 212 DTS SuROUter PriOrlty tarta iix OR ARR RR QUE a heri 213 Basic IS IS Configuration miii 213 Configuring Global IS IS Parameters sssseeseeeees 216 IS IS Interface Parameters esee aa ee 218 Configuring IS IS Authentication ocoocococcncnnnncnnnncnnanancnancnnns 220 Multi Area IS IS a rue rede edd ux Coetu oa xx ER ete 222 Chapter 16 ii ae Y BGP CoOnFiqQuration ys iicicniosinanica eire sn aoro eu cu sa oa asa ou ERU NR EUER 227 OVEIVIQW E 227 BGPIOVERVIGW zd idee ERU RR PROS EA REI SR ERN DA ERE DAE RENE UE EMEN 228 Basic BGP Configuration sicrete eee da 229 BGP Route Advertisement cete eterne eter ener 231 BGP Aggregation Advertisement csssesssseseneee 232 Configuring Multi Hop in EBGP sessmmme 234 Filtering Routes using Route Map sesesm me 236 Route Filtering by Means of NURI weiss iine ia 237 Route Filtering by Means of AS PATH ssseessenmee 239 Local Preference Attribute recen ener pen n hern ed nm 240 MED Att ibU te vecino n 242 Community String
351. open standard and different types of equipment from multiple manufacturers can implement protocol interconnection OSPF version 1 is defined in RFC1131 At present OSPF version 2 is used which is defined in RFC2328 ZXR10 GER supports OSPF of version 2 completely Fast convergence OSPF guarantees database synchronization and also calculates routing table synchronously by means of fast flooding of link state update No route loop Shortest Path First SPF algorithm is applied to guarantee that no loops will be generated Route aggregation Reduces the size of the routing table a Classless routing completely supporting Variable Length Subnet Mask VLSM and Classless Inter Domain Routing CIDR Reduction of network bandwidth Since triggered update mechanism is used the update information will be sent only when the network changes Support interface packet authentication to guarantee the security of routing calculation Sending update in multicast mode Reduces interferences upon unrelated network equipment while plays the broadcast role at the same time A network type that is connected to an interface is used to judge the default OSPF behavior on interface The network type affects the adjacency formation and method in which a router assigns timers to the interface OSPF covers the following five network types Broadcast network a Non broadcast Multi access NBMA network a Point to point ne
352. ork 170 20 0 0 255 255 0 0 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 2 2 2 1 remote as 300 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 3 3 3 3 255 0 0 0 ZXR10 R2 config z router bgp 200 ZXR10_R2 config router network 170 10 0 0 255 255 0 0 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 3 3 3 1 remote as 300 Configuration of R3 ZXR10_R3 config interface fei_1 1 ZXR10_R3 config if ip address 2 2 2 1 255 0 0 0 ZXR10_R3 config interface fei_1 2 ZXR10_R3 config if ip address 3 3 3 1 255 0 0 0 ZXR10_R3 config interface fei_1 3 ZXR10_R3 config if ip address 4 4 4 1 255 0 0 0 ZXR10 R3 config zrouter bgp 300 ZXR10 R3 config router neighbor 2 2 2 2 remote as 100 ZXR10 R3 config router neighbor 3 3 3 3 remote as 200 ZXR10 R3 config router neighbor 4 4 4 4 remote as 400 ZXR10_R3 config router aggregate address 170 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 summary only R3 learns two routes 170 20 0 0 and 170 10 0 0 but only advertises the aggregated route 170 0 0 0 8 Pay attention to the parameter summary only in the aggregation advertisement command If the parameter is not available R3 will advertise the aggregated route as well as the detailed route Configuration of R4 ZXR10_R4 config interface fei 1 1 ZXR10_R4 config if ip address 4 4 4 4 255 0 0 0 ZXR10_R4 config router bgp 400 ZXR10_R4 config router neighbor 4 4 4 1 remote as 300 Configuring Multi Hop in EBGP Introduction Normally an EBGP neighbor needs
353. ormat of config E1 channel number gt framing Result This sets the framing format of El channel To create a CPOS interface in the E1 encapsulation format use tug 2 Vtg number el lt El number gt channel group 1 timeslots lt 1 31 gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 133 TABLE 133 E1 CPOS INTERFACE Command Command Command Function Format Mode tug 2 Vtg number el lt El number gt Interface This creates a CPOS interface in channel config the El encapsulation format group 1 timeslots lt 1 31 gt Result This creates a CPOS interface in the El encapsulation format To set the clock source of E1 channel use tug 2 lt Vtg number el El number gt clock source command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 134 TABLE 134 E1 CLOCK SOURCE Command Command Command Function Format Mode tug 2 lt Vtg Interface This sets the clock source of El number gt config channel Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 113 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Purpose Prerequisite Command Command Command Function Format Mode el lt El number gt clock source Result This sets the clock source of Ei channel 5 To set frame as a sonet use sonet command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 135 TABLE 135 SONET FRAMING Command Command Command Function Format Mode sonet teraga
354. orresponding indicator Their functions are shown in Table 40 38 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 3 Structure and Principles TABLE 40 RE 16CE1 120DB44 CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description Indicator of each It is constantly on when the link is normal It is port off when the link is disconnected RE 16CE1 75DB44 Definition It is a 16 port channelized El interface and provides 16 El interfaces in compliance with ITU T G 703 and G 704 standards Function Each port supports the sending and receiving functions The receiving end implements the function of data receiving framing and HDLC link control Sending end organizes the data into HDB3 codes and sends them to lines Panel Figure 27 shows RE 16CE1 75DB44 Card FIGURE 27 RE 16CE1 75DB44 CARD RE 16CE1 75DB44 Interfaces Table 41 shows RE 16CE1 75DB44 card interface features TABLE 41 INTERFACE FEATURES OF THE RE 16CE1 75DB44 CARD Port Type Description In compliance with ITU G 703 and G 704 Supporting G 704 framing Channelized E1 Adopting 75 micro coaxial cable Adopting line code of HDB3 A channelized Elcontroller has 31 valid timeslots Indicators On the RE 16CE1 75DB44 card each interface has one corresponding indicator Their functions are shown in Table 42 TABLE 42 RE 16CE1 75DB44 CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description Indicator of Link state indicator It is on when the li
355. ort types and features TABLE 19 RE 01CP3 SFP INTERFACE FEATURES SFP Optical Module Feature LC connector multi mode fiber SFP 2KM Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 2km LC connector single mode fiber SFP 15KM Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 15km LC connector single mode fiber SFP 40KM Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 40km LC connector single mode fiber SFP 80KM Wavelength 1550 nm Max transmission distance 80 km Indicators RE 01CP3 SFP card has three LED indicators Table 20 describes their functions TABLE 20 RE 01CP3 SFP CARD INDICATORS Function Description Indicators This is constantly on if the interface card is working NUM normally and this goes off if the interface card fails This is constantly on in the case of data sending and DATA receiving and this is off in the case if data sending or receiving fails This is constantly on in the case of successful PPP link LINK setup and This is off in the case of PPP link setup failure Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 25 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Definition Functions Panel Interfaces Indicators RE 01GP48 S02KLC This is a one port POS48 single channel optical interface card providing one channel standard OC 48c STM 16c POS optical interface In the receiving direction this cad extracts paylo
356. orti eire mre eere dea 48 Configuring Telnet Connection sissid niinniin 50 Configuring SSH eiecit a eeu Enn Erden 52 Configuring SSELin Roter rtr e ere rea 54 Configuring SSH Client ie itu deutet rr rere ed 55 Command Mode wie ais 57 User Mode iere tpe dade cepe triste Ede cin enean 57 Privileged Mode 2 sett rrr tremere ntn sa a a naa 58 Global Config ration Modest 58 Interface Configuration Mode siii e aed 59 Channelized Configuration MOAe ococcccoccncnnnncnnnncnannnnnnnnncnannss 59 Route Configuration Mode iei n terr en Rr Ph ta a Rr naa 59 Diagnosis MOde erc he dd 60 Online Help 2 35 rine A 60 Available Commnands 2 rtr ru n etre Re RE He nen HR HER Ra 60 Command History sois ex roi lex ii 62 Chapter Disnei bd seen OS System Management enses OS Introduction to File System inen cti exe da cil 63 File Managerieht re ee ang a a a 64 TFTP Configuration s steer eere ren re XE RR RENE IRE 67 Software Version UpgradinQ ocooccccconconnncnncnnncnnnnnncannnaneno 72 Version Upgrade in case of System Abnormality 73 Version Upgrade in Case of Normal System esses 76 Data Backup and RecOVery wane iex irr E AO PR 78 Configuring System Parameters 0cococcocnncnnnnoncnnnncnnnnenanennnnnanes 80 Viewing System Information eicere tee rer enim eene 81 Chapter 6 nucis e aiias a aun a Un ua uPIR ua Adae HRPGn Cu saa pMM Ea as OO Inte
357. oth the versions ip rip send version command to override the default behavior of RIP as specified by the router version command This command applies only to the interface configuration Result These commands specify RIP versions for receiving and sending routing updates Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 179 180 Purpose Prerequisites Steps J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA RIP Maintenance Diagnosis This below procedure describes debugging of Routing information protocol on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Make sure that RIP is running on a network as described in above basic RIP configurations To display protocol information use show ip rip command in Exec mode as shown in Table 221 TABLE 221 SHow IP RIP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip rip Exec This displays the basic RIP running information Result This show basic rip routing information To display rip routing interface and its parameters information use show ip rip interface lt interface number gt in Exec mode as shown in Table 222 TABLE 222 SHoW IP RIP INTERFACE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show Ip rip Exec This displays the current interface E configuration and status of interface an RIP interface number Result This show rip routing interface information and
358. otiation auto command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 85 TABLE 85 INTERFACE AUTOCONFIG COMMAND Command Command A Command Function Format Mode negotiation Interface This enables auto negotiation of auto gigabit Ethernet interface Result This configures auto negotiation of gigabit Ethernet interface 86 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Introduction Channelized Mode Chapter 6 Interface Configuration Note Configuration of duplex mode is only applicable to Fast Ethernet interfaces and negotiation is only applicable to Gigabit Ethernet interfaces END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 56 interface of ZTE ZXR10 GER is connected to the et 2 1 interface of ZXR10 routing switch FIGURE 56 ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION 10 1 1 1 30 erem Fol_1 1 as mU roi 172 AA ZXR10 A 10 1 1 2 30 ZXR10 B Configuration of ZXR10 A ZXR10 config interface fei 1 2 ZXR10 config if ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 config if full duplex Configuration of ZXR10 B ZXR10 config interface fei_1 1 ZXR10 config if ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10 config full duplex Configuring E1 Interface Similar to the North American T 1 E1 is the European format for digital transmission E1 interfaces have found wide application in Europe and China E1 carries signals at 2 Mbps 32 channels at 64Kbps with 2 channels reserved for signaling and controllin
359. outer af tftexit address family ZXR10 config router taddress family vpnv4 ZXR10 config router af ineighbor 10 10 3 3 activate ZXR10 config router af texit address family 5 To configure MPBGP following steps are required After learning a VRF route from CE the PE should advertise the route to other PEs In this case MPBGP should be configured in the following three steps i In BGP route configuration mode use the neighbor command to designate a PE peer ii Enter the address familary vpnv4 address mode of the BGP and activate the peer 294 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration Command Command Command Function Format Mode address This enables to enter into BGP family Route vpnv4 address mode neighbor lt ip address gt Address This activates PE peer activate Result This enables to enter into BGP address mode Result This activates PE peer END OF STEPS MPLS VPN Configuration Example An MPLS VPN configuration example is given in Figure 107 FIGURE 107 MPLS VPN EXAMPLE PE1 Fei 1 5 P Fei 3 1 PE2 Fei 3 2 10 10 10 12 1 24 10 10 23 2 24 Fei 1 2 10 1 1 1 24 10 10 10 1 24 F0 0 F0 0 10 10 1 1 2 24 10 10 10 2 24 CE1 CE2 CISCO2600 CISCO2600 As shown in Figure 107 CE1 and CE2 belong to the same VPN The loopback address of CE1 is 100 1 1 1 24 and that of CE2 is 200 1 1 1 24 Proper VPN conf
360. p vrf lt vrf name gt command in Table 335 TABLE 335 IP VRF COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip vrf vrf global config This defines the name of a VPN name Result This defines the name of a VPN The length of the name lasts one through sixteen characters The name is only valid locally which will be used when an interface is bound with the VPN 2 To define the RD of the VRF and the Route Target RT import export policy use rd route distinguisher command in vrf command mode as shown in Table 336 TABLE 336 RD COMMAND Command Format command Command Function Mode rd lt route VRF This defines the RD of distinguisher gt the VRF route target This creates route target both import export VRF extension community route target ext attribute related to the community VRF Result This defines the RD of the VRF Result This creates route target extension community attribute related to the VRF 3 To define the association of a designated interface with the VRF use ip vrf forwarding lt vrf name gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 337 292 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR 4 Chapter 20 MPLS VPN Configuration TABLE 337 iP VRF FORWARDING COMMAND commana command Command Function Format Mode T E interface This defines an interface g config associated with the VRF lt vrf name gt Result This defines an i
361. performs route search and receive packets for policy processing This module sends data link layer packet and receiving interface information to protocol processor module through local channel over the CPU Protocol processor module performs protocol processing on the received packets Data Packet Forwarding Packet forwarding process is as follows Interface module de capsulate the received packets on physical layer to form packets encapsulated on data link layer and then sends them together with the receiving interface information to the network processor module Network processor module performs route search and receive packets for policy processing As a result the packets are forwarded from local router multiple interfaces It encapsulates layer 3 packets through switching header and then sends the switching packets to the switching network via fast switching channel Switching network switches the packets that are inserted to one or more switching channels according to the switching header information and outputs them to target network processor module Target network processor module receives the encapsulated packets that are sent by the switching network through fast switching channel Corresponding output interface sends them in layer 2 encapsulation format towards one or more interface modules for processing according to the switching header information of the packets Interface module outputs the received layer 2 enca
362. perience in R amp D and carrier class communication products manufacturing ZTE has designed and manufactured ZXR10 GER The router in modular structure can provide various service interfaces Key module of the system adopts the 1 1 redundancy design improving the safety and reliability of the system High speed network processor technology in combination with the effective software technology implements the fast routing policy This is the priority product for establishing the convergence access for enterprise networks and acts for them as the basic platform for the ISP to provide integrated services Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 3 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 4 ZTE ZXR10 GER is classified into different models according to their modular structure performance interface cards capabilities A detail of each model is given below processing Product ZXR10 is divided into to three models This is described in below Models table Topic Page No ZXR10 GERO2 GER04 4 ZXR10 GER 08 5 Physical Interfaces 5 Router Operating System 6 Technical Features and Parameters 6 ZXR10 GERO2 GER04 Figure 1 shows ZXR10 GERO2 back panel view FIGURE 1 ZXR10 GERO2 BACK PANEL VIEW O Cerrar Figure 2 shows ZXR10 GERO4 back panel view FIGURE 2 ZXR10 GERO4 BACK PANEL VIEW a l pp Et s 1 E E 1
363. ple ocococcoccccncnnnncnnncrnnnnnnanannnnns 358 MGI OS SAN ii SOD Acronyms and Abbreviations esses 365 Figures eem ECT p reU MMC OS WAX lA This page is intentionally blank About This Manual Purpose This manual provides procedures and guidelines that support the user operation on ZXRGER 02 04 08 Router Intended Audience This document is intended for engineers and technicians who perform operation activities on ZXRGER 02 04 08 Router Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge To use this document effectively users should have a general understanding of OSI Model Familiarity with the following is helpful Protocols Routing Concepts Data Communication Terminologies What Is in This Manual This manual contains the following chapters TABLE 1 CHAPTER SUMMARY Chapter Summary Chapter 1 Safety This chapter introduces the safety Instructions instructions and sign descriptions Chapter 2 System This chapter describes ZXR10 GER Overview software and hardware functions Chapter 3 Structure and This chapter describes ZXR10 GER Principles working procedures This also describes system modules in details Chapter 4 Usage and This chapter describes common Operations configuration methods command Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION i ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I Chapter Chapter 5 System Management Chapter 6 Interface Configurat
364. ples AUX port enables to monitor the equipment remotely AUX port is a DBO male port pin Therefore it needs to be matched with the DB9 female port interpolation Table 12 shows AUX port configuration TABLE 12 AUX PORT CONFIGURATIONS SMP AUX Signal DB9 End Signal 1 T232DCD 7 RTS 2 T232RX 3 TX 3 T232TX 2 RX 4 T232DTR 6 DSR 5 GND 5 GND 6 T232DSR 4 DTR 7 T232RTS 1 DCD 8 I NM 8 Not connected 9 T232RI 9 RI 10 100 1000Base T Ethernet interfaces are available on SMNP front panel This port is a management port connecting the system to the background This interface can serve as an out band router NM port The features of 10 100 1000Base T Ethernet interface are listed in Table 13 TABLE 13 ETHERNET PORT SPECIFICATIONS Port Type Specifications In compliance with IEEE 802 3 RJ45 connector Category 3 4 and 5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP Maximum transmission distance 185m 100Base T In compliance with IEEE 802 3 100 1000Bas RJ45 connector e T Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP Maximum transmission distance 100 m Note When the interface is connected with a host straight through network cable is used when it is connected with a hub switch or router a crossover cable is used Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 21 USB Interface I ndicators Buttons ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTE ZXR10 GER02 04 has a USB interface po
365. prietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 347 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDR According to the configured ACL rules only the S G multicast routing entries that meet such rules can occur in the SA message generated by a MSDP neighbor 2 To set to filter the SA message from a designated MSDP neighbor use ip msdp sa filter in lt peer address gt list lt acl number gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 407 TABLE 407 IP MsDP SA FILTER IN COMMAND Command Command Mode Command Function Format ip msdp Global This sets to filter the redistribute list configuration SA message from a lt acl number gt designated MSDP neighbor Result This sets to filter the SA message from a designated MSDP neighbor 3 To set filter the SA message sent to a designated MSDP neighbor use clear ip msdp peer lt peer address gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 408 TABLE 408 IP MsDP SA FILTER OUT COMMAND Command Command Mode Command Function Format clear ip msdp Global This set filter the SA peer lt peer configuration message sent to a address gt designated MSDP neighbor Result This set filter the SA message sent to a designated MSDP neighbor END OF STEPS Clearing the MSDP Status Purpose This topic describes how to clear the MSDP status Prerequisites Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed Steps 1 To clear the TCP co
366. psulated packets through the corresponding physical interface Packet Discarding Interface module de capsulate the received packets on physical layer to form data link layer packets and then sends them together with the receiving interface information to the network processor module Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 13 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Definition Network processor module performs route search and receive packets for policy processing It discards the packet directly if information available is to discard this packet Hardware Structure ZXR10 GER system consists of chassis power supply boards fan plug in boxes and backplanes System adopts the international standard 19 inch plug in box series with the dimensions height x width x depth being 221 5mmx442mmx380mm Installed side ear dimensions is 221 5mmx483mmx380mm ZXR10 GER installs in outside or fixed standard cabinet ZXR10 GER Hardware structure is described according to product models These models are described in the following table Topic Page No ZXR10 GERO2 04 Hardware Structure 14 ZXR10 GERO8 Hardware Structure 15 ZXR10 GERO02 04 Hardware Structure Figure 7 shows ZXR10 GERO2 hardware structure FIGURE 7 ZXR10 GERO2 HARDWARE STRUCTURE Service interface card Service interface card 14 2H FAN System main control module Power module 1 Power mo
367. pt as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its licensee the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice Users may visit ZTE technical support website http ensupport zte com cn to inquire related information The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION Revision History Date Revision No Serial No Reason for Issue Mar 31 2007 R1 0 sjzl20070733 First edition ZTE CORPORATION Values Your Comments amp Suggestions Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our product documentation and offer better services to our customers Please fax to 86 755 26772236 or mail to Documentation R amp D Department ZTE CORPORATION ZTE Plaza A Wing Keji Road South Hi Tech Industrial Park Shenzhen P R China 518057 Thank you for your cooperation Document Name ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume Document Revision Product Version V2 6 03 Number Equipment Serial No sjzI20070733 Installation Date Presentation Introductions Procedures Illustrations Completeness Level of Detail Organization Appearance Good Fair Average Poor Bad N A as Accessibility of this f
368. query response time value carried by interval Interface contig query messages when they lt seconds gt are sent by the IGMP Result This configures the maximum response time value carried by query messages when they are sent by the IGMP 3 To configure the timeout length of the IGMP querier use ip igmp querier timeout lt seconds gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 384 TABLE 384 IP IGMP QUERIER COMMAND command Eorum Command Function Format Mode Se This configures the timeout of EE the IGMP querier This timer is cae Interface config related to the frequency of the re elected for querier in a lt seconds gt network Result This configures the timeout of the IGMP querier This timer is related to the frequency of the re elected for querier in a network 4 To configure the query interval of a specific IGMP group use ip igmp last member query interval lt seconds gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 385 TABLE 385 IP IGMP LAST MEMBER COMMAND command command Command Function Format Mode ip igmp Interface config This configures the query querier interval of a specific IGMP 338 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Basic PIM SM Configuration Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration Command Command Command Function Format Mode timeout group lt seconds gt Result This configures t
369. question mark For example ZXR10 configure terminal Enter configuration mode ZXR1LO configure If incorrect command keyword or parameter is input the error isolation is offered with the sign in the user interface after you press ENTER The sign is below the first character of the input incorrect command keyword or parameter For example Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 61 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA ZXR10fvon ter A Invalid input detected at marker ZXR10 END OF STEPS Example In the following example suppose that a clock is to be set and the context sensitive help is used to check the syntax for setting the clock ZXR10s4cl1 clear clock ZXR1O0 clock set Set the time and date ZXR10 clock set hh mm ss Current Time ZXR10fclock set 13 32 00 o Incomplete command ZXR10 At the end of the above example the system prompts that the command is not complete and other keyword or parameter should be input ZXR10 GER also allows the command or keyword to be abbreviated into a character or character string that uniquely identifies this command or keyword For example the show command can be abbreviated to sh or sho Command History Input User interface supports the function of recording input Commands commands A maximum of ten history commands can be recorded The function is very u
370. r Routing Protocols Introduction Different dynamic routing protocols can implement the sharing of routing information by means of route redistribution In OSPF the routing information of other routing protocols is routing information external to the AS The routing information external to an AS can be flooded to the entire OSPF network via LSAs of the OSPF only after the information is redistributed to the OSPF protocol Purpose 204 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Prerequisites Steps Related Information Introduction Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration Refer to below procedure for configuration of redistribution of other routing protocols into OSPF Router Command Line Interface has been accessed OSPF is running on a network as described in above basic OSPF configuration 1 Use the redistribute command to control the redistribution of routes of other routing protocols into an OSPF autonomous system in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 249 TABLE 249 REDISTRIBUTE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode redistribute This controls the protocol as redistribution of routes as no peer these routes meet the lt peer address gt relative conditions of tag lt tag value gt Route other protocols into an metric lt value gt OSPF autonomous system metric type After the command is lt type gt route carried out
371. racters Result This command sets prompt into designated directory like flash directory name To return back to the root directory use cd command as shown in Table 57 TABLE 57 CD COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode This command makes return to ed EXER root directory Result This permits to go back to root directory Important This is to notice down that there is one space after writing Cd and then To make directory in flash use mkdir lt directory name gt command as shown in Table 58 TABLE 58 MKDIR COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode EE This creates new directory in directory Exec flash name lt directory name gt represents 1 32 characters Result This makes a new directory in flash Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 65 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA 7 To delete a directory in flash use rmdir lt directory name gt command as shown in Table 59 TABLE 59 RMDIR COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode rmdir lt directory Exec This deletes directory in flash name gt Result This deletes a designated directory in flash 8 To modify name of directory in flash use rename oldname lt newname gt command as shown in Table 60 TABLE 60 RMDIR COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode rename This modifies
372. ration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config interface pos3_3 1 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R2 config if ppp authentication pap ZXR10_R2 config if ppp pap sent username pap user password hello ZXR10_R2 config if ppp open Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP Background Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP verifies the identity of peer by means of a three way handshake These are the general steps performed in CHAP LCP Link Control Protocol phase is complete CHAP is negotiated between both devices a Authenticator sends a challenge message to peer Peer responds with a value calculated through a one way hash function Message Digest 5 MD5 a Authenticator checks response against its own calculation of expected hash value If values match authentication is successful Otherwise connection is terminated 136 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 9 Link Protocol Configuration This authentication method depends on a secret known only to authenticator and peer The secret is not sent over the link Although authentication is only one way this can negotiate CHAP in both directions with the help of the same secret set for mutual authentication This procedure describes how to do challenge handshake authentication protocol CHAP on ZTE ZXR10 GER Routers Router CLI Privileged Mode
373. rease Some other VPN technologies are described as follows Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Definition Simplest VPN Technology IP Datagram MTU Chapter 18 GRE Configuration The encryption decryption technology is a mature technology in data communications The VPN can directly use the existing technology The key management technology is intended to guarantee secure transfer of a key on a public data network so that the key will not be stolen The existing key management technology is divided into two types SKIP and ISAKMP OAKLEY SKIP uses the calculation rules of Diffie Hellman to transfer keys on networks In ISAKMP both parties have two keys used for public or private applications The most common identity authentication technologies are user name password and card authentication Some other latest technologies such as MPLS VPN need the corresponding services of the ISP GRE Overview General Route Encapsulation GRE means that an IP header is added externally to an IP packet that is to say the private data is processed in a disguise way and added with a jacket and then is sent to other places Since IP addresses of a private enterprise network are normally planned by the enterprise itself so correct routing cannot be completed between the enterprise network and the external Internet However on the egress of the enterprise network normally there will be
374. ress command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 146 TABLE 146 VLAN FORWARDING INGRESS Command Command Command Function Format Mode A Interface This configures the forwarding z g config table of the V_Switch ingress Result This configures the forwarding table of the V_Switch END OF STEPS Example Introduction The following takes the Ethernet interface as an example to introduce V Switch configuration For detailed V Switch transparent transmission configurations of the POS and ATM interfaces refer to Chapter 10 Bridge Configuration As shown in Figure 71 the fei 1 3 interface of the ZXR10 GER is connected to the user side of the BAS and the fei 1 4 interface is connected to the network side of the BAS PPPoE The fei 1 3 interface of the ZXR10 GER connects PPPoE users Connection and the fei 1 2 interface connects dedicated line users The VLAN ID range of PPPoE users is 10 19 The corresponding VLAN ID range at the user side of the BAS is 20 29 and that of dedicated line users is 3031 120 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 7 V_Switch Configuration FIGURE 71 V_SWITCH CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE Internet ZXR10 Fei_1 4 BAS Fei l 3pe 1 Fei 1 2 EEAS 99990990997 Switch Switch a a al fa PPPoE user PPPoE user Dedicated Dedicated line user line user There are two methods for ZX
375. rface Configuration 1e OS siad p DT 83 Interfaces Types is deett parias 83 Interface Naming Rules eii eset hon rrr e ERR Lc Ens 84 Physical Interfaces oreina entai ee id 85 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces ies eese ee nee na nens 85 Configuring Et Interface ir brennt ine 87 Configuring CE3 Interface weds nd is 91 Configuring Packet over Sonet oocccccccnconcnnnncncnnancnnnncnnnannennnnss 95 Configuring ATMs ii RE oh dase 99 Configuring VLAN Sub Interface sassis hreinni ni iiia 103 Configuring Smart GEOUp aiii dci ra ara Rr hn Ret eR 105 Configuring M ltilirile i iret eee err e rea 107 Configuring CPOS Interface 2i eite dee rct rre eren 110 Aug 3 Mappling ia 111 El Encapsulation AU necia ini eese ere eee Ea ra a nagd 112 E1 Encaps lation VT 2 cnet rere nv ee Rer S RU ale noe 114 Chapter 7 eter rw LLO V Switch Configuration eren 119 OVERVIEW aseni aaae a aE E EAA E AAA AENA Aa E ATE E DNE on 119 V SWiteh OVEIVIEW A A deer De ge RD DR RO RYE RE 119 Configuring VSWItCA isco ocior reet ht re aide add e in en een 119 V Switch Maintenance and Diagnosis occococconnccncnnnncnnnennnnnaos 122 Chapter 8 mm TTPEEN L2O Smart Group Configuration 125 OVERVIEW a 125 SMARTGROUP OVERVIEW seek derives dece ate dea rede e AEE ARR 125 Configuring SMARTGROUDP 5 ceterae nara eda n Rr na e 126 SMART
376. rface fei 2 6 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_Ri config if ip router isis Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 215 216 Related I nformation Overview Purpose Prerequisite Steps ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config router isis ZXR10_R2 config router area 01 ZXR10_R2 config router system id 00D0 D0C7 5460 ZXR10 R2 config router exit ZXR10 R2 config Zinterface fei 1 4 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 192 168 2 2 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R2 config if ip router isis ZXR10 R2 config z interface fei 1 3 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 192 168 6 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_R2 config if ip router isis For More information about IS IS configuration please follow the below procedures Configuring Global IS IS Parameters If all routers running on network are ZTE ZXR10 GER just use default parameters in IS IS configuration However upon interconnection with routers of other manufacturers related interface parameters and timers need adjustment so that IS IS protocol can run more efficiently on network IS IS parameter configuration in IS IS involves the IS IS configuration of global parameters and interface parameters Below procedure delivers the information about configuration of global IS IS parameters a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a IS IS is running in a network 1
377. ribed in above basic OSPF configuration 1 To configure route aggregation for route redistribution use summary address lt ip address gt lt net mask gt command in OSPF route mode as shown in Table 246 TABLE 246 SUMMARY ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This sets up summary address for OSPF and OSPF Route summarizes other routing protocol paths being redistributed to the OSPF summary address lt ip address net mask Result This defines summary address for OSPF and summarizes other routing protocol paths being redistributed to the OSPF Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 201 202 I ntroduction Purpose Prerequisite Steps I ntroduction ABRs ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Generating Default Route An ASBR can be configured to advertise a default route to entire OSPF domain When a router uses a redistributed route it becomes an ASBR By default the ASBR cannot automatically advertise the default route to entire OSPF domain When a command is used to configure a router to advertise a default route the router becomes an ASBR automatically This below procedure describes how to configure inter area route aggregation in OSPF a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Make sure that OSPF is running on a network as described in above basic OSPF configuration 1 To configure a defau
378. rminal 2 Click on HyperTerminal and then type ZTE as connection name and then click gt OK button as shown in Figure 36 48 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 4 Usage and Operations FiGURE 36 CONNECTION WINDOW New Connection HyperTerminal F Cal Transfer Help Dag es 28 Connection Description Lo New Connection Enter a name and choose an icon for the connection i oosses Auto detect Auto detect 3 Select COM port that is in use to connect the router click gt OK button as shown in Figure 37 Important Be sure that COM port is selected FIGURE 37 CONNECT TO WINDOW zte HyperTerminal Fie E Cal Transfer Da eus Connect To 2 Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country region Pakistan 92 Area code os 1 Phone number Cec uns ENT y DK Cancel Auto detect Auto detect 4 Click Restore Defaults in order to select Bits Per Second 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits gt 1 Flow control None Click gt OK then Press Enter button as shown in Figure 38 Important These options can be manually selected or by dropping down the radio buttons Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 49 Y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA FIGURE 38 Com PROPERTIES WINDOW SST ae eae ey ay COM1 Properties Port Settings
379. router neighbor 180 225 11 1 ebgp multihop Configuration of R2 ZXR10 R2 config router bgp 300 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 129 213 1 2 remote as 100 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 235 236 Introduction Purpose Prerequisite Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Filtering Routes using Route Map Route filtering and attribute configuration are the basis of BGP decision By means of route filtering operations the input or output route attributes can be controlled according to actual requirements A route map is used to control routing information and route redistribution is implemented by means of defining conditions among routing domains Normally the route map is used in conjunction with route attributes to make route decision Refer to below procedure for route map configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed BGP is running on a network 1 To define a route map for controlling routing information use route map lt map tag gt permit deny sequence number in global config mode as shown in Table 288 TABLE 288 RouTE MAP COMMAND Command Mode Command Command Format Function route map lt map tag gt permit deny Global config lt sequence number gt This defines a route map Result This sets a route map for controlling routing information 2 To designate ne
380. router receives a message it judges whether the ingress is bound with policy routing If not it searches in the routing table according to the destination address and then performs forwarding If yes it processes the message according to the sequence of Route map The specific procedures are as follows Router matches the message with the ACL configured in the first sequence If matching fails it continues matching the message with the ACL in the next sequence The rest is deduced by analogy If matching succeeds it judges the attributes of the sequence If the attribute of the sequence is deny the message is routed in the normal way If the attribute is permit the router forwards the message according to the set statement in the sequence The router checks whether a valid set ip next hop direct next hop exists When multiple set ip next hop items exist the router selects the first valid next hop according to the sequence If it exists the router forwards the message to the specified next hop If set ip next hop is not set or no valid set ip next hop exists the router needs to check whether a valid egress exists The egress exists and is in the UP status When multiple set interface items exist the router selects the first valid egress according to the sequence If it exists the router sends the message from the egress Otherwise the router routes the message in the normal way In normal routing if the router
381. rrran 322 Table 369 Igp Te Config Command eene 323 Table 370 Tunnel Config Command seeeeesssss 323 Table 371 Ping Command sessesseeeee 324 Table 372 Show Mpls Traffic Command eese 325 Table 373 Show Mpls Traffic Eng Command 325 Table 374 Show Mpls Tunnel Command sss 325 Table 375 Topics In Chapter 24 cccceceeee eens teen cnn 329 Table 376 Ip Multicast Routing Command 335 Table 377 Clear Ip Mroute Command s senses 335 Table 378 Ip Igmp Version Command sees 335 Table 379 Ip Igmp Access Group Command 336 Table 380 Ip Igmp Static Group Command 336 Table 381 Ip Igmp Immediate ssesssseeseeeeeesess 337 Table 382 Ip Igmp Query Interval Command 338 Table 383 Ip Igmp Query Max Command 338 Table 384 Ip Igmp Querier Command eese 338 Table 385 Ip Igmp Last Member Command 338 Table 386 Router Pimsm Command seseeeeesss 339 Table 387 Ip Pim Sm Command seen 339 Table 388 Static Rp Command sseeeeneen nnn 339 Table 389 Bsr Candidate Command sse 340 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 383 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 Gen
382. rs There are two basic ways to construct multicast trees source based multicast tree and shared multicast tree Source based multicast trees Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 331 332 Reverse Path Forwarding Unicast Mode First Definition Dense mode Pruning M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Source based multicast tree is also called the source shortest path tree which constructs a spanning tree toward all receivers for each source The spanning tree with the subnet of the source as a root node extends to the subnet where receivers exist A multicast group may have many multicast sources each of them or each pair S G of them corresponding to a multicast tree The method to construct the source based multicast trees is the reverse route forwarding RPF Each router can find the shortest path toward the source and the corresponding output interface according to a unicast route When receiving a multicast packet a router checks whether the input interface reached is the output interface of the shortest unicast path from itself to source If yes the router copies and forwards the packet to other interfaces If not the router discards the multicast packet The input interface receiving multicast packets in the router is called the parent link The output interface sending multicast packets is called the sub link Shared multicast tree T
383. rs the following topics TABLE 80 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 6 Topic Page No Interfaces Types 83 Interface Naming Rules 84 Physical Interfaces 85 Interfaces Types Interfaces are divided into following types Physical interfaces Logical interfaces These refer to interfaces which exist physically such as Ethernet interface POS interfaces ATM interfaces and E1 interfaces These interfaces are configured logically and are not physical they are also called virtual interfaces such as VLAN sub interfaces and Loopback interfaces Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 83 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 84 Interface Naming Rules ZTEHA Introduction Interfaces of ZTE ZXR10 GER are named in the following rule lt Interface type gt _ lt Slot ID gt lt Port ID gt lt Sub interface or channel ID Follow for interface types and their descriptions Interface Description Type fei Fast Ethernet interface gei Gigabit Ethernet interface pos3 155M POS interface pos12 622M POS interface pos48 2 5 POS interface atmi55 155M ATM interface cel CE1 interface ce3 CE3 interface serial Channelized E1 interface E3 interface in Channelized mode smtgrp SmartGroup interface multi MultiLink interface loopback Loopback interface Slot ID refers to physical slots where interface module is installed ranging from 1 to 8 ZXR10 GERO8 or from 1 to 4 ZX
384. rt for flash transferring SMP panel has multiple indicators whose functions are listed in Table 14 TABLE 14 SMP PANEL INDICATORS I ndicators PWR indicator green RUN indicator green ALM indicator red NP FAN HOT MST Dual 8 digitron Function Description Power indicator When it is on it indicates that the equipment has been powered on and the power supply normally Running indicator When it is on it indicates that the system runs normally Alarm indicator Indicates a system fault when it is on This indicates working status of the network processor This is constantly on when the processor is working normally This flashes if the processor fails This is off if the processor initializes unsuccessfully This indicates working status of the fan This is constantly on when the fan is working normally This flashes if the fan fails This indicates equipment inside temperature This is off when the equipment is working normally this flashes if the equipment fails This indicates SMNP master slave status This is constantly on in the master mode this is off in slave working status This indicates SMNP CPU working status This is displayed when the equipment works normally SMNP board contains two buttons Their functions are listed in Table 15 TABLE 15 SMNP BUTTONS FUNCTIONS Buttons Function Description If SMNP master board reset button is pressed in the presence of SMNP
385. rts the VPN IPv4 route into an IPv4 route Operational Principles of MPLS VPN Basic operation mode of MPLS VPN is the application of the L3 technologies Each VPN has an independent VPN ID users of each VPN can only communicate with members in the same VPN and only VPN members can enter the VPN On MPLS based VPNs the service provider assigns a distinguisher to each VPN called Route Distinguisher RD The distinguisher is unique in the network of the service provider Forwarding table contains a unique address called VPN IP address which is formed through the connection of the RD and the IP address of the user The VPN IP address is a unique one in the network The address table is stored in the forwarding table BGP is a routing information distribution protocol which uses multi protocol extension and common attributes to define VPN connectivity On MPLS based VPNs BGP only advertises information to members in the same VPN and provides basic security by means of traffic split Data is forwarded by using LSP The LSP defines a special path that cannot be changed to guarantee the security Such a label based mode can provide confidentiality as frame relay and ATM The service provider relates a special VPN to an interface and packet forwarding depends upon ingress labels Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH VPN forwarding table Multi Protocol BGP PE CE External Layer Label D
386. ruct broadband Intranet and Extranet and can meet multiple flexible service requirements MPLS VPN can utilize the powerful transmission capability of a common backbone network reduce the construction costs of the Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 287 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I Reduced Cost Improved Resource Utilization Improve Network Speed Improve Flexibility and Scalability User s Application Convienance Improve security Enhance service QoS ensurence of MPLS 288 ZTEPA Intranet greatly improve the operation and management flexibility of user s networks and meanwhile can meet the requirements of users for secure realtime broadband and convenient information transmission Advantages of MPLS in IP based Network In an IP based network MPLS has following advantages MPLS simplifies the integration technology of ATM and IP efficiently combines the L2 and L3 technologies reduces costs and protects user s investment at earlier stages Since label switching is used on the network user s LANs at different points can use repeated IP addresses to improve the utilization of IP resources When label switching is used address search time in each hop process is shortened Transmission time of data on a network is reduced and network speed is improved Since MPLS uses AnyToAny connection the network flexibility and scalability is
387. s They can support IP Over ATM Encapsulation of IP Over ATM LLC SNAP ATM AAL5 IP routing ATM cell processing 256 PVCs and point to point connection Refer to below procedure for ATM configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER Routers Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enter into configuration mode use config terminal command in privileged mode as shown in Table 104 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Chapter 6 Interface Configuration TABLE 104 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode To enter into ATM interface configuration mode use interface interface number command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 105 TABLE 105 INTERFACE CoNFIG COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode interface This enters into interface interface global config A configuration mode number gt Result This enables to enter into interface configuration mode To create ATM PVC use atm pvc lt vpi gt lt vci gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 106 TABLE 106 Pvc COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode atm pue Interface This creates PVC lt vpi gt lt vci gt To configure an IP address of an interface use ip address ip address net mask broadcast
388. s OSPF VPN process Result This enables OSPF VPN process Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 293 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEDR For this process use the network command to define an interface connected to CE and execute route redistribution from BGP to RIP For example ZXR10 config router ospf 1 ZXR10 config router network 10 0 0 0 04 25 5 25 54 209 area 0 0 0 0 ZXR10 config router ospf 2 vrf testl ZXR10 config router network 10 10 10 1 0 0 0 0 area 0 0 0 0 ZXR10 config router redistribute bgp int For the BGP it is only necessary to designate a CE peer in the address family ipv4 vrf address of the BGP TABLE 340 ADDRESS FAMILY COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode address family ipv4 Route This enters BGP address mode vrf vrf name gt Result This enters BGP address mode EBGP runs between PE and CE that belong to different ASs In the current version it is recommended that a directly connected address be used as the link setup address for example ZXR10 config router bgp 100 ZXR10 config router neighbor 10 10 3 3 remote as 100 ZXR10 config router neighbor 10 10 3 3 update source loopbackl ZXR10 config router taddress family ipv4 vrf testl ZXR10 config router af tredistribute connected ZXR10 config router af neighbor 10 1 1 2 remote as 200 ZXR10 config r
389. s PIM SM neighbors With the view of security the PIM SM limits some routers to be neighbors at the interface Example On fei 1 1 interface forbid the router restricted by acl 10 to become the PIM neighbor ZXR10 config taccess list 10 deny 10 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 ZXR10 config finterface fei 1 1 ZXR10 config if fip pim neighbor filter 10 END OF STEPS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 343 344 Purpose Prerequisites Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA PIM SM Policy Control This topic describes how to control PIM SM policy Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 2 Command Command To filter the multicast packets encapsulated in the received register packet use accept register lt access list number gt command in pimsm configuration mode as shown in Table 397 TABLE 397 IP PiM NEIGHBOR FILTER COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip pim neighbor This filters the multicast filter Pimsm packets encapsulated in the access configuration list received register packet number gt Result This filters the multicast packets encapsulated in the received register packet Filter the source addresses of the multicast packets encapsulated in the register packets according to the rules defined in the ACL To filter the candidate RP addresses advertised in the BSR message use accept rp lt ac
390. s creates a cpos interface in the T1 encapsulation 3 To set the clock source of T1 channel use tug 2 Vtg number tl T1 number gt clock source command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 130 TABLE 130 T1 CLOCK SOURCE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode tug 2 Vtg number tl lt T1 Interface This sets the clock source of T1 number config channel gt clock source Result This sets the clock source of T1 channel END OF STEPS E1 Encapsulation AU 4 Purpose Refer to below procedure for configuring E1 encapsulation in case of AU 4 on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Steps 1 To enter into the tug 3 configuration mode use au 4 1 tug 3 command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 131 112 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 6 Interface Configuration TABLE 131 TUG 3 CONFIG MODE Command Command Command Function Format Mode au 4 1 tug Interface This enables to enter into the 3 config tug 3 configuration mode Result This enables to enter into the tug 3 configuration mode To set the framing format of E1 channel use tug 2 lt Vtg number gt el lt El number gt framing command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 132 TABLE 132 E1 FRAMING FORMAT Command Command Command Function Format Mode tug 2 Vtg Pu ES Interface This sets the framing f
391. s default route must be used If this is necessary to redistribute the default route in OSPF domain such an advertisement is normally implemented by an ASBR Autonomous System Border Router in OSPF domain Default route configuration is completely the same as static route configuration and only difference is that the network part 166 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 12 Static Route Configuration and subnet mask part are all 0 0 0 0 This can be seen in routing of R2 ZXR10_R2 show ip route IPv4 Routing Table Dest Mask Gw Interface Owner pri metr 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 211 211 211 2 fei_2 2 static 1 0 211 211 211 0 255 255 255 0 211 211 211 1 fei 2 2 direct O O 192 168 4 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 4 2 fei 2 1 direct O O ZXR10 R2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 167 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA This page is intentionally blank 168 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 1 3 RIP Configuration Overview Introduction This chapter describes how to configure Routing Information Protocol RIP on ZTE ZXR10 GER Contents This chapter covers following topics TABLE 207 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 13 Topic Page No Background 169 Routing Updates 170 RIP Routing Metric 170 RIP Stability Features 171 RIP Timers 171 RIP Packet Format 171 RIPv2 Packet Format 172 174 RIP Enhanced Conf
392. s one RUN indicator on the RE 04P3 SFP card panel In addition each port has two indicators Table 35 shows their functions TABLE 35 RE 04P3 SFP CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description RUN DATA per port LINK per port It is constantly on if the interface card works normally and it goes off if the interface card fails Interface data indicator It is constantly on in the case of data sending and receiving and it is off in the case of no data sending or receiving Link indicator It is constantly on in the case of successful PPP link setup and it is off in the case of PPP link setup failure RE 08FE E100RJ Definition It is an eight port fast Ethernet interface card and provides eight 10 100Base TX adaptive electrical interfaces Panel Figure 24 shows RE 08FE E100RJ card FIGURE 24 RE 08FE E1000RJ CARD RE 08FE N E100RJ Interfaces Table 36 shows RE 08FE E100RJ card interface features 36 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Indicators Definition Panel Interfaces Chapter 3 Structure and Principles TABLE 36 RE 08FE E100RJ CARD INTERFACE FEATURES Port Type Description In compliance with IEEE 802 3 RJ45 connector 10Base T Category 3 4 and 5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP are used Maximum transmission distance 185m In compliance with IEEE 802 3u RJ45 connector Category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs UTP are used
393. s send RIP Routing Metric RIP uses a single routing metric hop count to measure distance between source and a destination network Each hop in a path from source to destination is assigned a hop count value which is typically 1 When a router receives a routing update that contains a new or changed destination network entry the router adds 1 to metric value indicated in update and enters the network in the routing table The IP address of the sender is used as the next hop RIP Stability Features RIP prevents routing loops from continuing indefinitely by implementing a limit on number of hops allowed in a path from source to a destination The maximum number of hops in a path is 15 If a router receives a routing update that contains a new or changed entry and if increasing the metric value by 1 causes metric to be infinity that is 16 the network destination is considered unreachable The downside of this stability feature is that it limits the maximum diameter of a RIP network to less than 16 hops RIP includes a number of other stability features that are common to many routing protocols These features are designed to provide stability despite potentially rapid changes in a network s topology For example RIP implements the split horizon and hold down mechanisms to prevent incorrect routing information from being propagated Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Routing Updates Chapter
394. same destination network cannot have the same tag value END OF STEPS Example Figure 80 shows a simple network on which three routers are interconnected FIGURE 80 STATIC ROUTE CONFIGURATION For R1 to access the network on R3 static route configuration is as follows ZXR10_Ri config ip route 192 168 5 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 4 2 ZXR10_Ri config ip route 192 168 6 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 4 2 This can be seen from above configuration that a static route is configured in global configuration mode and only one static route can be configured at a time After ip route command remote network its subnet mask code and next IP address to the remote network is configured In other words for R1 to send a packet to network 192 168 5 0 24 this must give the packet to R2 with IP address of 192 168 4 2 since R1 is directly connected to R2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 163 Multiple Static Routes Parameter Administrative 164 Distance One Expression Example ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA If there are multiple paths to same destination a router can be configured with multiple static routes with different tag However routing table only displays information about route with minimum distance Parameter lt distance metric gt in static route configuration command in ip route can be used to change administrative distance va
395. seful in re invocation of a long or complicated command or ingress Execute one of the following operations to re invoke a command from the record buffer Commands Function Re invokes the latest command in the record buffer Repeat these keys to invoke old commands upwards Press Ctrl P or the upward arrow key Roll the commands downwards When the Press Ctrl N or the last command line is reached one more downward arrow key operation will roll the commands from the begging of the buffer cyclically Use the show history command in any mode and the latest several commands in the mode are listed 62 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 5 System Management I ntroduction Contents This chapter introduces system management of ZXR10 GER routers details the file system and its operations of routers and also gives a detailed description of version upgrading This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 52 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 5 Topic Page No Introduction to File System 63 File Management 64 TFTP Configuration 67 Software Version Upgrading 72 Introduction to File System In ZXR10 GER main storage device is flash Image files and configuration files of ZTE ZXR10 GER are stored in flash Operations such as version upgrading and configuration saving must be conducted in flash Flash consists of three directories IMG CFG DATA IMG System mapping files that is image files
396. sent to an unknown host outside the AS to ABR Therefore LSAs of type 5 do not need to be flooded to area and also the area does not have LSAs of type 4 Such an area type is called a stub area In a stub area all routers must be configured as stub routers A Hello packet contains a stub area flag bit The flag bit must be consistent among neighbors An ABR in a stub area can filter LSAs of type 5 to prevent them from being advertised to stub area In meantime the ABR will generate an LSA of type 3 to advertise a default route to a destination address external to the AS If the ABR also filters the LSA of type 3 and also advertises a default route to the destination address external to an area such an area is called a totally stubby area Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 189 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Not So Stubby A router in a stub area does not allow an LSA of type 5 so ASBR Area is not a part of the stub area However it is hoped that a stub area with an ASBR can be generated such that a router in area can receive AS external routes from ASBR in this area but external routing information from other areas will be blocked Therefore OSPF defines Not So Stubby Area NSSA In an NSSA the ASBR generates Type 7 LSA instead of Type 5 LSA ABR cannot send Type 7 LSA to other OSPF areas This blocks external routes from entering the NSSA area at the area
397. signed in the stackable mode so that it can be configured and adjusted in position on actual requirements Central processor module implements functions of protocol processing and control processing This is implemented by the high speed MIPS processor This consists of symmetric processing system Host Bridge CACHE system memory system and BOOTROM Symmetric processing system consists of two high performance RISC processors Standard PCI bus connects these two processors and the communication bandwidth between them is up to 1Gbps Central processor module provides a standard MIPS bus interface and a control bus interface externally Network processor module uses MIPS bus interface to connect the local channel through protocol processor module that sends and receive data packets Each MIPS bus interface can connect maximum of two network processor modules Control buses connect the control channels of other modules to realize the initialization configuration and operation administration for all the modules of the whole system Forwarding core of entire ZXR10 GER system is switching network ZXR10 GER switching network chip provides eight completely independent switching channels with the switching bandwidth of full duplex 1 6Gbps for each channel Single switching network chip contains the capacity of full duplex 12 8Gbps Unified bus connects network processor and switching channels through unified bus CROSSBAR structure completes free e
398. site Steps Chapter 9 Link Protocol Configuration Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config interface pos3_3 1 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R2 config if ppp authentication chap ZXR10_R2 config if ppp chap hostname ZXR10 ZXR10_R2 config if ppp chap password hello ZXR10_R2 config if ppp open Multilink Point to Point Protocol MPPP As higher speed services are deployed Multilink PPP provides a standardized method for spreading traffic across multiple WAN links while providing multi vendor interoperability packet fragmentation and proper sequencing and load balancing on both inbound and outbound traffic Upon data sending IP packets are first encapsulated into PPP frame format and then encapsulated frame are segmented into certain data fragments Each data fragment added with header of MPPP is encapsulated into MPPP frame format This procedure describes how to do multilink PPP on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed 1 Enter into configuration mode by writing config terminal command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 166 TABLE 166 CONFIG TERMINAL COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode config Exec Enters into global configuration terminal mode Result This enables to enter into global configuration mode 2 To create multilink interface and to enter into it use interface lt interface number gt command _ in global config
399. so 13 1 interface of ZXR10 routing switch FiGURE 63 PACKET OVER SONET EXAMPLE Pos3 3 4 Gm umm 0 E posa 4 4 wy ZXR10 A 192 168 1 1 30 ZXR10 B 192 168 1 2 30 Configuration of ZXR10 A ZXR10 config interface pos3 4 4 ZXR10 config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 Configuration of ZXR10 B ZXR10 config interface pos3 3 4 ZXR10 config if ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 252 98 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Background Service Based ATM Cells VPI VCI Virtual Connection Chapter 6 Interface Configuration Configuring ATM Asynchronous transfer mode ATM is a high performance cell oriented switching and multiplexing technology that utilizes fixed length packets to carry different types of traffic Networks that have been primarily focused on providing better voice services are evolving to meet new multimedia communications challenges and competitive pressures Services based on asynchronous transfer mode ATM and synchronous digital hierarchy SDH synchronous optical network SONET architectures provide flexibility essential for success in this market The most basic service building block is ATM virtual circuit which is an end to end connection that has defined end points and routes In ATM networks all information is formatted into fixed length cells consisting of 48 bytes 8 bits per byte of payload and 5 bytes of cell header T
400. ss list number priority priority Result This configures the static RP Configure a static RP for a or multiple specific groups and configure the same static RPs for the group on all PIM SM multicast routers in the multicast domain The RP address should be reachable from other routers Usually the loopback interface address is used to reduce the network vibration caused by the up down of a physical interface After the static RP is configured the candidate RP is not needed to be configured for the group Example Configure the static RP 10 1 1 1 for all the groups ZXR10 config router static rp 10 1 1 1 Example Configure the static RP 10 1 1 1 for the multicast 239 132 10 100 allowed by the acl 10 ZXR10 config router static rp 10 1 1 1 group list 10 ZXR10 config taccess list 10 permit 239 132 10 100 0 0 0 0 To configure the candidate BSR use bsr candidate lt interface name gt lt hash mask length gt lt priority gt command in pimsm configuration mode as shown in Table 389 TABLE 389 BSR CANDIDATE COMMAND Command Format Command Mode Command Function bsr candidate lt interface name gt i Pimsm This configures the A ndi configuration candidate BSR lt priority gt Result This configures the candidate BSR If the static RP mechanism is not used every multicast domain must be configured with the candidate BSR on more than one multicast routers and a BSR should be selected The BS
401. ss to router in Telnet mode user name and password for Telnet access must be configured on router To log on to router the configured user name and password must be input Use the following command to configure the user name and password for remote login as shown in Table 51 TABLE 51 USERNAME COMMAND Command Function Command Command Mode Format username Global Configures user name and Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 51 52 Background Purpose Prerequisites Steps M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Command Command Function Font Command Mode username password for Telnet login password password Result This prevents an unauthorized access to router in Telnet mode END OF STEPS Configuring SSH SSH is short for Secure Shell All transmitted data can be encrypted through the SSH to avoid interception of the data or password and DNS and IP address spoofing In addition the transmitted data is compressed thereby speeding up the transmission With the SSH function a user can log in to the remote router in the secure mode instead of the Telnet mode for configuration Three parts are need to be configured for the SSH Radius Server remote router and SSH client Computer where the Radius Server is installed can ping the remote router and the SSH client of the local host can ping the remote router This topic describes how to configure S
402. ssed Steps 1 To display FR Imi information use show frame relay Imi interface lt interface number gt command in privileged mode as shown in Table 177 TABLE 177 FRAME RELAY LMI TYPE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode frame relay Interface This displays the FR Imi Imi type configuration information lt Imi type gt Result This displays the FR Imi information 144 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 9 Link Protocol Configuration 2 To display FR ip dici mapping table use show frame relay map command in privileged mode as shown in Table 178 TABLE 178 SHOW FRAME RELAY COMMAND Command Command 7 Command Function Format Mode Tame relay Interface This displays the FR Imi Imi type configuration information lt Imi type gt 3 To display FR PVC use show frame relay pvc command in command privileged mode as shown in Table 179 TABLE 179 SHOW FRAME RELAY Pvc COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function frame relay Imi type lt Imi type gt Interface configuration This displays FR PVC Result This displays the FR PVC END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 77 the E1 interface of the router R1 is connected with that of the router R2 The encapsulation FR protocol is used and the point to multipoint mode is adopted R1 serves as DTE and R2 as DCE FIGURE 77 FR CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 192 168 1 2 30
403. sses 123 Table 148 Show Vlan Forwarding esee 123 Table 149 Topics In Chapter 8 esee 125 Table 150 Smart Group Command eere 126 Table 151 Bind Command ccceceeeeeee eens eee e nets eeeeeenaes 127 Table 152 Smart Group Load Balance Command 127 Table 153 Ip Access Group Command teeter tees 127 Table 154 Show Running Config Command 129 Table 155 Show Lacp Command een 129 Table 156 Topics In Chapter 9 essen 131 Table 157 Config Terminal Command eese 134 Table 158 PPP Authentication Command s 134 Table 159 PPP User Password Command 135 Table 160 PPP Open Command een 135 Table 161 Config Terminal Command esses 137 Table 162 PPP Authentication Chap Command 137 Table 163 PPP CHAP Hostname Command 137 Table 164 PPP PAP Password Command 138 Table 165 PPP Open Command een 138 Table 166 Config Terminal Command eese 139 Table 167 Multilink Interface Command ssssss 139 Table 168 Ip Address Command sssssssssssssssrssssssrssrssrrersren 140 Table 169 Multi Link Group Command ssssssss 140 Table 170 PPP Multilink End Point Command 1
404. st 224 0 0 0239 255 255 255 D address Class 1111 Reserved 240 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 E Among three classes A B and C of IP addresses some addresses are reserved for private networks This is recommended that private network addresses must be used for establishing internal networks These addresses refer to Class A 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 Class B 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 Class C 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 Address division is originally intended to facilitate design of routing protocols so that header feature bit of an IP address is enough for judging type of a network However classification method restricts utilization of address space to greatest extent With rapid expansion of Internet problem of insufficient addresses becomes more and more serious To utilize IP addresses to greater extent a network can be divided into multiple subnets The bit borrowing mode can be used highest bits of host bits are borrowed to serve as subnet bits and left host bits still serve as host bits Thus structure of an IP address consists of three parts Network bits subnet bits and host bits Network bits and subnet bits are used to uniquely identify a network Use subnet mask to find which part in IP address indicates network bits and subnet bits which part stands for host bits The part with subnet mask of 1 corresponds to network bits and subnet bits of IP address while the part with subnet mask of 0 corresponds to host bits
405. t Bugs C Always Never Only on clean exit Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 55 ZTEHA ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 2 Select version 2 from the protocol options and select the SSH version as shown in Figure 45 FIGURE 45 SSH CLIENT LOGIN CONFIGURATION 2 Xl PuTTY Configuration x Category El Session Options controlling SSH connections Logging Data to send to the server Terminal R a Keyboard Remote command Bell Features don Protocol options Appearance Don t allocate a pseudo terminal Behaviour Enable compression Translation Preferred SSH protocol version Selection iato wil e 2 C 2only DUE Encryption options Connection YP Proxy Encryption cipher selection policy Telnet AES SSH 2 only Blowfish u Rlogin Lp pps 3DES E warn below here D Auth DES Down Tunnels Bugs Enable legacy use of single DES in SSH 2 About Click open The login interface appears as shown Figure 46 Enter the user name zte and password 123 to log in to the router Then configure the router as in the Telnet mode FIGURE 46 SSH LOGIN INTERFACE 1 Username 56 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Command Usage Login Chapter 4 Usage and Operations 4 Select the Local for SSH authentication and then enter the user name and password of the Telnet in the in
406. t 6A Maximum power consumption W 300W GPWD has three connection terminals They are 48V 48V GND PE protection ground GPWD panel has three power supply indicators whose functions are shown in Table 46 TABLE 46 GPWD PANEL INDICATORS Indicators Function Description 3 3V indicator Indicates the working condition of 3 3V output of green the power supply board It is constantly on in the 42 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 3 Structure and Principles Indicators Function Description case of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage 2 5V indicator green Indicates the working condition of 2 5V output of the power supply board It is constantly on in the case of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage 5V indicator green Indicates the working condition of 5V output of the power supply board It is constantly on in the case of normal working condition and it goes off in the case of over under voltage ZXR10 GERO8 Power Supply SPWA SPWA panel is shown in Figure 32 FIGURE 32 SPWA PANEL VIEW 100 240V 60 50HZ FUSE 5A SPWA technical parameters are given below Technical Parameters Input voltage mono phase 220VACx 1096 Input current 3A Frequency 505 Maximum power consumption W 500W
407. t AS As shown in Figure 99 R3 and R4 learn routes to destination 170 10 0 0 simultaneously Since the local preference value configured for R4 is greater than that for R3 the R4 egress will be used in precedence from inside AS256 to the destination 240 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 16 BGP Configuration FIGURE 99 LOCAL PREFERENCE ATTRIBUTE 170 10 0 0 24 SS R2 3 3 3 2 30 R1 111 130 i AS256 IBGP R3 R4 BN R6 LOC 150 LOC 200 Pod gt K In the following two methods are used to configure the LOCAL PREF attribute Use the command bgp default local preference to configure the LOCAL PREF attribute END OF STEPS Configuration of R3 ZXR10 R3 config zrouter bgp 256 ZXR10_R3 config router neighbor 1 1 1 1 remote as 100 ZXR10 R3 config router neighbor 128 213 11 2 remote as 256 ZXR10 R3 config router bgp default local preference 150 Configuration of R4 ZXR10_R4 config router bgp 256 ZXR10_R4 config router neighbor 3 3 3 2 remote as 300 ZXR10_R4 config router neighbor 128 213 11 1 remote as 256 ZXR10_R4 config router bgp default local preference 200 Use the route map command to configure the LOCAL_PREF attribute Configuration of R4 ZXR10 R4 config zrouter bgp 256 ZXR10_R4 config router neighbor 3 3 3 2 remote as 300 ZXR10_R4 config router neighbor 3 3 3 2 route map setlocalin in ZXR10_R4 c
408. t Mode This takes initiative in ppp open Interface setting up a PPP link with peer router Result This sets PPP link with peer router Note This enables outbound PAP authentication Local router uses username and password that is specified by ppp pap sent username command to authenticate it to a remote device The other router must have this same username password configured using the username command described above Important If one way authentication is used this command is only necessary for router initiating call For two way authentication this command must be configured on both sides END OF STEPS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 135 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Example As shown in Figure 74 pos3_3 1 interface of router R1 is connected to pos3_3 1 of router R2 PAP authentication mode is used User name and password configured on each interface are used for local and remote authentication User names and passwords at both ends must be consistent with each other FIGURE 74 PPP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 192 168 1 2 30 Pos3_3 1 Pos3_3 1 RI 192 168 1 1 30 R2 Configuration of R1 ZXR10 Ri config zinterface pos3_3 1 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_Ri config if ppp authentication pap ZXR10 Ri config if z ppp pap sent username pap user password hello ZXR10_R1 config if ppp open Configu
409. t Mode ommand Function mpls Idp l access fec global config This configures FEC filtering for prefix policy access Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 279 280 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Command Command Command Function Format Mode list host route only Result This configures FEC filtering policy 7 To control locally distributed labels incoming labels to be distributed upstream by means of LDP use mpls idp advertise labels for lt prefix access list gt to lt peer access list gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 327 TABLE 327 MPLS ADVERTISE LABEL COMMAND commana commana Command Function Format Mode mpls Idp labels ror This controls locally distributed lt prefix lobal confi labels incoming labels to be p 9 9 distributed upstream by means access list gt of LDP to lt peer access list gt Result This controls locally distributed labels incoming labels to be distributed upstream by means of LDP 8 To configure the interval for sending the LDP hello discovery message and the timeout time of the discovered LDP neighbor use mpls idp discovery hello holdtime lt holdtime gt interval interval command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 328 TABLE 328 MPLS LDP DISCOVERY COMMAND Command Format CITO Command Function Mode mpls Idp This configures the interval discovery
410. t dampening will be cancelled Refer to below procedure for BGP route dampening configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER a Router Command Line Interface has been accessed a BGP is running on a network 1 To reduce instability caused by route flapping use bgp dampening half life reuse suppress max suppress time gt route map lt map tag gt command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 299 TABLE 299 BGP DAMPENING COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode bgp dampening lt half life gt lt reuse gt gt E suppress Route This reduces instability max suppress caused by route flapping time route map lt map tag gt Result This reduces instability caused by route flapping Half life time Ranging from 1 to 45min default 15min gt Reuse value Ranging from 1 to 20000 default 750 gt Suppress value Ranging from 1 to 20000 default 2000 gt Max suppress time Ranging from 1 to 255 default four times the half life time Enable dampening in routers ZXR10 config router bgp 100 ZXR10 config router bgp dampening ZXR10 config router network 203 250 15 0 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 config router neighbor 192 208 10 5 remote as 300 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 251 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA BGP Configuration Example An integrated BGP example is given in the following Where the actual appli
411. t ip address gt remote as number command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 282 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 229 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA TABLE 282 BGP NEIGHBOUR COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode neighbor lt ip address gt f remote as BGP route This configures a BGP neighbor lt number gt Result This sets BGP neighbor for BGP communication 4 To advertise network into BGP use network lt ip address gt lt net mask gt command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 283 TABLE 283 BGP NETWORK COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode network lt ip This designates a network table address gt BGP route for BGP routing process lt net mask gt Result This advertises a network into BGP routing process END OF STEPS Example Figure 94 shows a BGP configuration example Where router R1 belongs to AS 100 while router R2 belongs to AS 200 FIGURE 94 BASIC BGP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE Configuration of R1 ZXR10_R1 config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 10 1 1 1 remote as 200 ZXR10_R1 config router network 182 16 0 0 255 255 0 0 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config router bgp 200 ZXR10_R2 config router neighbor 10 1 1 2 remote as 100 ZXR10_R3 config router network 182 17 0 0 255 255 0 0 In the above configuration R1 and R2 mutually define
412. t source lt interface name command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 400 TABLE 400 IP MsDP PEER COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode Saidhbhir Global This enables the MSDP PEER to SEE configuration configure a MSDP neighbor Result This enables the MSDP PEER to configure a MSDP neighbor To enable the MSDP DEFAULT PEER to define a default MSDP neighbor use ip msdp default peer lt peer address gt list lt acl number gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 401 TABLE 401 IP MSpP DEFAULT PEER COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip pim Global This enables the MSDP neighbor DEFAULT PEER to define a configuration filter default MSDP neighbor Result This enables the MSDP DEFAULT PEER to define a default MSDP neighbor Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 345 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA END OF STEPS MSDP Extended Configuration Purpose This topic describes how to configure MSDP in an extended way Prerequisites Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed Steps 1 To add illustrative description to MSDP neighbors use ip msdp description lt peer address gt lt desc text gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 402 TABLE 402 IP MsDP DESCRIPTION COMMAND Command Format Command Mode Command Function ip msdp Global description configura
413. tch END OF STEPS Configuration of ZXR10 GER A ZXR10 config interface atm155 1 1 1 ZXR10 config if atm pvc 2 40 ZXR10 config if ip address 10 10 0 2 255 255 255 252 Configuration of ZXR10 GER B ZXR10 config interface atm155 2 1 1 ZXR10 config if atm pvc 2 40 ZXR10 config if ip address 10 1 0 1 255 255 255 252 102 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Background 802 1q VLAN Trunk Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 6 Interface Configuration Configuring VLAN Sub Interface IEEE 802 1q was a project in IEEE 802 standards process to develop a mechanism to allow multiple bridged networks to transparently share same physical network link without leakage of information between networks i e trunking IEEE 802 1q is also name of standard issued by this process and in common usage name of encapsulation protocol used to implement this mechanism over Ethernet networks ZXR10 routers can utilize 802 1q VLAN trunk and sub interface technology to provide inter VLAN routes in switch To terminate different VLANs on switch multiple logical sub interfaces should be created on the physical interface of the router The sub interfaces correspond to the VLANs on the switch one by one by means of VLAN IDs This procedure describes how to do VLAN sub interface on ZTE ZXR10 GER Router Command Line Interface has been accessed 1 To enter into configuration mode use config t
414. terface as shown in Figure 47 to log in to the router successfully FIGURE 47 SSH LOGIN INTERFACE 2 of 192 168 3 1 PuTTY Username Command Mode For users to configure and manage routers conveniently ZXR10 GER routers assign commands to different modes according to different functions and rights A command can only be carried out in a special mode In any command mode just enter a question mark and the commands that can be used in the mode can be viewed The command modes of ZXR10 GER routers are as follows Topic Page No User Mode 57 Privileged Mode 58 Global Configuration Mode 58 Interface Configuration Mode 59 Channelized Configuration Mode 59 Route Configuration Mode 59 Diagnosis Mode 60 User Mode When the HyperTerminal mode is used to log on to the system system enters into the user mode automatically If using the Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 57 58 Detailed I nformation Config Terminal y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Telnet mode to log on a user needs to enter the user mode after inputting the user name and password The prompt of the user mode is the host name of the router followed by a gt as shown in the following example the default host name is ZXR10 ZXR10 gt In the user mode a user can run commands such as ping and telnet and also can view some system information Privileged Mode In the user
415. terface card For different interface cards it only supports the binding of Ethernet interfaces of the same IQ Load sharing supports two modes per packet and per destination The per destination mode considers the source IP address and destination IP address It supports various routing protocols RIP with low priority BGP OSPF and ISIS That is these routing protocols can be run in the SmartGroup interface It supports MPLS and VPN access It also supports NAT ACL QoS and VRRP In the ZXR10 GER system Up to 64 SmartGroup interfaces can be configured Each SMARTGROUP interface can bind a maximum of eight Ethernet interfaces of the same type and the same rate The throughput after binding is slightly different from the throughput of each interface and 10 is targeted Configuring SMARTGROUP Purpose Refer to below procedure for configuring smartgroup on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Prerequisite Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Steps 1 To create a SMARTGROUP interface use interface smartgroup command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 150 TABLE 150 SMART GROUP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode interface Interface This creates a SMARTGROUP smartgroup config interface Result This creates a SMARTGROUP interface 2 To bind the link use interface smartgroup smartgrup no command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 151 126 Confiden
416. termines the length of the other domains If value of the type domain is 0 administrator ADM domain is four bytes and the Assignment Number AN domain is two bytes If value of the type domain is 1 administrator ADM domain is two bytes and the Assignment Number AN domain is four bytes Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 289 290 MPLS Operational Principles Forwarding table M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Administrator ADM domain Identifies an administration assignment number If the value of the type domain is 0 administrator domain contains an IPv4 address RFC2547bis recommends that IP address of a router this address is normally configured as router ID be used and this address is a public address If the type domain is 1 the administrator domain contains an AS ID RFC2547bis recommends a public AS ID allocated by IANA be used it is much better that the AS ID of the ISP or customer itself is used a Assignment Number AN domain a number assigned by a network carrier If the type domain is O length of the AN domain is two bytes If the type domain is 1 length of the AN domain is four bytes An RD is only used between PEs to differentiate IPv4 addresses of different VPNs The ingress generates an RD and converts the received IPv4 route of the CE into a VPN IPv4 address Before advertising the route to the CE the egress PE conve
417. the name of a lt oldname gt Exec designated file or directory in lt newname gt flash oldname lt newname gt represents 1 80 characters Result This renames designated file or directory in flash END OF STEPS Example View of current file information ZXR10 dir Directory of flash attribute size date time name 1 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 22 10 IMG 2 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 38 22 CFG 3 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 38 22 DATA 65007616 bytes total 48863232 bytes free ZXR10 cd img Enter the directory img ZXR104dir Show the current directory information Directory of flash img attribute size date time name 1 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 22 10 2 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 22 10 3 rwx 15922273 MAY 17 2004 14 29 18 ZXUAS ZAR 65007616 bytes total 48863232 bytes free ZXR10 Create directory and then removing 66 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Background Purpose Prerequisites Chapter 5 System Management ZXR10 mkdir ABC Add a subdirectory ABC under the current directory ZXR10 dir View the current directory information and find that the directory ABC has been added successfully Directory of flash attribute size date time name 1 drwx 2048 MAY 17 2004 14 22 10 IMG J rfj 512 fj size 72 GER v2 6 03B E KRZX 2048 2 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 38 22 CFG 3 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 14 38 22 DATA 4 drwx 512 MAY 17 2004 15 40 24 ABC 65007616 bytes total 48861184
418. the peer party as the BGP neighbor Since R1 and R2 belong to different ASs an EBGP session needs to be set up R1 will advertise on 230 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisite Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration network 182 16 0 0 16 and R2 will advertise on network 182 17 0 0 16 BGP Route Advertisement Refer to below procedure for BGP route advertisement configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER 1 Router Command Line Interface has been accessed BGP is running on a network To advertise network into BGP use network lt ip address gt lt net mask gt command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 284 TABLE 284 BGP NETWORK COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode network lt ip address gt BGP route lt net mask gt This designates a network table for BGP routing process Result This advertises a network into BGP routing process Use the redistribute command to redistribute routes learned by other protocols into BGP route mode which is shown in Table 285 TABLE 285 BGP REDISTRIBUTE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode redistribute lt prot name gt This redistributes routes metric obtained by other routing lt value gt ica protocols into BGP routing route map table lt string gt Result This command redistributes other routing protocols into BGP redistribute command can redistribute routes of IGPs RIP O
419. this program TFTP Name SolarW inds Net TFTP Server Publisher Solarwinds Net Keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections from the Internet or a network If you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can unblock it When should unblock a program Result SolarWinds TFTP window is displayed showing an ip address configured on Ethernet interface of computer system on left side and TFTP directory on right side of taskbar 3 Select file menu and then Click Configure as shown in Figure 50 FiGURE 50 MAIN TFTP WINDOW TFTP Server ES Tools Help Configure inds Net TFTP Server Clear Log Exit C ATFTP Root 10 40 88 120 4 A different directory for storing image files can be selected By default this is C NTFTP Root as shown in Figure 51 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 69 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA FIGURE 51 TFTP ROOT DIRECTORY z TFTP Server Configuration Result This displays current root directory for image files 5 Select security tab from TFTP Server Configuration window there are some options available Transmit only receive only Transmit and Receive files Select Transmit and Receive files as shown in Figure 52 By default Receive files option is selected FIGURE 52 TFTP SECURITY WINDOW a TFTP Server Configuration T
420. tial and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Chapter 8 Smart Group Configuration TABLE 151 BIND COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode Interface Interface smartgroup lt smartgrup config This bind the link no gt Result This bind the link 3 To configure the load sharing function on the SMARTGROUP interface use smartgroup load balance command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 152 TABLE 152 SMART GROUP LOAD BALANCE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode smartgroup interface This configures the load sharing load confi function on the SMARTGROUP balance g interface Result This configures the load sharing function on the SMARTGROUP interface 4 To implement the ACL function on the SMARTGROUP interface use ip access group command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 153 TABLE 153 IP AccESS GROUP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This implements the ACL function on the SMARTGROUP interface ip access Interface group config Result This implements the ACL function on the SMARTGROUP interface ND OF STEPS Example Figure 72 shows the SMARTGROUP configuration example The fei 2 1 fei 2 3 interface of the RA is connected to the fei 2 1 fei 2 3 interface of the RB respectively Bind the interfaces to the smartgroup and connect the fei 1 1 interface of RA and RB to the SMARTBITS tester Confiden
421. tial and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 127 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 128 ZTE FIGURE 72 SMARTGROUP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE RA fei 1 1 i Ml NEM RB fei 2 1 fei 2 2 fei 2 3 fei 1 1 Configurations of RA are as follows ZXR10 config finte ZXR10 config if 255 255 255 0 ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config int ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config int ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config int ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config tinte ZXR10 config if packet ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config int ZXR10 config if 2554 255 255 0 ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config tip 10 10 1042 rface smartgroupl ip address 10 10 10 1 exit erface fei 2 1 smartgroup 1 mode active exit erface fei 2 2 smartgroup 1 mode active exit erface fei 2 3 smartgroup 1 mode active exit rface smartgroupl smartgroup load balance per exit erface fei 1 1 ip address 192 18 1 1 exit route 1927 19 1 0 BSS 255 625 5410 Configurations of RB are as follows ZXR10 config inte ZXR10 255 255422554 0 ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config int ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config if ZXR10 config int ZXR10 config if config if ip rface smartgroupl address 101051042 exit erface fei 2 1 smartgroup 1 mode active exit erface fei 2 2 smartgroup 1 mode active
422. till taking part in the process When the host leaves the group the multicast router will receive a leave message and then it will immediately query whether there are still active group members in the group If yes the multicast router will continue to forward data If not it will not forward data any longer There are two versions available in the current actual applications the IGMP V1 and the IGMP V2 The IGMP V2 has more enhanced features than the IGMP Vi It finishes exchanging information between hosts and routers by means of four types of messages Group member query V2 member report Leave report V1 member report The Vi member report is used for the compatibility with the IGMP V1 Multicast Tree To realize the multicast communication in the TCP IP network the possession of the multicast source the receiver and of the multicast packet path is essential For path selection the most common method is to construct tree routes The reasons are that the tree route has two following advantages The packet reaches different receivers along branches in a parallel mode A packet copy only occurs in the branch position which keeps the packets sent over network to minimum A multicast tree is a set which is composed of a series of input interfaces and output interfaces of routes It determines an unique forwarding path between the subnet where the multicast source lies and the subnets containing group membe
423. ting the closing flag sequence and allowing 2 bytes for the FCS field The default maximum length of the information field is 1 500 bytes By prior agreement consenting PPP implementations can use other values for the maximum information field length Frame check sequence FCS normally 16 bits 2 bytes By prior agreement consenting PPP implementations can use a 32 bit 4 byte FCS for improved error detection The LCP can negotiate modifications to the standard PPP frame structure Modified frames however always will be clearly distinguishable from standard frames LCP can negotiate modifications to standard PPP frame structure Modified frames however always must be clearly distinguishable from standard frames PPP Authentication Protocols Point to Point Protocol PPP currently supports two authentication protocols Password Authentication Protocol PAP and Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP Both are specified in RFC 1334 and are supported on synchronous and asynchronous interfaces Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 133 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA PAP Password Authentication Protocol CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Password Authentication Protocols PAP Background PAP provides a simple method for a remote node to establish its identity using a two way handshake After PPP link establishment phase
424. tion lt peer address gt lt desc text gt This adds illustrative description to MSDP neighbors Result This adds illustrative description to MSDP neighbors Note Mesh Group consists of MSDP speakers where every two of them are connected by the MDSP When the SA packet of the MSDP neighbor from the same Mesh Group is received it will not be forwarded to the other MSDP neighbors of the same Mesh Group 2 To take the IP address of a designated interface as the RP address of the SA message use ip msdp originator id lt interface name gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 403 TABLE 403 IP MsDP ORIGINATOR COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip msdp Global originator configuration This takes the IP address of a id designated interface as the RP interface address of the SA message name Result This takes the IP address of a designated interface as the RP address of the SA message 3 To limit the number of SA messages from the designated MSDP neighbor in the SA cache table use ip msdp sa limit peer address lt sa limit gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 404 346 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration TABLE 404 IP MsDP SA LIMIT COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode dictom a This limits the number of SA id messages fr
425. tion dot1Q 100 ZXR10_R3 config subif ip address 192 168 1 2 255255255252 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 1 1 Network Protocol Configuration I ntroduction Contents I ntroduction I P Classes Overview This chapter describes IP addresses and ARP protocol and also introduces related configuration on ZXR10 GER This chapter covers the the following topics TABLE 194 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 7 Topic Page No 155 IP Address Configuring ARP 158 IP Address Network addresses in IP protocol stack refer to IP addresses An IP address consists of two parts One part involves network bits indicating network where address is located and other part involves host bits indicating a special host on network IP addresses are divided into five classes A B C D and E first three classes are commonly used Addresses of class D are network multicast addresses and addresses of class E are reserved classes Table 195 lists range of each IP class addresses Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 155 Subnets Regulations on 156 I P addresses M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA TABLE 195 IP ADDRESSES RANGE Feature Class Bit of DEAE DOSE Range it Bit Header Class 0 8 24 0 0 0 0 127 255 255 255 A Class 10 16 16 128 0 0 0 191 255 255 255 B Class 110 24 8 192 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 C Class 1110 Multica
426. tion of ZTE CORPORATION 107 J ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA TABLE 119 MULTILINK INTERFACE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode interface Creates a multilink interface and lt interface global config enters the interface number gt configuration mode Result This enables to create multilink interface and to enter into it 3 To configure an IP address of an interface use ip address lt ip address gt lt net mask gt lt broadcast address gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 120 TABLE 120 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip address Interface lt ip address gt This configures an ip address of lt net mask gt an interface lt broadcast address gt Result This configures an ip address of an interface 4 To bind physical link of multiple E1s use multilink group lt multilink number gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 121 TABLE 121 MULTI LINK GROUP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode multilink group e multilink Interface This binds link to multilink number Result This sets multiple E1 links to a group 5 To configure end point string of multilink use ppp multilink endpoint string lt string gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 122 TABLE 122 PPP MULTILINK END POINT COMMAND Command Command Co
427. to below procedure for configuring V_switch maintenance and diagnosis on ZTE ZXR10 GER router Router Command Line Interface has been accessed Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Steps 1 Chapter 7 V_Switch Configuration To display the V_Switch configuration information of the specified interface use show running config command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 147 TABLE 147 SHOW RUNNING CONFIG Command Command Command Function Format Mode show interes This displays the V_Switch running config configuration information of the config specified interface Result This displays the V_Switch configuration information of the specified interface To view the entries in the VLAN forwarding table use show vlan forwarding command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 148 TABLE 148 SHOW VLAN FORWARDING Command Command Command Function Format Mode show vlan Interface This view the entries in the forwarding config VLAN forwarding table Result This view the entries in the VLAN forwarding table END OF STEPS Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 123 y ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA This page is intentionally blank 124 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION Chapter 8 Smart Group Configuration I ntroduction Contents Access Network Requirements
428. traffic eng tunnels lt tunnel_id gt command in Privileged mode as shown in Table 374 TABLE 374 SHOW MPLS TUNNEL COMMAND Command Command Format Mode Command Function show mpls traffic eng tunnels lt tunnel_id gt This display the MPLS TE Privileged specific tunnel information Result This shows the MPLS TE specific tunnel information END OF STEPS MPLS TE Example FIGURE 110 MPLS TE EXAMPLE 10 10 12 1 24 10 10 23 3 24 10 10 12 2 24 10 10 23 2 24 poe R fei_1 1 fei_1 5 R2 fei_1 6 fei_3 1 R3 The three routers as shown in above figure assume the following tasks respectively Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 325 ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I 326 ZTE Router Loopback Task Tunnel R1 100 1 1 1 End Tunneli destination address node 100 1 1 3 R2 100 1 1 2 Middle node R3 100 1 1 3 End Tunnel3 destination address node 100 1 1 1 R1 configuration R1 config tinterface fei 1 1 Rl config if ip address 10 10 12 1 255 255 255 0 Rl config if ip rsvp bandwidth 30000 10000 Rl config if mpls traffic eng tunnels Rl config if exit Rl config interface loopbackl Rl config if ip address 100 1 1 1 255425954255 2555 Rl config if exit Rl config mpls traffic eng tunnels R1 config Rl config router ospf 1 Rl config router mpls traffic eng area 0 Rl config
429. trol e1 ZXR10_Ri config control e1 ZXR10_Ri config control e1 ZXR10_Ri config control e1 ZXR10_Ri config control e1 ZXR10_Ri config control e1 ZXR10_Ri config control e1 10 framed 11 framed 12 framed 13 framed 14 framed 15 framed 16 framed 17 framed ZXR10_Ri config interface serial 5 2 2 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 10 1 2 1 255 255 255 0 ZXR10_Ri config interface serial 5 2 3 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 10 1 3 1 255 255 255 0 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Background Chapter 6 Interface Configuration ZXR10_Ri config interface serial_5 2 17 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 10 1 17 1 255 255 255 0 Configuration of R2 ZXR10_R2 config controller ce3_5 2 ZXR10_R2 config control channelized e1 ZXR10_R2 config control e1 2 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 3 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 4 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 5 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 6 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 7 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 8 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 9 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 10 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 11 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 12 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 13 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 14 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 15 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 16 framed ZXR10_R2 config control e1 17 framed ZXR10_R2 config interface serial_5 2 2 ZXR10_R2 config if ip address 10 1 2 2 255
430. tructure and Principles RE 01GP48 S15KLC This is a one port POS48 single channel optical interface card providing one channel standard OC 48c STM 16c POS optical interface In the receiving direction this card extracts payload from 2 5 Gbps optical signals and provides PPP packets for the packet processing card through the bus In the transmitting direction this card receives PPP packets from the packet processing card through the bus This card maps the packets into SONET SDH virtual containers VC 4 16c and then sends the packets through the 2 5 Gbps optical interface Figure 15 shows the RE 01GP48 S15KLC card FIGURE 15 RE 01GP48 S15KLC CARD RE 01GP48 S15KLC RUN DATA LINK RE 01GP48 S15KLC card specifications are as follows SC connector single mode fiber with the wavelength of 1310nm and the maximum transmission distance of 15km single channel RE 01GP48 S15KLC card has four LED indicators Table 22 shows their functions TABLE 22 RE 01GP48 S15KLC CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description This is constantly on if the interface card is working RUN normally and this goes off if the interface card fails This is constantly on in the case of data sending and DATA receiving and this is off in the case if data sending or receiving fails SD This is constantly on if optical signals are available and this goes off if optical signals are not available This is constantly on in t
431. tten declaration from our suppliers assuring that any potential trace contamination levels of the substances listed above are below the maximum level set by EU 2002 95 EC or are exempt due to their application Optional used when our suppliers declare their compliance with RoHS ZXR10 GER manufactured by ZTE CORPORATION meet the requirements of EU 2002 95 EC however some assemblies are customized to client specifications Addition of specialized customer specified materials or processes which do not meet the requirements of EU 2002 95 EC may negate RoHS compliance of the assembly To guarantee compliance of the assembly the need for compliant product must be communicated to ZTE CORPORATION in written form Optional used when necessary This declaration is issued based on our current level of knowledge Since conditions of use are outside our control ZTE CORPORATION makes no warranties express or implied and assumes no liability in connection with the use of this information Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION vii I ntroduction Local Safety Specifications Chapter 1 Safety Instructions This chapter describes the frequently use safety signs and related precautionary measures used in handling of high voltage equipment Safety Instruction This equipment contains high temperature and high voltage hardware equipment so only skillful and highly practiced personnel are recommended for th
432. twork Result This configures RIP network timers for adjusting parameters with other RIP neighbor 2 To change the interpacket delay for RIP updates sent use the output delay command in RIP configuration mode as shown in Table 212 To remove the delay use the no form of this command TABLE 212 OUTPUT COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode output RIP Config delay This defines interpacket delay for packets RIP updates delay packets delay ranges from lt 1 4294967295 gt Consider using this command if there is a high end router sending at high speed to a low speed router that might not be able to receive at the high speed Configuring this command will help prevent the routing table from losing information Result This configures interpacket delay for RIPupdates Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 175 176 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA 3 To define a neighboring router with which to exchange routing information use neighbor command in RIP configuration mode as shown in Table 213 To remove an entry use the no form of this command TABLE 213 NEIGHBOR COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode neighbor ip RIP Config This defines neighboring address gt router with which routing information is exchanged lt ip address gt refers to IP address of a peer router with which routi
433. twork a Point to multipoint network Virtual links OSPF routers exchange Hello packets at a certain interval to keep alive status among neighbors Hello packets can find OSPF neighbors set up association and adjacency among neighbors and select designated routers Among the three network types that is broadcast network point to point network and point to multi point network Hello packets are multicast packets Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH OSPF Neighbors Adjacency and Router Designation NBMA Network Designated Router DR Chapter 14 OSPF Configuration However in NBMA networks and virtual links Hello packets are unicast to neighbor routers OSPF uses three types of timers related to Hello packets 1 Call interval Call interval is an attribute of an interface which defines at which interval a router sends a Hello packet out each interface The default call interval depends on network type In broadcast and point to point networks the default call interval is 10s In NBMA and point to multipoint networks the default call interval is 30s Two adjacent routers must agree with call interval to become neighbors 2 Dead interval of router A router dead interval refers to a time interval between receiving of last Hello packet from its neighbor and detection of offline status of neighbor Default dead interval is four times the call interval the same is true for all types
434. twork administrator can select the forwarding path according to the destination address message application TCP UDP port number or source IP address In message forwarding control policy routing is more capable than traditional routing Policy routing can implement traffic engineering to a certain extent thus making traffic of different service quality or different service data such as voice and FTP to go to different paths The user has higher and higher requirements for network performance therefore it is necessary to select different packet forwarding paths based on the differences of services or user categories Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 257 Match and Set 258 Commands I ngress M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA In the ZXR10 GER the network administrator can define different Route maps according to the match and set statements and apply the Route map to the message receiving interface thus implementing path selection Each Route map has a series of sequences and each sequence contains multiple match and set statements The match statement defines match conditions Policy routing is performed when a received message meets the conditions The set statement specifies the routing behaviors when a message meets the match conditions If a message does not meet the match conditions in a sequence the system matches it in the next sequence When a
435. types of IS IS authentication Inter neighbor authentication Intra area authentication Inter area authentication Inter SNP authentication At present ZXR10 GER only supports plain text authentication Purpose This below procedure delivers information about how to do authentication in IS IS protocol on ZTE ZXR10 GER 220 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Prerequisite Steps Related Information 1 Chapter 15 IS IS Configuration Router Command Line Interface has been accessed IS IS is running in a network To authenticate IS IS neighbor use command isis authentication key level 1 level 2 in IS IS interface config mode as shown in Table 276 TABLE 276 Is IS AUTHENTICATION COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode isis authentication IS IS This defines key level interface authentication of IS IS 1 level 2 config neighbor key is from 1 180 characters Result This configures Adjacent IS IS router authentication in same area For intra area authentication authentication between different IS IS areas use command authentication lt key gt level 1 level 2 in IS IS config mode as shown in Table 277 TABLE 277 INTRA AREA AUTHENTICATION COMMAND Command Command Function Command Format Mode authentication IS IS This defines inter area lt key gt level interface E authentication 1 level 2 config key is from 1 180 characters
436. ucture and Principles I ntroduction Contents Overview This chapter describes ZXR10 GER working procedures and system modules in detail This chapter covers the following topics TABLE 5 TOPICS IN CHAPTER 3 Topic Page No Working Principles 9 Hardware Structure 14 ZXR10 GER System Architecture 15 Line Interface Cards LIC 23 Power Supply Module 40 Fan Plug in Box 45 Working Principles Working principles depend on ZXR10 GER product models These models are described in the following table Topic Page No ZXR10 GER 02 04 Working Principles 10 ZXR10 GERO8 Working Principles 11 Data Packet Sending 12 Data Packet Receiving 12 Data Packet Forwarding 13 Packet Discarding 13 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 9 10 Forwarding Channel Local Channel Control Channel M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA ZXR10 GER 02 04 Working Principles ZXR10 GERO2 04 modules are connected to one another in three modes Forwarding channel FOCUS buses are used for connection between the line interface module and the network processor module Packets are transmitted between modules by means of information elements with the transmission throughput of each channel up to 1 6 Gbps Local channel MIPS buses are used for connection between the control processor module and the network processor module System protocol process is managed by the control processor
437. ue in OSPF config mode as shown in Table 369 322 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Chapter 23 Traffic Engineering Configuration TABLE 369 IGP TE CONFIG COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode mpls traffic eng rauter id OSPF config D the router id for TE lt interface 9 9 name gt mpls traffic eng This sets an area for TE area OSPF config signaling lt area id gt capability OSPF config This sets the OSPF opaque opaque feature Result This configures an IGP protocol to transmit TE 5 To configure the tunnel interface for TE use the following commands vi To enter into tunnel interface mode use interface tunnel lt 1 64 gt command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 370 To set the tunnel mode into mpls use tunnel mode mpis traffic eng command in tunnel interface configuration mode as shown in Table 370 i To define the IP address of the tunnel destination router use tunnel destination ipv4 ipv6 lt ip address gt command in Table 370 To set the bandwidth reserved for tunnel use tunnel mpls traffic eng bandwidth bandwidth command in tunnel interface configuration mode as shown in Table 370 To configure ERO in order to obtain dynamic selection or static configuration of an explicit path use tunnel mpls traffic eng path option number dynamic explicit name lt path name gt identifier lt id gt in tunnel
438. uration interface fei 1 1 description To Userl ip address 10 10 0 254 255 255 255 0 ip policy route map source ip i interface fei_1 2 description To Userl ip address 11 11 0 254 255 255 255 0 ip policy route map source ip 1 interface fei_2 1 description To ISP1 ip address LEO0O lcl 2oSe2 50429594292 interface fei_2 2 description To ISP2 ip address 200 1 1 2 255 255 255 252 ip route 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 1 1 1 access list 10 permit 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 255 access list 20 permit 11 11 0 0 0 0 0 255 j route map source ip permit 10 forwards the messages matching with ACL 10 to 100 1 1 1 match ip address 10 set ip next hop 100 1 1 1 1 route map source ip permit 20 forwards the messages matching with ACL 20 to 200 1 1 1 match ip address 20 set ip next hop 200 1 1 1 In this instance the service connection is as follows a When ISP1 and ISP2 are normal ISP1 and ISP2 are selected for the users in the 10 10 0 0 24 and 11 11 0 0 24 subnets respectively 262 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTEDH Chapter 17 Policy Routing Configuration When ISP1 is normal and ISP2 is abnormal ISP1 is selected for both the users of the two subnets The default route is adopted for users in the 11 11 0 0 24 subnet When ISP1 is abnormal and ISP2 is normal the services in the 11 11 0 0 24 subnet are normal while those in the 10 10 0 0 24 subnet are interrupted Confid
439. uration mode as shown in Table 167 TABLE 167 MULTILINK INTERFACE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode interface Creates a multilink interface and lt interface Global enters the interface number gt configuration mode Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 139 M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTEBA Result This enables to create multilink interface and to enter into it 3 To configure an IP address of an interface use ip address ip address lt net mask gt lt broadcast address gt in interface config mode as shown in Table 168 TABLE 168 IP ADDRESS COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ip address Interface lt ip address gt This configures an ip address of lt net mask gt an interface lt broadcast address gt Result This configures an ip address of an interface 4 To bind physical link of multiple Els use multilink group lt multilink number gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 169 TABLE 169 MULTI LINK GROUP COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode multilink group v multilink Interface This binds link to multilink number Result This sets multiple E1 links to a group 5 To configure end point string of multilink use ppp multilink endpoint string lt string gt command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 170 TABLE 170 PPP MULTI
440. ure 21 shows the RE 02GE GBIC card FIGURE 21 RE 02GE GBIC CARD RE 02GE N GBIC RUN TX RX TX RX SD1 SD2 DATATE LINKI DATA2F LINK2 Interfaces RE 02GE GBIC card can provide two channel Gigabit optical interface of different transmission distances by configuring GBIC parts of different specifications Interface features are shown in Table 30 TABLE 30 RE 02GE GBIC CARD SPECIFICATIONS Port Type Specifications SX GBIC M500 LX GBIC S10K LH GBIC S70K SC connector multi mode fiber with the wavelength of 850nm and maximum transmission distance of 500m SC connector single mode fiber with the wavelength of 1310nm and maximum transmission distance of 10km SC connector single mode fiber with the wavelength of 1550nm and the maximum transmission distance of Indicators RE 02GE GBIC card contains seven indicators Table 31 sows their functions TABLE 31 RE 02GE GBIC CARD INDICATORS Indicators RUN DATA per port Function Description This is constantly on if the interface card is working normally and this goes off if the interface card fails This is constantly on in the case of data sending and receiving and this is off in the case if data sending or receiving fails Note 1 This is constantly on if optical signals are available SD per port and this becomes off if there are no optical signals LINK per port available Note 2 This is constantly o
441. uter Command Line Interface has been accessed Steps 1 To set a hostname of system use hostname command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 74 TABLE 74 HOSTNAME COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode hostname Global Config This sets hostname of system Result This configures hostname of system Note By default the host name of the system is ZXR10 After host name is changed log on to the router again and the new host name appears on screen 2 To set Welcome message upon system boot or when login on telnet use banner command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 75 TABLE 75 BANNER INCOMING COMMAND WINDOW Command Command Command Function Format Mode banner Global Config This sets hostname of system Result This configures hostname of system Example ZXR10 config banner incoming Enter TEXT message End with the character KK K CK K CK CK K K K CK K K K CK CK K CE K K K CE K OK CE K OK Welcome to ZXR10 Router World KKK K K K K K CE K K K K K K K K K K K OK K K ZXR10 config 3 To prevent an unauthorized user from modifying the configuration use enable secret 10 lt password gt 5 password password command in global configuration mode as shown in Table 76 80 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Related Information Purpose Prerequisite
442. uter Operating System Background ZTE has developed Router Operating System ZXROS for its carrier class routers ZTE completely owns the self proprietary rights of ZXROS ZXROS is used in ZXR10 GER Supporting ZXR10 GER supports industry standard protocols These Protocols protocols are given below Industry Standard Protocols Link layer protocol PPP MPPP VLAN TRUNK HDLC and FR Network layer protocol IP ICMP ARP V SWITCH and SMARTGROUP Transmission layer protocol TCP and UDP Routing protocol RIP v1 v2 OSPF v2 BGP4 integrated IS IS RIPng OSPFv3 ISISv6 and BGP4 MPLS VPN VPWS QOS TE policy routing and load sharing Tunnel protocol GRE 6in4 tunnel 6to4 tunnel 4in6 tunnel Application layer protocol Telnet FTP and TFTP Network layer control application NAT ACL and URPF NM protocol SNMP v1 v2 v3 RMON vi and NTP Technical Features and Parameters Standard ZXR10 GER follows IEEE standard Q SZX 122 2002 ZXR10 middle low end router Features Table 4 shows ZXR10 GER technical features and parameters TABLE 4 TECHNICAL FEATURES AND PARAMETERS Item Specification Processor specification Dedicated network processor SDRAM configuration 256M 512M 512M by default SRAM configuration 8M FLASH configuration 64 M Number of available slots 8 Basic configurations 1COM and 1FE Bus bandwidth 32 Gbps Message processing capability 24Mpps Number of routing entries 200K RIP v1 v2 OSPF BGP4 and Routing protoc
443. uter User Manual Volume I ZTERA TABLE 164 PPP PAP PASSWORD COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode ppp chap This configures the password f when the local router is password patente authenticated by the peer lt password gt router in CHAP mode Result This sets PPP CHAP password 5 To setup PPP link with peer router use ppp open command in interface configuration mode as shown in Table 165 TABLE 165 PPP OPEN COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode This takes initiative in ppp open Interface setting up a PPP link with peer router Result This sets PPP link with peer router END OF STEPS Example As shown in Figure 75 pos3 3 1 interface of router R1 is connected to that of router R2 CHAP authentication mode is used User name and password configured on each interface are used for local and remote authentication User names and passwords at both ends must be consistent with each other FIGURE 75 PPP CHAP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 192 168 1 2 30 Pos3 3 1 RI 192 168 1 1 30 R Configuration of R1 ZXR10 Ri config interface pos3 3 1 ZXR10_Ri config if ip address 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 252 ZXR10_R1 config if ppp authentication chap ZXR10_Ri config if ppp chap hostname ZXR10 ZXR10 Ri1 config if ppp chap password hello ZXR10 Ri1 config if ppp open 138 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Background Purpose Prerequi
444. viliged mode as shown in Table 414 TABLE 414 SHOW IP MROUTE FORWARDING COMMAND Command Format Command Mode Command Function show ip forwarding Privileged mroute group This shows address group multicast address source forwarding routing address source tables address gt Result This shows multicast forwarding routing tables 350 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERR Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration 3 To show the information about the multicast reverse path forwarding RPF use show ip rpf lt source address gt command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 415 TABLE 415 SHOW IP RPF COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode show ip rpf Privileged This shows the information source about the multicast reverse address path forwarding RPF Result This shows the information about the multicast reverse path forwarding RPF END OF STEPS IGMP Maintenance and Diagnosis Below procedure gives information about IGMP maintenance amp diagnosis Router CLI Privileged Mode has been accessed ZXR10 1800 2800 3800 Router provides some commands to show the IGMP status The following are some common commands 1 To view the IGMP information on an interface use show ip igmp interface interface name command in Priviliged mode as shown in Table 416 TABLE 416 SHOW IP IGMP INTERFACE COMMAND Com
445. will forward the packet only when its interface has members of that group IGMP provides information that is required when packets are forwarding to the destination the last stage Multicast routers and the hosts that receive multicast data exchange information mutually is collected from the group members of the hosts that directly connect to multicast routers IGMP is the protocol that is used by multicast routers to know about information about multicast group members Generally it employs two kinds of packets group member enquiry packets and group member report packets A multicast router periodically sends query messages of group members to all hosts to know which specific group members exist in the connected networks The mainframe returns a report Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Leave Message Two Versions Path Selection Definition Spanning Tree Chapter 24 Multicast Routing Configuration message of group members reporting the multicast group which they belong to When a host joins a new group it will send a join message immediately rather than wait for an enquiry for cases where the host is the first member of that group When a host starts to receive messages as a member of a group the multicast router will check whether members of the group take part in the process by periodically querying the group The multicast router will continue to forward data as long as a host is s
446. wo channel standard OC 12c STM 4c POS optical interface This card mainly implements optical electrical signal conversion clock and data recovery of the line POS frame mapping of the OC 12c and data width conversion Panel Figure 22 shows the RE 02P12 SFP card FIGURE 22 RE 02P12 SFP CARD RE 02P12 SFP Interfaces RE 02P12 SFP card can provide two channel optical interface with different transmission distances by configuring SFP parts of different specifications Interface features are shown in Table 32 34 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Indicators Definition Panel Interfaces Chapter 3 Structure and Principles TABLE 32 RE 02P12 SFP CARD INTERFACE FEATURES Port Type Description LC connector multi mode fiber Wavelength 1310 SFP 2KM ae nm Max transmission distance 2km SFP 15KM LC connector single mode fiber Wavelength 1310 nm Max transmission distance 15km LC connector single mode fiber Wavelength 1310 SFP 40KM LAM nm Max transmission distance 40km There is one RUN indicator on the RE 02P12 SFP card panel In addition each port has two indicators Table 33 shows their functions TABLE 33 RE 02P12 SFP CARD INDICATORS Indicators Function Description RUN It is constantly on if the interface card works normally and it goes off if the interface card fails Interface data indicator It is constantly on in the case DATA per up n
447. ws no export Advertisement to EBGP neighbors is disabled a no advertise Advertisement to any BGP neighbors is disabled a no export subconfed Routes with the attribute will not be advertised outside the community Refer to below procedure for community string attribute configuration on ZTE ZXR10 GER a Refer Router Command Line Interface has been accessed BGP is running on a network 1 For sending community string attribute use neighbor lt ip address gt send community command in BGP route mode as shown in Table 295 TABLE 295 SEND COMMUNITY ATTRIBUTE COMMAND Command Command Command Function Format Mode neighbor lt ip This sends the community address gt send Route attribute upon route community advertisement to neighbors Result This sends the community attribute upon route advertisement to neighbors 244 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH Purpose Prerequisites Steps Chapter 16 BGP Configuration In the following configuration R1 will advertise to routes to its neighbors and will be forbidden to advertise routes of 192 166 1 0 24 to other EBGP neighbors END OF STEPS Configuration of R1 ZXR10_Ri config router bgp 100 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 3 3 3 3 remote as 300 ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 3 3 3 3 send community ZXR10_R1 config router neighbor 3 3 3 3 route map setcommunity out ZXR10_Ri config route map setcommunity permit 10 ZXR
448. xchange of packets which is composed of switching channels Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 19 20 Network processor module Definition Panel Console Part M ZXR10 GER V2 6 03 General Excellent Router User Manual Volume I ZTERA Network processor module consists of network processor RD memory and SRAM memory Each network processor module supports four interface cards and one MIPS buses interface to connect with the Central processor module With MIPS bus central processor module initializes the network processor configuration manages tables in the network processor memory and sends receives packets ZXR10 GEROS SMP Panel SMP provides active standby switching and 1 1 redundancy configuration SMP panel identifies as RE SMP Figure 11 shows SMP panel FiGURE 11 ZxR10 GER SMP PANEL ZXR10 GERO2 04 manages through console part by using terminal emulation software like HyperTerminal CONSOLE port is a RS 232 DB9 TO RJ45 which is connected with background administration terminal through serial cable Connection cable contains two ends one with DB 9 and another is RJ45 Cable sequence is shown in Table 11 TABLE 11 CABLE SEQUENCE RJ 45 End Signal DB9 End 1 7 2 6 3 TXD 2 4 GND 5 5 GND 5 6 RXD 3 7 4 8 8 1 9 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ZTERH AUX Port 10 100 1000 Base T Ethernet Interface Chapter 3 Structure and Princi

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

90 SERIES USER`S MANUAL - Virginia Panel Corporation  Followspot 1200 HMI , cañon hmi 1200  TQB2B0131 - selek.com.br  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file